SINUMERIK 840D/
SIMODRIVE 611 digital
Installation and Start-Up Guide 04.2000 Edition
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/
FM-NC
SINUMERIK
Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC Documentation (04.00)
Brochure Catalog
Ordering Info
NC 60.1 *)
Technical Info.
NC 60.2
Description of
Functions
Drive Functions *)
Description of
Functions
Basic Machine *)
Extended Functions
Special Functions
SINUMERIK
611D
840D/810D
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/
810D/
FM-NC
840D/840Di/
810D/
FM-NC/611
Accessories
Catalog
Accessories NC-Z
SINUMERIK
SIROTEC
SIMODRIVE
840D/840Di/
810D
FM-NC
611D
Lists *)
Installation &
Start-up Guide *)
FM-NC
810D
840D/611D
MMC
SINUMERIK
840D
Description of
Functions
Digitizing
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/
FM-NC
Configuring Kit
MMC100/101
Configuring
Syntax
Development Kit
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/
FM-NC
Screen Kit
MMC100/101
SW Update and
Configuration
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/
810D/
FM-NC
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/
810D
Operator
Components
(HW) *)
840D/840Di/
810D/
FM-NC
Description of
Functions
SINUMERIK
Safety Integrated
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/
FM-NC
611,
Motors
SIMODRIVE
DOC ON CD *)
The SINUMERIK System
General Documentation
Electronic Documentation
Manufacturer / Service Documentation
Manufacturer / Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/
FM-NC
SINUMERIK
840D/810D
User Documentation
Diagnostics
Guide *)
Operator’s Guide
Unit
Operator Panel
HPU
HT 6
AutoTurn
Short Guide
Programming (1)
Setup (2)
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/
810D/
FM-NC
Program. Guide
Short Guide
Fundamentals *)
Advanced *)
Cycles
Measuring Cycles
Description of
Functions
ManualTurn
ShopMill
Description of
Functions
Synchronized
Actions
Wood, Glass,
Ceramics
840D/810D
SINUMERIK
Operator’s Guide
ManualTurn
Short Guide ManualTurn
ShopMill
Short Guide ShopMill
840D/810D
Manufacturer / Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
840D/810D
Descr. of Functions
Computer Link
Tool Data
Information
System
*) These documents are a minimum requirement for the control
Operator’sGuide
Short Guide
Operator’s
Guide *)
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/
FM-NC
Configuring
(HW) *)
FM-NC
810D
840D
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK
840D/810D
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/
FM-NC
Description of
Functions
Operator Interface
OP 030
Description of
Functions
Tool Manage-
ment
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
840D
611D 840D
611D
Description of
Functions
Linear Motor
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
SIROTEC
EMC
Guidelines
Description of
Functions
Hydraulics
Module
Analog Module
User Documentation
SINUMERIK
System Overview
840Di
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
Descr. of Functions
ISO Dialects for
SINUMERIK
840D/810D SINUMERIK
Descr. of Functions
CAM Integration
DNC NT–2000
SINUMERIK
Manual
(HW + Installation
and Start-up)
840Di
Valid for
Control Software Version
SINUMERIK 840D 5
SINUMERIK 840DE (export version) 5
Drive
SIMODRIVE 611D 4
04.00 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D
SIMODRIVE 611D
Installation and Start-Up Guide
General Preparations 1
Configuration 2
Settings, MPI/OPI 3
EMC/ESD Measures 4
Power On and Power Up 5
Parameterization of
Control
PLC Program 6
PLC Start-Up 7
Alarm and Message Texts 8
Axis/Spindle Dry Run 9
Drive Optimization 10
Data Backup 11
SW/HW Replacement 12
MMC 13
Miscellaneous 14
Abbreviations A
References B
Index
SINUMERIK documentation
Printing history
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The status of each edition is shown by the code in the Remarks column.
Status code in the “Remarks” column:
ANew documentation.. . . . .
BUnrevised reprint with new Order No.. . . . .
CRevised edition with new status. . . . . .
If factual changes have been made on the page since the last edition,
this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page.
Edition Order No. Remarks
06.94 6FC5 2970AB100BP0 A
08.94 6FC5 2970AB100BP1 C
02.95 6FC5 2972AB100BP0 C
04.95 6FC5 2972AB100BP1 C
09.95 6FC5 2973AB100BP0 C
03.96 6FC5 2973AB100BP1 C
08.97 6FC5 2974AB100BP0 C
12.97 6FC5 2974AB100BP1 C
12.98 6FC5 2975AB100BP0 C
08.99 6FC5 2975AB100BP1 C
04.00 6FC5 2975AB100BP2 C
This manual is included in the documentation available on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)
Edition Order No. Remarks
04.00 6FC5 2985CA000BG2 C
Trademarks
SIMATICr, SIMATIC HMIr, SIMATIC NETr, SIROTECr, SINUMERIKr and SIMODRIVEr are Siemens
trademarks. The other designations in this publication may also be trade marks, the use of which by third
parties may constitute copyright violation.
Further information is available on the Internet under:
http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik
This publication was produced with Interleaf V 7.
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent
grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
Siemens AG 1994 2000. All rights reserved.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be
executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an
obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when
servicing.
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to
the hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences might
exist. The information contained in this document is, however,
reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the
edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement.
Subject to technical changes without prior notice.
SiemensAktiengesellschaftOrder No. 6FC5 2975AB100BP2
Printed in the Federal Republic of German
y
3ls
03.96
v
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
PREFACE
The SINUMERIK documentation is divided into 3 different levels:
SGeneral documentation
SUser Documentation
SManufacturer/Service Documentation
This document is intended for the manufacturers of machine tools incorporating
SINUMERIK 840D and SIMODRIVE 611D systems.
The Installation and Start-Up Guide provides all the relevant information
required for start-up, installation and servicing.
This document provides information about the control system design and the
interfaces of the individual components. It also describes the start-up and
installation procedure for SINUMERIK 840D with SIMODRIVE 611D including a
list of all data, signals and PLC blocks.
For detailed information about individual functions, function assignment and
performance data of individual components, please refer to the appropriate
document for the subject concerned (e.g. manuals, function descriptions etc.).
User-oriented activities such as the creation of part programs and control
operating procedures are described in detail in separate documents.
Separate descriptions are likewise provided of the tasks to be performed by the
tool manufacturer such as configuring, design and PLC programming.
In addition to the table of contents and indexes of figures and tables, we have
provided the following information in the appendix for your assistance:
1. Index of abbreviations
2. List of references
3. Index
For a complete list and description of SINUMERIK 840D alarms, please refer to
References: /DA/, Diagnostics Guide
For further useful information on start-up and troubleshooting, please refer to
References: /FB/, D1, Diagnostics Tools
Structure of
documentation
Target group
Objective
Standard scope
Searching aids
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide
Preface
03.96
vi Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The following symbols with special significance are used in the documentation:
Note
This symbol appears in this document to draw your attention to information
relevant to the subject in hand.
!Important
This symbol appears in this document to draw your attention to an important
item of information.
Order data option
In this document, you will encounter the symbol shown on the left with a
reference to an ordering data option. Please note that the function described
can operate only if the specified option is installed in the control system.
The following warnings with varying levels of severity are used in this document:
!Danger
This symbol indicates that death, grievous injury or substantial property dam-
age will occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.
!Caution
This symbol indicates minor injuries or property damage may occur if the ap-
propriate precautions are not taken.
!Warning
This symbol indicates that death, grievous injury or substantial property dam-
age may occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.
Symbols
Warnings
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide
Preface
03.96
vii
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Technical information
IBM is a registered trademark of the International Business Corporation.
MSDOS and WINDOWST are registered trademarks of the Microsoft
Corporation.
The following notation and abbreviations are used in this document:
SPLC interface signals > IS Signal name (signal data)
Examples:
IS MMCCPU1 ready (DB10, DBX108.2), i.e. the signal is stored in
data block 10, data byte 108, bit 2.
IS Feedrate/spindle override (DB3148, DBB0), i.e. the signals are
stored for specific spindles/axes in data blocks 31 to 48, data block
byte 0.
SMachine data > MD: MD_NAME (English designation)
SSetting data > SD: SD_NAME (English designation)
SThe character means corresponds to.
After data (e.g. machine data) have been changed, it must also be noted when
the change will become effective (e.g. after power ON or immediately). This in-
formation is therefore always provided.
Trademarks
Notation
Effectiveness of
changes
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide
Preface
03.96
viii Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide
Preface
Notes
04.00
ix
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Contents
1 General Preparations 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Preconditions 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Standard/export version 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Configuration 2-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Mechanical configuration 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 Overview 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2 Mains infeed module 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3 NCU 2-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4 General configuration of SINUMERIK 840D system 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Electrical configuration 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Component connections 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Connection of mains infeed module (U/E, I/RF) 2-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 Motor connection 2-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4 Encoder connection 2-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5 Connection of MMC100 and MMC102/103 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6 Configuration of components for digitizing 2-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Settings, MPI / OPI 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 MPI/OPI, network rules 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Standard configuration 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Standard configuration up to SW 3.1 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Standard configuration as from SW 3.2 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/customer operator panel interface
and/or 1 HHU (up to SW 3.1) 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Connection to OPI bus 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 Connection to MPI bus 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 Example of a configuration of MCP and HHU via OPI 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 Example of a configuration of HHU via MPI 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Handheld unit 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Settings on the HHU up to software version 3.x 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Settings on the HHU for software version 4.x and higher 3-53. . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Configuring the HHU, setting interface parameters 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Example: Connecting the HHU to the SINUMERIK 840D 3-55. . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Handheld programming unit 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Interface signals of the HPU 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Standard configuration of the HPU (without MCP) 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Deviations from the standard HPU configuration
(up to SW 3.1) 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Machine control panel (MCP) 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Customer operator panel interface 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
03.96
x Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.8 Second machine control panel 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 MMC 100/MMC 102/103 operator panel 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.1 Settings on the MMC 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.2 Language default 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 EMC / ESD Measures 4-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Measures to suppress interference 4-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Measures to protect ESD-sensitive components 4-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Power On and Power-Up 5-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Startup sequence 5-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Power on and power-up 5-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Power on 5-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Power-up 5-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3 MMC100 MMC102/103 power-up 5-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.4 Error during control power-up (NC) 5-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.5 Machine control panel (MCP) power-up 5-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.6 Drive system power-up 5-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.7 MMC102/103 BIOS setup 5-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Assigning Parameters to the Control and the PLC Program 6-85. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Machine and setting data 6-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Handling machine and setting data 6-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Protection level concept 6-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Machine data masking filter (SW 4.2 and higher) 6-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 Function 6-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2 Selecting and setting the machine data masking filters 6-92. . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3 Saving the filter settings 6-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Example of start-up design concept 6-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 System data 6-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.1 Basic settings 6-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 Memory configuration 6-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.1 Dynamic RAM memory 6-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2 Static RAM memory 6-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 Scaling machine data 6-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9 Axes and spindles 6-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.1 Description of the axis configuration 6-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.2 Drive configuration (FDD, SLM, MSD) 6-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.3 Setting the axis-specific setpoint/actual value parameters 6-114. . . . . . . . .
6.9.4 Drive parameterization (FDD, MSD) 6-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.5 Parameterization of incremental measuring systems 6-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.6 Parameterization of absolute measuring systems
(EnDat interface) 6-121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.7 Overview of optimization drive parameters 6-124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.8 Axis data 6-127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.9 Velocity matching (axis) 6-129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.10 Position controller data (axis) 6-130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.11 Monitoring functions (axis) 6-133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide
Contents
04.00
03.96
xi
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.12 Reference point approach (axis) 6-138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.13 Spindle data 6-140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.14 Spindle configuration 6-142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.15 Encoder matching (spindle) 6-142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.16 Speeds and setpoint adjustment for spindle 6-144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.17 Spindle positioning 6-145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.18 Spindle synchronization 6-146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.19 Spindle monitoring 6-148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.20 Example: Start-up of NCK I/O devices 6-150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors) 6-152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.1 General information about starting up linear motors 6-152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.2 Start-up: Linear motor with one primary part 6-154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.3 Start-up: Linear motors with 2 identical primary parts 6-163. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.4 Mounting dimensions 6-165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.5 Temperature sensors for 1FN1 and 1FN3 motors 6-166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.6 Measuring system 6-169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.7 Parallel connection of linear motors 6-172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.8 Test measurements on linear motor 6-174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11 AM / U/F function 6-176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.12 System settings for power up, RESET and part program start 6-177. . . . . .
7 PLC Start-Up 7-181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 PLC start-up 7-181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Overview of organization blocks, function blocks and DBs 7-184. . . . . . . . .
8 Alarm and Message Texts 8-185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Alarm and message texts 8-186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 Alarm text files for MMC 100 8-186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 Alarm text files for MMC 102/103 8-188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 Alarm text files for HPU 8-190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4 Syntax for alarm text files 8-192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.5 Properties of alarm list 8-195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Axis and Spindle Dry Run 9-197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 Preconditions 9-197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 Axis test run 9-198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 Testing the spindle 9-200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 10-203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1 Instructions for use 10-204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.1 System requirements 10-205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.2 Installation 10-205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3 Starting the program 10-206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.4 Terminating the program 10-206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 Measuring functions 10-207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 Interface signals Traverse request and Motion enable drive test 10-209. . . .
10.4 Aborting measuring functions 10-210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5 Frequency response measurement 10-211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide
Contents
04.00
03.96
xii Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.5.1 Measurement of torque control loop 10-211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.2 Measurement of speed control loop 10-212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.3 Measurement of position control loop 10-216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6 Graphic display 10-219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7 Gantry axes (SW 5.1 and later) 10-221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.1 Description 10-221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.2 Conditions 10-221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher) 10-222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.1 Description 10-222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.2 Operation, basic display 10-223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.3 Parameterization 10-224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.4 Performing measurement 10-227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.5 Display function 10-228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.6 File function 10-230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.7 Print graph 10-231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.9 Analog output (DAC) 10-233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10 Automatic controller adjustment
(only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher) 10-234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10.1 Flow chart for self-optimization 10-236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10.2 Input options for self-optimization 10-240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 Data Backup 11-245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1 General information 11-245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 Data backup via MMC 100 11-248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103 11-254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.1 Data backup via V24 on the MMC 102/103 11-255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.2 Output of drive data via V24 on MMC102/103 11-257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.3 Output of drive data via V24 on the MMC102/103 11-258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.4 PLC data output via V24 on MMC102/103 11-262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.5 Output of MMC data via V24 on MMC102/103 11-262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.6 Output of the series start-up file via V24 on MMC102/103 11-263. . . . . . . . .
11.4 Back up hard disk via Norton GhostR (SW 4.4 and higher) 11-265. . . . . . . .
11.4.1 Back up hard disk / Import data backup 11-265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.2 Saving user data 11-268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.3 Back up hard disk 11-268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.4 Restore data to hard disk 11-270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5 Several SW versions on one MMC 103 (SW 5.2 and higher) 11-272. . . . . . .
11.6 Installing a replacement hard disk (SW 4.4 and higher) 11-274. . . . . . . . . . .
11.7 Data backup with VALITEK streamer on the MMC101/102/103
(SW 5.3 and lower) 11-276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.8 Line checksums and MD numbers in MD files
(software Version 3.2 and higher) 11-281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.8.1 Line checksums (MD 11230 MD_FILE_STYLE) 11-281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.8.2 Machine data numbers 11-282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.8.3 Aborting MD import 11-282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.9 Machine/setting data 11-284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide
Contents
04.00
03.96
xiii
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.10 Saving PLC data 11-284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 Software and Hardware Replacement 12-285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 Software update 12-285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Upgrading the MMC 100/100.2/101 software 12-286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 Upgrade of MMC 102/103 software Version 4.x or earlier 12-287. . . . . . . . . .
12.4 Upgrading the NC 12-288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.1 Standard upgrade 12-288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.2 Series start-up via NC card (SW 4.4 and higher) 12-289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.3 SINUCOPYFFS (SW 4.4 and higher) 12-291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 Hardware replacement 12-296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6 Battery/fan replacement 12-296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 MMC 13-299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 Miscellaneous 14-301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1 Tool box software package 14-301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.1 Content of tool box 14-301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.2 Application of the tool box 14-301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2 Machine data access via part program 14-302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Abbreviations A-305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B References B-311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Index Index-321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide
Contents
04.00
03.96
xiv Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide
Contents
04.00
Notes
1
1-15
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
General Preparations
1.1 Preconditions
This Installation and Start-Up Guide describes the procedure for starting up the
basic control functions including drive-related functions. More detailed informa-
tion about special NCK, MMC, PLC or drive functions can be found in the De-
scriptions of Functions/Manuals (see Documentation requirements).
You will need the following software to start up the SINUMERIK 840D:
1. PCIN 4.4 for transmission of data to/from MMC
Order no.: 6FX2 0604AA002XB0 (German, English, French), order from:
WK Fürth
2. Start-up tool for digital SIMODRIVE 611 (applies only to MMC100)
Order No. 6FC5 255jAX000AB0, supplies on 3.5 floppies
3. SIMATIC Step7 HiGraph
4. Toolbox for SINUMERIK 840D
Order No. 6FC5 252jAX210AB0
Supplied on 3.5 floppies:
Basic PLC program
Standard machine data blocks
NC variable selector
5. Applies only to MMC100: Software for creating PLC alarm texts and for
transmission to MMC100 (integrated in MMC 100 system software)
You will need the following equipment and accessories to start up the
SINUMERIK 840D:
1. Programming device with MPI interface (PG740)
2. MPI cable for PG740
3. V.24 cable with 9-way connector (female)
Introduction
Software
requirements
Equipment and
accessory
requirements
1
1
03.96
1.2 Standard/export version
1-16 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
You will need the following documentation to start up the SINUMERIK 840D:
1. Catalog NC 60.1, Ordering Information/BU/
Order no.: E86060K4460A101A6
2. Manual /PHD/
Order no.: 6FC5 2975AC100BP2
3. Operator Components Manual /BH/
Order no.: 6FC5 2975AA500BP2
4. Description of Functions, Basic Machine (Part 1) /FB/
Order no.: 6FC5 2975AC200BP2
5. Description of Functions, Drive Functions /FBA/
Order no.: 6SN1 1970AA800BP5
6. Lists /LIS/
Order no.: 6FC5 2975AB700BP2
7. Description PCIN 4.4 /PI/
Order no.: 6FX2 0604AA004XB0
8. Diagnostics Guide /DA/
Order no.: 6FC5 2975AA200BP2
1.2 Standard/export version
On account of the approval required for certain control functions as stipulated in
the German Export List, two configuration variants are available for the
SINUMERIK 840D.
The standard version (840D) can contain the full scope of functions of the
control but this does mean that it requires export approval with regard to its
type.
In the export version (840DE) the following options are not available:
SInterpolation with more than 4 axes
S5-axis milling package
SHelical interpolation 2D + n (n greater than 2)
SOEM package
The following restrictions apply to options that can be used:
SSag compensation is restricted to the traversing of a path of up to 10 mm.
SAdaptive control
The corresponding option bits can be set but they have no effect (alarm when
programming the functions). The export version requires no export approval
with respect to its type.
Up-to-date information about types and scope of options can be found in
References: /BU/ Catalog NC 60.1.
(If a requirement exists for export approval with respect to the intended use this
is not affected and might even exist in addition.)
Documentation
requirements
Export approval
1 General Preparations 04.00
1
03.96 1.2 Standard/export version
1-17
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The specific nature of the control is determined by the system software that is
available in two versions (standard and export). In other words, the
requirements for approval of the system software (refer also to the delivery
notes or invoice for information in this respect) is handed down to the control
system with the installation. This point must be observed in particular when
converting or upgrading the system software because the requirements for
export approval for the control can change accordingly.
In addition to the information provided on the delivery note and invoice, the
hardware components supplied with the system software are also clearly
identified by adhesive labels as standard or export versions.
Note
The adhesive labels supplied additionally in the packaging are intended to
identify the control after installation and start-up and must be pasted into the
control logbook. In the case of license orders, a corresponding number of
labels is provided and the same applies to these.
When the control has been booted, the export versions can be identified by the
additional character E in the Service screen (NC information). The identification
of the control variants obtained by these measures is important for service
personnel and can also be helpful in providing evidence of conformance for
exports, in particular when making use of the negative certificates that are
provided for the export version.
J
Identification of
the
control
1 General Preparations
1
03.96
1.2 Standard/export version
1-18 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
1 General Preparations
Notes
04.00
2
2-19
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Configuration
2.1 Mechanical configuration 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 Overview 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2 Mains infeed module 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3 NCU 2-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4 General configuration of SINUMERIK 840D system 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Electrical configuration 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Component connections 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Mains infeed connection (OI, I/RF) 2-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 Motor connection 2-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4 Encoder connection 2-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5 Connection of MMC100 and MMC102/103 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6 Configuration of components for digitizing 2-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
03.96
2.1 Mechanical configuration
2-20 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2.1 Mechanical configuration
2.1.1 Overview
SIMODRIVE
NCU MSD
MS (I/RF, OI) FDD
QWERTY keyboard
Operator panel
SIMATIC STEP7300 I/O devices
SIMODRIVE 611D
Machine control panel
SINUMERIK 840D
SIEMENS
PS IM SMs
SIEMENS
NCU terminal block
Fig. 2-1 System overview of SINUMERIK 840 with SIMODRIVE 611 (diagrammatic)
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96 2.1 Mechanical configuration
2-21
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2.1.2 Mains infeed module
The mains infeed module performs the following tasks:
SSupplies power for the SINUMERIK 840D and axis modules
SGenerates the DC link voltage for the motors
SRegenerative feedback (I/RF) or braking resistor (OI) for generator-mode
operation
If the internal braking resistance is not sufficient, pulsed resistor modules can be
installed.
The I/RF module feeds back into excess DC link energy generated during brak-
ing the supply system.
The I/RF or OI module is installed as the first module on the left.
References: PJ1/ Planning Guide for SIMODRIVE 611D
Mains infeed
module
Open-loop-
controlled infeed
OI
Infeed/regenerative
feedback module
I/RF
Arrangement of
mains infeed
module
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96
2.1 Mechanical configuration
2-22 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2.1.3 NCU
Operator panel interface
Reserved
PBUS/KBUS interface
(PLC I/O devices)
PGMPI interface
I/O device interface
(cable distribution cabinet)
Various error and status LEDs
(H1/H2)
7-segment display (H3)
RESET button (S1)
NMI button (S2)
PLC start-up switch
Digitizing module connection
NCK start-up switch
SIMODRIVE 611D interface
PCMCIA slot
(X173)
Device bus interface
MEMORYCARD
S3
X130B
X130A
X121 X111
S4
X102/
103
X101
X112
X122
RESETNMI
X172
+5 V
NF
CF
CB
CP
PR
PS
PF
PF0
L2DP
Fig. 2-2 Interfaces, control and display elements of NCU module
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96 2.2 Electrical configuration
2-23
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2.1.4 General configuration of SINUMERIK 840D system
SIMODRIVE
NCU MSD
NE (I/RF, UE) FDD
SIEMENS
FDD FDD
Bus terminating
connector
Fig. 2-3 General configuration of SINUMERIK 840D
2.2 Electrical configuration
2.2.1 Component connections
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96
2.2 Electrical configuration
2-24 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
X3
Floppy1)
X4 X6
X10
MCP
Power supply
X102
X112
X122
X111
X121
X130B
X130A
MEMORYCARD
X172
PG
QWERTY
MPI bus cable
SIMATIC S7300 IM connecting cable
MPI cable
IM
SIMATIC S7300 I/O devices
PS SMs
X2
X20
NCU
Operator panel
(rear view)
MMC
ISA adapter
(rear view)
X8
X9
Cable for data
input/output V24
1) X8/X9 on MMC 101/102 only
Parallel interface 1)
e.g. printer/streamer
or
MPIPG cable
L2DP
Reserved
for servicing
to drive bus
NCU terminal block
IN OUT
X20 X21
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
Distributor box
MPI cable
HHU
HHU handwheel
X4
X1
X2
X5
X101
Cable distribution
cabinet
Fig. 2-4 Connection configuration
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96 2.2 Electrical configuration
2-25
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
For cables and connectors, see
References: /PHD/, Configuring Manual 840D
2.2.2 Connection of mains infeed module (OI, I/RF)
M600
P600
X351
X111
X121
X141
X161
X171
X172
X181
U1 V1 W1 PE1
Red
Yellow
Red
5V voltage
level faulty
Device ready
(DC link
precharged)
DC link over-
voltage
Electronics power
supply faulty
Device is not ready,
no enable signal
(term. 63, 64 or 48)
Mains fault
Power supply
Device bus
DC link connection
Red
Green
Red
LED
displays
LED displays
Fig. 2-5 Interfaces for OI and I/RF module 1055KW
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96
2.2 Electrical configuration
2-26 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
X161
X121
X111
X141
X171
X172
X181
5.3
5.2
5.1
63
9
9
64
19
74
73.1
73.2
72
7
45
44
10
15
15
R
9
112
48
111
113
NS2
NS1
AS2
AS1
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1
Relay contact
for
Ready message
NC contact
NO contact
Relay contact for group message I2t
and motor overtemperature
Pulse enable
Enable voltage
Drive enable signal
Reference potential for enable voltage
Enable voltage
P24
P15
N15
N24
M
M
RESET (R+term.15)
Enable voltage
Setting-up mode
Contactor energization,
start
213
Signaling contact
from mains con-
tactor
Enabling signal for internal mains
contactor
Signaling contact for starting lockout
(NC contact)
DC link power supply for mains buffering
External infeed for electronics power supply
External infeed for electronics power supply
External infeed for electronics power supply
LED displays
Fig. 2-6 Connection terminals on SIMODRIVE 611 mains supply module 1055 KW
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96 2.2 Electrical configuration
2-27
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
I/RF module
Mains supply module
X111
X121
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1
63
9
64
19
9
15
R
9
112
48
111
113
AS1
AS2
NS1
NS2
W1V1U1 X131
X351
PE
X141
X161
X171
X172
X181
Pushbutton contact
M500
213
S1.6
LEDs
P600
Device bus
100 k
L1 L2 L3
1U2 1V2 1W2
1U1 1W11V1
Commutating
reactor, on I/RF
module only
Mains fuses for
I/RF or OI
module
PE
Supply
P600
M600 M600
to the
axis modules
Master switch
Leading
contact
Power section
L
Internal mains
contactor
1)
Important!
Terminal 48 must be de-ener-
gized 10 ms before the mains
contacts of the master switch
open (e.g. by means of leading
contact)
S1.5
S1.4
S1.3
S1.2
S1.1
L+
S1DIP switch
1)
1)
1) Jumpers inserted in
delivery state
S1 Default
S1.1
S1.2
S1.3
S1.4
S1.5
S1.6
off
off
off*
off*
*Do not alter
off
off
Fig. 2-7 Example of three-conductor connection (standard circuit)
Typical circuit
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96
2.2 Electrical configuration
2-28 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2.2.3 Motor connection
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
X35
X432
BEROR
terminals
X341
X412
Motor encoder
Axis 2
X422
Direct position
Axis 2
M600
P600
X411
Motor
encoder
Axis 1
DC link
busbar
X421
Direct position
Axis 1
X431
Relay terminals
Pulse enable
X151
Device bus
X141
Drive bus
X351
Motor
connecting
terminals
A1 and A2
X34
Rating plate
PE terminals PE1 PE2
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
X35
X432
BEROR
terminals
X341
M600
P600
X411
Motor
encoder
DC link
busbar
X421
Direct position
X431
Relay terminals
Pulse enable
X151
Device bus
X141
Drive bus
X351
X34
Rating plate
U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2
Motor
connecting
terminals
X131
2-axis FDD module 1-axis FDD/MSD module
Fig. 2-8 Design of FDD/MSD modules
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96 2.2 Electrical configuration
2-29
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2.2.4 Encoder connection
The motor measuring system of the connected motor must always be con-
nected to connector X411 of the same module.
Scheme for
shielding bus
SIMODRIVE
NCU MSD FDD
SIEMENS
MS (I/RF, OI)
Fig. 2-9 Connection of encoder cables
Motor measuring
system and motor
connection
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96
2.2 Electrical configuration
2-30 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2.2.5 Connection of MMC100 and MMC102/103
MMC 100
Power supply
S1
X10
X6 X5 X4
X3
Chassis
PE conductor
terminal
Voltage
supply
S2
24 V 0 V PE
External keyboard interface
(the keyboard must be set
to the XT setting)
RS 232 serial inter-
face
MPI interface for
connection of oper-
ator panel
VGA
interface
RESET
button NMI
button
Fig. 2-10 Rear of operator panel with MMC 100
840D
X101
X4
MMC 100/102/103
X20 MCP
6FX2 0024EA041xx0 or
6FX2 0024EA021xx0
Fig. 2-11 Connection of MMC100/102/103 to SINUMERIK 840D system
MMC100
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96 2.2 Electrical configuration
2-31
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
X21
X20
18D
X1
X2
X11
X3
X4
X5X6
X7
X8
S1
S2
X10
X9
X153
X152
X151
D12 SIEMENS
X142X141
X13
ISA interface
NC keyboard
interface
Mass storage
interface IDE
PCMCIA optional
interface
Power supply
interface
LCD interface
External
keyboard/mouse
interface
Floppy disk
interface
Parallel printer interface
(LPT1)
VGA interface
Reset button
NMI button
Battery
X121 X122
COM1COM2
7-segment display
MPI interface for
connection of op-
erator panel
Fig. 2-12 Location of interfaces and control elements on MMC 101/102/103
The interfaces (e.g. pin assignments) are described and shown in detail in
References: /BH/, Operator Components Manual
MMC101, 102/103
Interfaces
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96
2.2 Electrical configuration
2-32 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2.2.6 Configuration of components for digitizing
SIMODRIVE
NCU MSD FDD
SIEMENS
I/RF
Device bus
MMC
ISA
adapter
Hard disk
drive
Power supply
S1
X10
X6 X5 X4
X3
Chassis
S2
X11
Digitizing
module
Link interface
MPI cable to OP
Probe
Cable to probe
Cable from
digitizing
module to link
interface
X422
X411
X412
Laser
probe
Cable to laser probe
X421
Fig. 2-13 Configuration of components for digitizing
2 Confi
g
uration 04.95
2
03.96 2.2 Electrical configuration
2-33
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SMMC 101/102
SISA adapter
SLink interface
SDigitizing module
SNCU 572/573 for digitizing
SConnecting cable from digitizing module to link interface
STactile probe (e.g. Renishaw SP21) with cable
For further information, please refer to the following documentation:
References: /FBD/Description of Functions, Digitizing
J
Hardware
requirements for
digitizing
2 Confi
g
uration
2
03.96
2.2 Electrical configuration
2-34 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2 Confi
g
uration
Notes
04.00
3
3-35
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Settings, MPI / OPI
3.1 MPI/OPI networking rules 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Standard configuration 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Standard configuration up to SW 3.1 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Standard configuration as from SW 3.2 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/Interface customer operator panel and/or
1 HHU (up to SW 3.1) 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Connection to OPI bus 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 Connection to MPI bus 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 Example of a configuration of MCP and HHU via OPI 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 Example of a configuration of HHU via MPI 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Handheld unit (HHU) 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Settings in HHU up to software version 3.x 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Settings on the HHU for software version 4.x and higher 3-53. . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Example: Connecting the HHU to the SINUMERIK 840D 3-55. . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Handheld programming unit 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Interface signals of the HPU 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Standard configuration of HPU (without MCP) 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Differences from the standard HPU configuration (up to SW 3.1) 3-59. . .
3.6 Machine control panel (MCP) 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Customer operator panel interface 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 Second machine control panel 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 MMC 100/MMC 102/103 operator panel 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.1 Settings on MMC 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.2 Language defaults 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
03.96
3.1 MPI/OPI, network rules
3-36 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.1 MPI/OPI, network rules
The following basic rules must be observed with respect to network installa-
tions:
1. The bus line must be terminated at both ends. To do so, switch in the termi-
nating resistor in the MPI connector in the first and last nodes. Switch off all
other terminating resistors.
Note
SOnly two terminating resistors may be activated in the same line at one
time.
SThe terminating resistors of the bus are permanently installed in the HHU/
HPU.
2. At least 1 terminator must be supplied with 5V voltage. This is achieved by
connecting the MPI connector with a fitted active terminating resistor to a
device that is connected to the power supply.
Note
The NC must be positioned at the end of the line.
3. Spur lines (feeder cable from bus segment to node) should be as short as
possible.
Note
Unused spurs should be removed wherever possible.
4. Each MPI node must first be connected and then activated.
When disconnecting the MPI node first deactivate the connection and then
pull out the connector.
5. One HHU and one HPU or two HHUs or two HPUs can be connected to
each bus segment. No bus terminators may be inserted in the distribution
boxes of the HHU or HPU.
If necessary, more than one HHU/HPU can be connected to a network seg-
ment with repeaters.
6. The following cables lengths for MPI or OPI for standard use without re-
peater must not be exceeded:
MPI (187.5 kbaud): max. cable length in total: 1000 m
OPI (1.5 Mbaud): max. cable length in total: 200 m
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 04.00
3
03.96 3.1 MPI/OPI, network rules
3-37
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
840D control
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
MCP
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
MMC
100/102/103
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
PG
OPI
MPI
Terminating resistor
integrated
Distribu-
tion box
on
on
HHU
Distribu-
tion box
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
HPU
on
on
on
Terminating resistor
fitted in connector
on
Fig. 3-1 Network installation with two terminating resistors in the
MPI: HPU, 840D control
OPI: HHU, 840D control
ËËËË
ËËËË
ËËËË
ËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
840D control
ËËËË
ËËËË
ËËËË
MCP
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
MMC
100/102/103
OPI
Terminating resistor
fitted in connector
on
on
OP030
on
on
Terminating resistor
integrated
Fig. 3-2 Network installation with two terminating resistors in the
OPI: MCP, control
Example A
Example B
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
05.97
3
03.96
3.2 Standard configuration
3-38 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.2 Standard configuration
3.2.1 Standard configuration up to SW 3.1
SINUMERIK 840D with MMC100/102/103 and a machine control panel (MCP)
or customer operator panel interface on OPI
Minimum firmware version V 03_01_01 for
SMCP
SInterface to customer operator panel / PP031
Version 1.x or higher
Each node on the MPI/OPI bus must be allocated a bus address (0...31).
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
MMC
100/102/103
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
NCK
PLC
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
MCP/interface to
customer operator
panel
OPI 1.5
Mbaud
1
6
Standard bus addresses
X101
SINUMERIK 840D
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
Programming
device/
start-up tool
MPI 187.5
kbaud
0
13
13
2
X122
Fig. 3-3 Standard application for SINUMERIK 840D
Standard
application
Hardware
requirements
STEP7
Bus addresses
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 05.98
3
03.96 3.2 Standard configuration
3-39
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
Cable with 3 MPI connectors (Order No.: 6FX20024EA04IAF0 (IBA0))
SThis cable is used for connecting a standard machine consisting of MMC,
MCP and NCK via OPI/MPI.
SIt must not be used for setting up an m:n installation.
SComponents must not be connected using internal bus terminators (e.g.
HHU, HPU), because the cable is already fitted with bus terminators.
Table 3-1 Settings on DIP switch S3 for standard application
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:
on off on off on on off off MCP:
Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud
Cyclical transmit pattern: 100 ms
Bus address: 6
on off on off on on off on Interface to customer operator
panel:
Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud
Cyclical transmit pattern: 100 ms
Bus address: 6
The following bytes in the PLC CPU are assigned for the MCP or interface to
the customer operator panel:
SInput bytes 07
SOutput bytes 07
SStatus bytes for error detection, output bytes 811, 1215 (evaluated by
basic program)
The parameters on FB1 (basic program) for the MCP are already set to the de-
fault values for the standard application.
If communication does not commence after a PLC reset (MCP LEDs flashing),
the following points should be checked:
SFirmware version of MCP/interface to customer operator panel must be
V03_01_01 or higher
SCable and connector wiring
SDIP switch S3 (standard application)
Setting the MCP/
interface to
customer operator
panel
Assigned inputs/
outputs in the
PLC CPU
Communication
does not start
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
3
03.96
3.2 Standard configuration
3-40 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.2.2 Standard configuration as from SW 3.2
Either one or two machine control panels (interface to customer operator pan-
els, HPUs, PP031) and/or HHUs can be connected in SW 3.2 or higher by set-
ting the parameters of the basic PLC program (FB1). In this case, it is no longer
necessary to set the parameters with the STEP 7 Communication Configura-
tion tool.
The procedure used to connect these components using Communication
Configuration, as described in the sections below, no longer has to be
followed with software versions SW 3.2 and higher.
References: /FB/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine (Part 3), PLC Basic
Program
SINUMERIK 840D with MMC100/102/103 and a machine control panel (MCP)
or customer operator panel interface on OPI
Minimum firmware version V 03_01_01 for
SMCP
SInterface to customer operator panel / PP031
Each node on the MPI/OPI bus must be allocated a bus address (0...31).
SW < 3.2
Standard
application
Hardware
requirements
Bus addresses
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 05.98
3
03.96 3.2 Standard configuration
3-41
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
MMC
100/102/103
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
NCK
PLC
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËË
MCP/interface to
customer operator
panel
OPI 1.5
Mbaud
1
6
Standard bus addresses
X101
SINUMERIK 840D
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
Programming
device/
start-up tool
MPI 187.5
kbaud
0
13
3
2
X122
*)
Fig. 3-4 Standard application for SINUMERIK 840D
*) Address depending on software version:
Address NCK to MPI = address PLC+1=3
PLC 314 SW 3.5 and higher
Note
The logical addressing of components in the PLC basic program is performed
by means of the bus address parameter setting (for the machine control panel)
or the GD circle (for the handheld operator unit). The GD circles are always
used for physical addressing on the OPI/MPI. Each machine control panel,
customer operator panel interface, etc., must be addressed with a separate GD
circle.
In the control, the conversion of the bus address in the associated GD circle is
performed via the PLC program.
The bus address, and therefore the setting of the associated GD circles, are set
on the machine control panel by means of DIPFIX switches.
The same GD circles are set, however, with different bus addresses on the MPI
for machine control panel, customer operator panel, PP031 and handheld pro-
gramming unit components. Allowance should be made for this when using
more than one machine control panel, etc.
The table below shows the relationship.
Bus address and
GD circle
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI05.98
3
03.96
3.2 Standard configuration
3-42 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Table 3-2 Relationship between bus address and
GD circle
Bus addresses on the
MPI
GD circle
15,14,13 1
12,11 2
10, 9 3
8, 7 4
6 8
5, 4 5
Example:
Two machine control panels (MCPs) are to be connected to the MPI of a con-
troller. The first MCP can be connected to bus address 15 (GD circle 1), and the
second to bus address 12 (GD circle 2).
Note
If, for example PLC-PLC cross-communication is to be configured on the MPI
using the STEP 7 Communication Configuration tool, and one or more MCPs
are connected to the MPI, you should ensure that the allocation of GD circles is
unique. The STEP 7 Communication Configuration tool allocates GD circles in
ascending order starting with GD circle 1. If the MCPs are connected to the
operator panel interface, there is no effect on PLC-PLC communication on the
MPI.
Example:
Communication Configuration allocates GD circles 1 and 2 for PLC-PLC
cross-communication. A first MCP on the MPI can then be connected to GD
circle 3 (bus address 9 or 10), and a second MCP on the MPI can be connected
to GD circle 4 (bus address 7 or 8).
MPI interface and
GD circle
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 05.98
3
03.96 3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/customer OPI and/or 1 HHU (up to SW 3.1)
3-43
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/customer OPI and/or 1 HHU
(up to SW 3.1)
The following configurations are permissible:
S2 MCPs/customer operator panel interfaces/PP031 connected to OPI
S1 HHU connected to either OPI or MPI
Machine control panels (MCP), customer operator panel interfaces and hand-
held units (HHU) are parameterized independently of the bus interface (OPI,
MPI) in the basic PLC program.
The parameters for the 1st MCP are preset.
In addition to the parameter settings in the basic PLC program, the MPI also
has parameters that must be set by means of the STEP 7 Communication
Configuration tool.
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
MMC
100/102/103
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
OP 030
110
1 MCP
15
6
MCP/interface to
customer operator
panel
7
Max. 2 MCP/customer
operator panel inter-
faces and 1 HHU can be
connected to the OPI.
OPI
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
NCK
PLC
X101
SINUMERIK 840D
MPI
15
13
13
2
X122
OPI
Max. 4 devices (incl. 1 HHU)
can be addressed on the MPI
via GD circuits.
Distribu-
tion box
HHU
Distribu-
tion box
HHU Standard configuration
Optional
Another
device
HHU connection
to either OPI/MPI
Standard bus
addresses
Fig. 3-5 Example: MPI/OPI bus nodes with standard bus addresses
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
3
03.96
3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/customer OPI and/or 1 HHU (up to SW 3.1)
3-44 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The handheld unit (HHU) should be connected to the OPI so the user can bene-
fit from the following advantages:
SEasier start-up
SReduction in communication tasks for PLC
If the HHU is operated on the MPI, it must be parameterized by means of the
STEP 7 Communication Configuration tool in addition to the parameter set-
tings in the basic PLC program. Data exchange between the PLC and HHU is
assisted by one of the four possible GD circuits in the PLC.
The following documents are also required:
References: /BH/ Operator Components Manual
/FB/, P3, Basic PLC Program
/S7HT/ Manual, Application of Tools
3.3.1 Connection to OPI bus
The following features are examples of deviations from the standard configura-
tion:
SChanging the address assignment of the input, output or status bytes for the
MCP in the PLC.
SAdditional connection of a handheld unit (HHU) to the OPI.
SConnection of a 2nd MCP
You must adjust the communication parameters and possibly the switch settings
(addresses) of the bus nodes.
1. Call FB1, DB7 must be parameterized for all operator control components
(MCP, HHU) in OB 100 in the basic PLC program.
2. The status pointers (double word) for each operator control component must
be configured for each component in FB1 for monitoring purposes.
See example in Section 3.3.3.
Connection of
HHU
Documentation
requirements
Example
Procedure
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
3
03.96 3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/customer OPI and/or 1 HHU (up to SW 3.1)
3-45
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.3.2 Connection to MPI bus
The following features are examples of deviations from the standard configura-
tion:
SAdditional connection of a handheld unit (HHU)
In this case, you must adjust the communication parameters and possibly the
switch settings (addresses) of the bus nodes.
You must use the STEP7 Communication Configuration tool to input a new
configuration. The following description of how to proceed is based on the as-
sumption that you already know how to use this tool.
1. Set up a new project and CPU programs with the STEP7 tool. You must set
up a CPU program for each component in the installation (PLC, HHU, etc.)
which is linked via the MPI.
2. Network MPI nodes, i.e. network CPU programs with MPI address.
3. Call STEP7 Communication Configuration tool and enter the desired con-
figuration.
4. Compile this configuration. A new SDB210 is generated for each CPU pro-
gram. The SDB210 for the HHU component is meaningless since the GD
parameters are set by means of DIP switch or keyboard.
5. Set the cyclical transmit pattern. Once the configuration has been compiled
successfully for the first time, the Reduction ratio and Status can be acti-
vated and then input.
6. Compile your configuration again.
7. Transfer the SDB210 (from the CPU program of the PLC) to the PLC.
Note
By default, the STEP7 project manager (S7 TOP) does not display the SDBs.
The SDB display is activated in the View / Set filter menu All modules with
SDBs.
8. Make the device-specific settings for all nodes:
You now need to set the GD identifiers from the Communication Configura-
tion table for the components (HHU, etc.).
9. Call FB1, DB7 must be parameterized for all operator control components
(MCP, HHU) in OB 100 in the basic PLC program.
10. You must configure the status pointer (double word) for the HHU in FB1 for
monitoring purposes.
See example in Section 3.3.3.
Note
For a description of the Communication Configuration tool and its applica-
tions, please refer to
References: /S7HT/ SIMATIC Step7 Manual, Start-up of MPI
Bus Nodes
Example
Procedure
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
3
03.96
3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/customer OPI and/or 1 HHU (up to SW 3.1)
3-46 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.3.3 Example of a configuration of MCP and HHU via OPI
SMCP with firmware version V 03_01_01
SHHU with firmware version V 01_01_02
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
MMC
100/102/103
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
OP 030
110
1 MCP
15
6
OPI
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
NCK
PLC
X101
SINUMERIK 840D
MPI
187.5 kbaud
13
13
2
X122
OPI
Distribu-
tion box
HHU
Standard bus
addresses
Fig. 3-6 Example of configuration of MCP and HHU via OPI
The following parameter settings must be made for the MCP and HHU operat-
ing components in FB1.
MCPNum:=1 (one MCP)
MCP1In:=P#E0.0 (MCP input signals)
MCP1Out:=P#A0.0 (MCP output signals)
MCP1StatRec:=P#A12.0 (status double word)
MCP1StatSend:=P#A8.0 (status double word)
MPIBusAdr:=6
BHG:=2 (HHU on OPI)
BHGIn:=P#M20.0 (HHU input signals)
BHGOut:=P#M0.0 (HHU output signals)
BHGStatRec:=P#M26.0 (status double word)
BHGStatSend:=P#M30.0 (status double word)
The other HHU parameters are set to appropriate defaults.
See FB basic program.
Note
Note the DIP switch settings (switches S1 and S2 in the HHU).
Preconditions
Parameterization
of basic PLC
program FB1
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
3
03.96 3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/customer OPI and/or 1 HHU (up to SW 3.1)
3-47
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.3.4 Example of a configuration of HHU via MPI
STEP7 version 1.x and HHU with firmware version 01_01_02.
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
MMC
100/102/103
1
1 MCP
15
6
OPI
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
NCK
PLC
X101
SINUMERIK 840D
MPI
187.5 kbaud
13
13
2
X122
OPI
Inputs: MB 20 26
Outputs: MB 0 19
Status double word: MD 26
Distribu-
tion box
HHU
Fig. 3-7 Example of configuration of HHU via MPI
Set up new project with the name Example.
You must set up 2 CPU programs for the Sample project.
SAS314
SHHU
The 2 CPU programs are assigned as follows:
AS314 is for the PLCCPU, HHU for the handheld unit.
Preconditions
Call STEP 7
Assignment of
CPU programs
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
3
03.96
3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/customer OPI and/or 1 HHU (up to SW 3.1)
3-48 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
A network must be activated via the configuration for every CPU program. Since
there is no separate order number for the HHU CPU programs, the standard
order number of the AS314 must be used. MPI address 2 is networked for the
AS314 CPU program and MPI address 15 for the HHU program. 0 must al-
ways be entered as the MPI SUB network number.
Networking sequence for each CPU program:
1. Set Module networked.
2. Set MPI address and enter SUB network no. 0.
3. Confirm with OK.
4. Save the configuration with Save.
Start the Communication Configuration tool and set up a new file.table 1 ap-
pears.
You now need to call the CPU programs in table 1.
1. Using the mouse, click on the field next to GD identifiers (the column is then
color-highlighted).
2. Click Select CPU module under menu item PLC functions.
3. A window headed Select CPU appears. Click on project Example and the
2 CPU programs are displayed: as314, bhg.
4. Select as314.
5. Table 1 appears with entry as314//CPU1::
6. Click on empty field to the right of it and repeat steps 2 to 5 above in the
order given for CPU program bhg.
7. The result will be Table 1 containing the 2 CPU programs.
table 1
GD identifiers as314//CPU1:: bhg//CPU1::
GD
GD
GD
GD
Networking
Call
communication
configuration
Table 1
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
3
03.96 3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/customer OPI and/or 1 HHU (up to SW 3.1)
3-49
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
You can now make the entries for the HHU in table 1.
1. Start in column as314//CPU1:: by selecting the first field.
2. Enter data area for reception or transmission from Fig. 3-6.
For bhg//CPU1::
mb0 : 20 is the receive area and
mb20 : 6 is the entry for the transmit area.
(mb0 : 20 means that 20 bytes are received starting at mb0 and
mb20 : 6 means that 6 bytes are transmitted starting at mb20.)
3. Declare the transmit and receive areas to be such. The transmit area is then
marked with “»”.
4. Table 1 with all its entries then looks like this:
table 1
GD identifiers as314//CPU1:: bhg//CPU1::
GD »mb0:20 mb0:20
GD mb20:6 »mb20:6
Note
The order in which inputs are made (transmit, receive) affects the way in which
GD identifiers are assigned and should be carefully observed as shown by the
above example.
You now need to select compilation.
The GD identifiers are generated during compilation. The GD identifiers are dis-
played in Table 1 as the result of compilation.
table 1
GD identifiers as314//CPU1:: bhg//CPU1::
GD 1.1.1 »mb0:20 mb0:20
GD 1.2.1 mb20:6 »mb20:6
Click the View / Reduction ratio menu. Table 1 below appears with the SR pa-
rameters.
table 1
GD identifiers as314//CPU1:: bhg//CPU1::
SR 1.1 8 8
GD 1.1.1 »mb0:20 mb0:20
SR 1.2 8 8
GD 1.2.1 mb20:6 »mb20:6
Enter areas for
transmitting and
receiving
Compilation
Setting the
reduction ratio
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
3
03.96
3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/customer OPI and/or 1 HHU (up to SW 3.1)
3-50 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The transmission rate for the HHU must be set.
The default setting is one transmission every 8 PLC cycles. With a PLC cycle
time of 25 ms, the default then corresponds to a key scan of 200 ms. This may
be too slow for some applications. To change the transmission rate, the Reduc-
tion ratio, i.e. the SR parameters, need to be changed.
You must specify a value of 1, 2, 4 or 8. Only 4 and 8 are allowed for transmis-
sion. The transmission to and from the HHU is then activated at a correspond-
ing frequency (e.g. every 4th PLC cycle). Example of table 1 with altered SR
parameters:
table 1
GD identifiers as314//CPU1:: bhg//CPU1::
SR 1.1 4 1
GD 1.1.1 »mb0:20 mb0:20
SR 1.2 1 4
GD 1.2.1 mb20:6 »mb20:6
When you have changed the SR parameters, you must compile your configura-
tion again.
Click the View / Status menu. Table 1 below is then displayed.
table 1
GD identifiers as314//CPU1:: bhg//CPU1::
GST
GDS 1.1
SR 1.1 4 1
GD 1.1.1 »mb0:20 mb0:20
GDS 1.2
SR 1.2 1 4
GD 1.2.1 mb20:6 »mb20:6
You now need to specify the status double words for GDS1.2.
Extract from table 1:
table 1
GD identifiers as314//CPU1:: bhg//CPU1::
GDS 1.2 md26
Once you have entered the status, you must compile your configuration again.
Changing the SR
parameters
Activate status
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
3
03.96 3.3 Connection of a 2nd MCP/customer OPI and/or 1 HHU (up to SW 3.1)
3-51
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The SDB 210s have been generated during compilation. Transfer SDB 210 for
CPU program as314 to the PLCCPU (PLC must be in the STOP state).
Procedure:
1. Click on File/Download to PLC menu
2. Download window appears. Select as314//CPU1:: and confirm with OK.
3. Switch PLC into RUN mode (restart).
The default address 15 can be left unchanged on the HHU, only the GD param-
eters at 1.1.11.2.1 must be set, see Section 3.4.
The following parameter settings must be added to FB1 for the HHU.
.
.
.
HHU:=1 (HHU on MPI bus)
BHGIn:=P#M20.0 (HHU input signals)
BHGOut:=P#M0.0 (HHU output signals)
BHGStatRec:=P#M26.0 (status double word)
.
.
.
The other HHU parameters are set to appropriate defaults.
SDB210
Set HHU
Parameterization
of basic PLC
program FB1
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
3
03.96
3.4 Handheld unit
3-52 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.4 Handheld unit
The software version of the HHU appears on the display after power up until
communication between the PLC and the HHU has been established.
Example: Display on the HHU
Waiting for PLC
V04.01.01 F
Software version of the HHU is V4.11
Bus address of the HHU is FH (15)
3.4.1 Settings on the HHU up to software version 3.x
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
ON OFF
S1
S2
ON OFF
S1
S2
Reserved
187.5 kbaud
Bus
address 15
IDLE time
100 ms
Default settings
Fig. 3-8 Position of DIP switches in HHU with default setting
The default setting (setting when supplied) should be used for operating the
HHU on the MPI of the 840D.
Table 3-3 Settings on switches S1 and S2 in HHU
S1
1
S1
2
S1
3
S1
4
S2
1
S2
2
S2
3
S2
4
Meaning:
off on off off on on on on Default setting
off Baud rate: 187.5 kbaud
Display software
version of HHU
DIP switch
settings for MPI
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 08.97
3
03.96 3.4 Handheld unit
3-53
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
S1 3 must be set to on when operating the HHU on the OPI.
Table 3-4 Settings on switches S1 and S2 in HHU
S1
1
S1
2
S1
3
S1
4
S2
1
S2
2
S2
3
S2
4
Meaning:
off on off off on on on on Default setting
on Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud OPI
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
Bus address: 15
Bus address: 14
Bus address: 13
Bus address: 12
Bus address: 11
Bus address: 10
Bus address: 9
Bus address: 8
Bus address: 7
Bus address: 6
Bus address: 5
Bus address: 4
Bus address: 3
Bus address: 2
Bus address: 1
Bus address: 0
3.4.2 Settings on the HHU for software version 4.x and higher
The settings for baud rate and bus address parameters made with switches
S1 and S2 on the HHU no longer apply to software version 4.x and higher.
These bus parameters can be reconfigured from this software version
(cf. Section 3.4.3).
3.4.3 Configuring the HHU, setting interface parameters
The GD parameters must be set before the submodule can communicate via
the MPI interface. The setting can be activated during power-up (i.e. while wait-
ing for the first GD message frame from the PLC (Waiting for PLC state) via
the HHU interface by means of key combination Jog (top far left) and T2
(top far right). The individual parameters are then interrogated via the HHU dis-
play and entered via the HHU keyboard. You can change the default values
with the + and keys within the permitted value range. You can switch to the
next parameter with the Automatic key. Selection of the next parameter
causes the preceding parameter to be stored in the Flash EPROM. The param-
eters need therefore only be set during start-up and when interfaces are
changed. If the interface parameter settings are not activated after power-up,
the stored values are used or the default values (see table) loaded.
DIP switch
settings for OPI
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
08.97
3
03.96
3.4 Handheld unit
3-54 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
HHU AS 314
(PLC)
Send
Receive
Fig. 3-9 Sending and receiving as seen from the HHU
Separate GD parameters are used for sending and receiving.
GD 1 . 1 . 1
Object number
GI number (global identifier)
GD circuit number (global data no.)
Fig. 3-10 Meaning of the GD parameters
Note
The GD parameters of the HHU and AS314 and PLC block FB1 must agree.
Table 3-5 Value range for GD parameters of the HHU
Designation Display Default
value
Value
range
PLC FB1
parameters
Receive GD circuit no. Rec-GD-No: 2 116 HHU Send
GD No
Receive GI no. Rec-GBZ-No: 1 1255 HHU Send
GBZ No
Object no. for receive
GI
Rec-Obj-No: 1 1255 HHU Send
Obj No
Send GD circuit no. Send-GD-No: 2 116 HHU Rec
GD No
Send GI no. Send-GBZ-No: 1 1255 HHU Rec
GBZ No
Object no. for send GI Send-Obj-No: 1 1255 HHU Rec
Obj No
SW 4
and
high
er
Baud rate Baud rate: 187.5 k
(baud)
187.5 /
1.5 M
Bus address Bus address: 15 015
Meaning of the GD
parameters
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 08.97
05.98
3
03.96 3.4 Handheld unit
3-55
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.4.4 Example: Connecting the HHU to the SINUMERIK 840D
1. Make the electrical connections on the distribution box and HHU.
When the HHU supply is connected, the following message must appear on
the display: Waiting for PLC V 04.01.01 F,
in which F stands for node no. 15 (default setting).
2. Check that the HHU is capable of bus operation:
––––> BMPI must be printed on rating plate on rear of unit.
3. Make a permanent bus cable connection at the end of the bus
(wire up inside connector instead of detachable connection!)
Note bus settings: OPI (on NCU at X101)
MPI (on NCU at X122)
4. Deactivate the terminating resistors in the last bus connector
(terminating resistors are integrated in the HHU).
5. Set the DIP switches in the HHU:
S 1.3 ON ––––> OPI (1.5 Mbaud)
S 1.3 OFF –––> MPI (187.5 kbaud)
6. Parameterize FB 1:
HHU 0 = No HHU
1 = HHU on MPI
2 = HHU on OPI
BHGIn 1st input byte
BHGOut 1st output byte
–––> Byte n+0, bit 7 must be set continually to 1
by the PLC!
BHGStatSend Status data word Send
BHGStatRec Status data word Receive
BHGInLen B#16#6
BHGOutLen B#16#14
BHGTimeout S5T#700MS
BHGCycl S5T#400MS
BHGRecGDNo 2
BHGRecGBZNo 2
BHGRecObjNo 1
BHGSendGDNo 2
BHGSendGBZNo 1
BHGSendObjNo 1
7. Check whether data from FB 1 are included in data view, otherwise update.
8. The Send / Rec data are preset in the HHU. No further parameters need to
be set. The data must be set as follows for checking purposes only:
BHGRecGDNo 2
BHGRecGBZNo 1
BHGRecObjNo 1
BHGSendGDNo 2
BHGSendGBZNo 2
BHGSendObjNo 1
9. For the purpose of integration in the PLC, the TOOL box contains a file
HHU.exe as a programming example.
10. For HHU on MPI (SW4.x):
BHG = 2 and
BHGMPI = TRUE
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
08.9712.98
3
03.96
3.5 Handheld programming unit
3-56 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.5 Handheld programming unit
The handheld programming unit (HPU) is especially suitable for handling tasks.
It is connected to the SINUMERIK 840D via the MPI or OPI interface and can
be used either instead of or in addition to an MMC/MCP.
The HPU includes the operating functions of the MCP.
The state of the operator elements (button pressed/released) is entered in an
8-byte data block and transferred cyclically by global data service to the PLC.
The operator elements are evaluated by the PLC.
The following MCP functions can be executed on an HPU with a standard as-
signment:
SStart and stop programs
SChange operating mode
SManually traverse 5 axes in both directions
SChange override
SSwitch programs to Reset
SSwitch over WCS/MCS for travel commands
SActivate single block
SSelect increments (INC1, INC10, ...)
The following MCP functions are not provided by the HPU and are assigned
permanent values:
SSpindle speed override
SSpindle start/stop
SKeyswitch
SFeedrate start/stop
The software version of the HPU appears in the display after power up until
communication between the PLC and the HPU has been established.
Functions
Non-available
functions
Display software
version of HPU
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 08.97
3
03.96 3.5 Handheld programming unit
3-57
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Example: Display on the HPU
Waiting for PLC
V04.01.01 B
Software version of the HPU is V4.11
Bus address of the HPU is Bhex (11)
3.5.1 Interface signals of the HPU
The MCP simulation is available for the HPU. The MCP simulation of the HPU
must be parameterized as an MCP in function block FB1 so that the PLC basic
program can monitor the failure of the HPU.
The parameter setting for the start address n is set in the PLC user program
(FB1).
Table 3-6 Interface HPU > PLC
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IBn REF TEACH AUTO MDA JOG QUIT RESET WCS/MCS
IBn+1 Reserved U4 U3 Shift key U2 U1 INC REPOS
JOG keys positive direction
IBn+2 Reserved Reserved C/6 B/5 A/4 Z/3 Y/2 X/1
JOG keys negative direction
IBn+3 Reserved Reserved C/6 B/5 A/4 Z/3 Y/2 X/1
IBn+4 Signal Diagno Service System Param Correct Program Machine
IBn+5 F5 F4 F3 F2 1F Step Modify Insert
IBn+6 Reserved Reserved + S2 S1 START STOP
IBn+7 Reserved
Note:
Only keys displayed against a gray background are evaluated by the basic PLC program (FC26).
Keys U1 to U4 and F1 to F5 or their inputs may be freely assigned by the PLC user.
FC 26 also exists and is analogous with PLC functions FC 19 and FC 25. It is
described in
Reference: /FB/P3, Basic PLC Program
Input signals
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
08.9712.97
3
03.96
3.5 Handheld programming unit
3-58 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Machine data that specify the coding of compensation values must be set as
follows:
SMD 12000: OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1
SMD 12020: OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1
SMD 12040: OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1
SMD 12060: OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1
By default, the following signals are not influenced by the MCP emulation, they
are initialized when the control is started up:
SKeyswitch to position 0
SSpindle speed override to 0
SRapid traverse overlay to 0
Only BAGNo and ChanNo parameters are provided for FC 26. For this rea-
son, the user needs to determine the information that is otherwise transferred to
the caller via parameters FeedHold and SpindleHold.
3.5.2 Standard configuration of the HPU (without MCP)
The standard configuration comprises a SINUMERIK 840D with
MMC100/102/103 and an HPU.
+ The parameter assignment at FB1 for the HHP operating components corre-
spond to those of the 1st MCP:
MCPNum:=1 (one HPU)
MCPIn:=P#I0.0 (HPU input signals)
MCPOut:=P#Q0.0 (HPU output signals)
MCPStatRec:=P#Q12.0 (status double word)
Signals not
supported
Parameterizing the
PLC basic
program FB1
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 08.9712.97
3
03.96 3.5 Handheld programming unit
3-59
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.5.3 Deviations from the standard HPU configuration
(up to SW 3.1)
The following documents are also required:
References: /BH/ Operator Components Manual
/FB/, P3, Basic PLC Program
/S7HT/ Manual, Application of Tools
The following features are examples of deviations from the standard configura-
tion:
SChanges to the address assignment
of the input, output or status bytes,
or flag area or data block
SAdditional connection of an MCP
An example is given using the following configuration:
PLCCPU AS314
MCP
HPU
You must adjust the communication parameters and possibly the switch settings
(addresses) of the bus nodes.
To set a new configuration, first press the Define global data softkey. The fol-
lowing description of how to proceed is based on the assumption that you are
already familiar with this menu.
1. Set up a new project and CPU programs with the STEP7 tool. You must set
up a CPU program for each component of the system (PLC, MCP, HHU, 2nd
MCP, HPU...).
2. Network MPI nodes, i.e. network CPU programs with MPI address.
3. Call Global data menu (via File manager / MPI network / Options /
Global Data softkeys) and enter the desired configuration.
4. Compile this configuration. A new SDB is generated for each CPU program.
5. Set the cyclical transmit pattern. Once the configuration has been compiled
successfully for the first time, the Reduction ratio and Status can be acti-
vated and then input.
6. Compile your configuration again.
7. Transfer the SDB (from the CPU program of the PLC) to the PLC.
8. Call FB1, DB7 must be parameterized for all operator control components
(MPI nodes) in OB 100 in the basic PLC program.
9. The status pointer (double word) must be configured in FB1 for each compo-
nent for monitoring purposes.
Documentation
requirements
Example
Procedure
SIMATIC S7,
Version 2.1
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
08.97
3
03.96
3.5 Handheld programming unit
3-60 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
For a description of the Global data menu and its applications, please refer to
References: /S7HT/ SIMATIC Step7 Manual, Start-up of MPI
Bus Nodes
A network must be activated via the configuration for every CPU program. Since
there is no separate order number for the MCP/HHU CPU programs, the stan-
dard order number of the AS314 must be used.
CPU program MPI address
AS314 2
MCP 6
HHU 15
HPU 11
0 must always be entered as the MPI SUB network number.
Networking sequence for each CPU program:
1. Set Module networked.
2. Set MPI address and enter SUB network no. 0.
3. Confirm with OK softkey
4. Save the configuration with Save softkey
The SDB supplied in the basic PLC program is valid for the first MCP or the
HPU and must be reconfigured as required.
Networking
SDB
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 08.97
3
03.96 3.5 Handheld programming unit
3-61
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Call the Global data menu and set up a new file. table 1 appears.
You must call the CPU programs in table 1.
1. Using the mouse, click on the field next to GD identifiers (the column is then
color-highlighted).
2. Click Select CPU module under menu item PLC functions.
3. A window headed Select CPU appears. Click on project Example and the
3 CPU programs are displayed: as314, MCP, HPU.
4. Select as314.
5. table 1 appears with entry as314//CPU1::
6. Click on the empty field to the right of it and repeat steps 2 to 3 above in the
order given for the HPU CPU programs.
7. The result is table 1 containing the 3 CPU programs.
table 1
GD identifiers as314/CPU1 MCP/CPU1 HPU/CPU1
GD
GD
GD
GD
You can now make the entries for the HPU in table 1.
1. Start in column as314//CPU1:: by selecting the first field.
2. Define and enter data area for receipt and transmission
For mstt//CPU1::
Receive area: qb0 : 8 Starting from qb0, 8 bytes are sent from the
PLC to the MCP.
Transmit area: ib0 : 8 Starting from ib0, 8 bytes are received by
the MCP.
For HPU//CPU1::
Receive area: qb16 : 8 Starting from qb16, 8 bytes are sent from
the PLC to the HPU.
Transmit area: ib16 : 8 Starting from ib16, 8 bytes are received by
the HPU.
3. Declare the transmit and receive areas to be such. The transmit area is then
marked with “»”.
4. table 1 with all its entries then looks like this:
Calling the Define
global data menu
table 1
Enter areas for
transmitting and
receiving
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
08.97
3
03.96
3.5 Handheld programming unit
3-62 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
table 1
GD identifiers as314/CPU1:: MCP/CPU1:: HPU/CPU1::
GD »qb0:8 qb0:8
GD ib0:8 »ib0:8
GD »qb16:8 qb16:8
GD ib16:8 »ib16:8
Note
The order in which inputs are made (transmit, receive) affects the way in which
GD identifiers are assigned and should be noted carefully as shown by the
above example.
Now select compiling.
The GD identifiers are generated during compilation. The GD identifiers are dis-
played as the result in table 1:
table 1
GD identifiers as314/CPU1:: MCP/CPU1:: HPU/CPU1::
GD 1.1.1 »qb0:8 qb0:8
GD 1.2.1 ib0:8 »ib0:8
GD 2.1.1 »qb16:8 qb16:8
GD 2.2.1 ib16:8 »ib16:8
Compiling
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 08.97
3
03.96 3.5 Handheld programming unit
3-63
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Click the View / Reduction ratio softkeys. The following table 1 with the SR
parameters appears:
table 1
GD identifiers as314/CPU1:: MCP/CPU1:: HPU/CPU1::
SR 1.1 8 8
GD 1.1.1 »qb0:8 qb0:8
SR 1.2 8 8
GD 1.2.1 ib0:8 »ib0:8
SR 2.1 8 8
GD 2.1.1 »qb16:8 qb16:8
SR 2.2 8 8
GD 2.2.1 ib16:8 »ib16:8
The transmission rate for the HPU must be set.
The default setting is one transmission that takes place every 8 PLC cycles.
With a PLC cycle time of 25 ms, the default then corresponds to a key scan of
200 ms. This may be too slow for some applications. To reduce the transmis-
sion rate change the reduction ratio, i.e. the SR parameters.
You must specify a value of 1, 2, 4 or 8. Only 4 and 8 are allowed for transmis-
sion. The transmission to and from the HPU is then activated at a correspond-
ing frequency (e.g. every 4th PLC cycle).
Example of table 1 with altered SR parameters:
table 1
GD identifiers as314/CPU1:: MCP/CPU1:: HPU/CPU1::
SR 1.1 4 1
GD 1.1.1 »qb0:8 qb0:8
SR 1.2 1 4
GD 1.2.1 ib0:8 »ib0:8
SR 2.1 4 1
GD 2.1.1 »qb16:8 qb16:8
SR 2.2 1 4
GD 2.2.1 ib16:8 »ib16:8
When you have changed the SR parameters, you must compile your configura-
tion again.
Setting the
reduction ratio
Changing the SR
parameters
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
08.97
3
03.96
3.5 Handheld programming unit
3-64 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Click the View / Status softkeys in the menu.
The following table 1 appears:
table 1
GD identifiers as314/CPU1:: MCP/CPU1:: HPU/CPU1::
GST
GDS 1.1
SR 1.1 4 1 1
GD 1.1.1 »qb0:8 qb0:8 qb0:8
GDS 1.2
SR 1.2 1 4 4
GD 1.2.1 ib0:8 »ib0:8 »ib0:8
GDS 2.1
SR 2.1 4 1
GD 2.1.1 »qb16:8 qb16:8
GDS 2.2
SR 2.2 1 4
GD 2.2.1 ib16:8 »ib16:8
Now enter the status double words for GDS1.2 and GDS 2.1.
Extract from table 1:
table 1
GD identifiers as314/CPU1:: MCP/CPU1:: HPU/CPU1::
GDS 1.2 ad12
GDS 2.2 ad24
Once you have entered the status, you must compile your configuration again.
The SDB has been generated during compilation. Now transfer the SDB for
CPU program as314 to the PLC CPU. (PLC must be in the STOP state).
Procedure:
1. Click on File/Download to PLC menu
2. Download window appears. Select as314//CPU1:: and confirm with OK soft-
key.
3. Switch PLC into RUN mode (restart).
The default setting for the MCP is 6 and the MPI address for the HPU is 14. The
address is set in FB1 for each device.
The default addresses are:
MCP: 6
HPU: 11
Activate status
SDB
HPU address
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 08.97
3
03.96 3.5 Handheld programming unit
3-65
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The following parameter settings must be made for the MCP and HPU operating
components in FB1:
MCPNum:=1 (one MCP)
MCP1In:=P#E0.0 (MCP input signals)
MCP1Out:=P#A0.0 (MCP output signals)
MCPStatRec:=P#Q12.0 (status double word)
MPCBusAdr:= 6,
HPU:=1 (one HPU)
HPUIn:=P#F16.0 (HPU input signals)
HPUOut:=P#F16.0 (HPU output signals)
HPUStatRec:=P#F24.0 (status double word)
HPUBusAdr:= 11,
Parameterization
of basic PLC
program FB1
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
08.97
3
03.96
3.6 Machine control panel (MCP)
3-66 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.6 Machine control panel (MCP)
The following interfaces, switches and display elements are located on the rear
of the machine control panel:
Operator panel
interface (MPI)
Power supply interface
Switch S3
X10
X20
S3 31
42
Emergency
STOP button
ON
1234
LEDs 1...4
Connection for equipotential bonding conductor
12 3
SHIELD M24 P24
Fig. 3-11 Position of interfaces on rear panel of MCP
The interfaces (e.g. pin assignment) are described in detail in
References: /BH/, Operator Components Manual
Table 3-7 Meaning of LEDs 1...4 on rear panel of MCP
Designation Meaning
LEDs 1 and 2 Reserved
LED 3 POWER: Lights up when voltage (24 V) is present
LED 4 SEND: Changes state after transmission of data
If the feed start and feed stop keys are pressed while the MCP is powering
up, the software version is displayed in the left-hand, center and right-hand LED
blocks.
The module must have firmware version V 03_01_01 or higher.
Example After the software version display has been activated, 3/1/1 LEDs light up in the
left-hand/center/right-hand LED blocks.
––> SW version v03_01_01 is installed.
Interfaces,
switches and
display elements
Interfaces
LEDs 1...4
Display software
version of MCP
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 08.97
3
03.96 3.6 Machine control panel (MCP)
3-67
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Table 3-8 Meaning of switch S3 for machine control panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:
on
off
Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud
Baud rate: 187.5 kbaud
on
off
off
off
on
off
200ms cycle transmit pattern / 2400 ms receive monitoring
100ms cycle transmit pattern / 1200 ms receive monitoring
50 ms cycle transmit pattern / 600 ms receive monitoring
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
Bus address: 15
Bus address: 14
Bus address: 13
Bus address: 12
Bus address: 11
Bus address: 10
Bus address: 9
Bus address: 8
Bus address: 7
Bus address: 6
Bus address: 5
Bus address: 4
Bus address: 3
Bus address: 2
Bus address: 1
Bus address: 0
on Interface to customer operator panel
off MCP
on off on off on on off off Default setting
on off on off on on off off Default setting for 840D
Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud
Cyclical transmit pattern: 100 ms
Bus address: 6
Switch S3
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
08.9705.97
3
03.96
3.7 Customer operator panel interface
3-68 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.7 Customer operator panel interface
A customer operator panel can be connected via the interface. 64 digital inputs
and 64 digital outputs with C-MOS level (5 V) are available on the module for
this purpose.
The module must have firmware version V 03_01_01 or higher.
X231
LEDs
X20
MPI connection
X10
X221X211
H3
H1
H4
H2
289.4
64.7
207.3
92.7
7.2
3.5
Holes 3.6
Equipotential bonding connection
S3
ON
Fig. 3-12 Front view of interface to customer operator panel
If only the customer operator panel is to be connected, then the bus address
must be set to 6 as for the MCP (standard application).
Table 3-9 Setting for 840D: Switch S3 on interface for customer operator panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:
on off on off on on off on Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud (OPI)
Cyclical transmit pattern: 100 ms
Bus address: 6
Connector designation: X10
Connector type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal block, straight
Table 3-10 Pin assignment of X10 connector on interface to customer operator panel
X10
Pin Name Type
1 SHIELD VI
2 M24 VI
3 P24 VI
Interface
Location of the
interfaces
Switch S3, default
setting
Power
supply
interface
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 08.97
3
03.96 3.9 MMC 100/MMC 102/103 operator panel
3-69
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3.8 Second machine control panel
Two machine control panels can be operated with the SINUMERIK 840D. The
second MCP must be parameterized in the basic program parameters in FB1.
3.9 MMC 100/MMC 102/103 operator panel
3.9.1 Settings on the MMC
The operator panel interface (OPI) with a baud rate of 1.5 Mbaud is set as the
default on the MMC.
SMMC 100
The MMC100 is automatically set to the baud rate.
SMMC102/103
The MMC102/103 must be set to a baud rate of 1.5 Mbaud in the Start-up/
MMC/Operator panel menu.
MD 9000: LCD_CONTRAST (contrast)
The contrast setting can be entered directly in the machine data or selected by
means of the LCD brighter or LCD darker softkey in the Diagnosis menu.
MD 9001: DISPLAY_TYPE (monitor type)
The monitor type (e.g. LCD monochrome, LCD color) is entered in this machine
data (for MMC 100).
MD 9003: FIRST_LANGUAGE (foreground language for MMC 100)
SMMC100
One of two languages can be called in the MMC 100.
SMMC102/103
The MMC102/103 is always supplied with a selection of languages. English
is the default setting.
MD 9004: DISPLAY_RESOLUTION
The display resolution for position values on the screen is entered in this ma-
chine data. The maximum number of digits on the screen is 10, before or after
the decimal point (e.g.: 4 places after decimal point, max. display =
+/ 999999.9999).
MD 9006 (for MMC100):
In this MD you set the time after which the screen saver is to be activated. The
screen saver is activated if none of the keys on the operator panel have been
pressed within the specified time.
OPI (default)
Screen
Language
Display resolution
Screen
saver
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
08.97
3
03.96
3.9 MMC 100/MMC 102/103 operator panel
3-70 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The protection levels for user data are set in machine data 9200 to 9299.
The settings of the V.24 interface on the MMC for data backup are stored from
MD 9300 onwards. The settings for 3 different devices are made in the Ser-
vices menu via an input display.
3.9.2 Language default
To be able to switch between the two configured languages even when the op-
erator is not familiar with the selected language, the switchover between the
languages must be performed blindfolded:
1. Select menu bar.
2. Select Start-up (3rd horizontal softkey from right).
3. Switch to the highest level with RECALL.
4. Select Change language (3rd vertical softkey from top).
One of two languages can be called alternately in the MMC100. These are de-
fined while the MMC software is being loaded. While the control is in operation,
the operator can switch between these two languages only by selecting the
softkey Change language in the Start-up display.
On the MMC102/103 there are several methods of switching over between lan-
guages while the control is in operation:
SSwitchover between two preset languages.
SOnline change of the second language.
The selectable languages are set and managed in a file. When the language is
switched in online operation, the first language remains as originally set and
only the second language can be changed.
The vertical softkey labeled Change language in the Start-up display is used
to switch between two languages. The switchover takes effect immediately. This
key can only be used to switch between two predefined languages.
Protection levels
for user data
V.24 interfaces
Language
switchover
MMC 100
MMC 102/103
Language
switchover
concept
Switchover
between two
languages
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 08.97
3
03.96 3.9 MMC 100/MMC 102/103 operator panel
3-71
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Different languages are selected in the Start-up/MMC/Languages display (pro-
vided that languages have been loaded). This display provides the user with a
list of the available languages. The user selects one language and confirms the
selection with OK. The user can then change over between the first language
and the language just set by selecting the Change language softkey in the
Start-up display. The 2nd language can always be changed in online mode.
The languages installed on the MMC102/103 on delivery are English and Ger-
man. The two supplementary packages (1 and 2) are also available.
Supplementary package 1: European languages:
GR German (standard)
SP Spanish
FR French
UK English (standard)
IT Italian
Supplementary package 2: Asian languages:
KO Korean (Korea) pictographic language
TW Chinese (Taiwan) pictographic language
CH Chinese (Mandarin) pictographic language
The languages to be used on the MMC are configured in file c:\mmc2\mmc.ini.
The required changes in the file described below can be made with the editor
which can be called under Start-up//MMC.
Two languages can be configured from the languages listed below:
GR German (standard)
SP Spanish
FR French
UK English (standard)
IT Italian
Example:
1st language German, 2nd language English
File MMC.INI must be altered as shown below:
Excerpt from mmc.ini:
...
[LANGUAGE]
Language=GR
LanguageFont=Europe
Language2=UK
LanguageFont2=Europe
...
Note
When editing file MMC.INI, take care to ensure that you change only the high-
lighted (bold print) texts. Make sure that your entries are spelled correctly.
Online change of
the 2nd language
Install language
packages
Definition of
usable
languages
Default setting
without activating
logographic
languages
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI
08.97
3
03.96
3.9 MMC 100/MMC 102/103 operator panel
3-72 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2 languages can be configured from the languages listed below:
GR German (standard)
SP Spanish
FR French
UK English (standard)
IT Italian
TW Chinese (Taiwan) pictographic language
CH Chinese (Mandarin) pictographic language
Example:
1st language German, 2nd language Chinese
File MMC.INI must be altered as shown below:
(Excerpt from mmc.ini:)
...
[LANGUAGE]
Language=GR
LanguageFont=Europe
Language2=CH
LanguageFont2=China
;LanguageList=GR, SP, FR, UK, IT
;FontList=Europe, Europe, Europe, Europe, Europe
;LBList=español, français, english, italiano
LanguageList=GR, CH, TW, SP, FR, UK, IT
FontList=Europe, China, China, Europe, Europe, Europe, Europe
LBList=chinese, taiwan, español, français, english, italiano
AddOnProd=c:\cstar20\cstar20.exe
...
To be able to operate the control with pictographic languages, the appropriate
add-on product must be installed for each selectable language. Languages
based on different add-on products cannot be configured at the same time.
Note
When you change the LanguageList, FontList, LBList and AddOnProd
lines, make sure that you only manipulate (shift, delete) the ; character repre-
senting the comment.
When editing file MMC.INI, take care to ensure that you change only the high-
lighted (bold print) texts. Make sure that your entries are spelled correctly.
J
Default setting
with logographic
languages
Add-on products
3 Settin
g
s, MPI / OPI 08.97
4
4-73
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
EMC / ESD Measures
4.1 Measures to suppress interference
To ensure safe, interference-free operation of the installation, it is essential to
use the cables specified in the individual diagrams. Both ends of the shield must
always be conductively connected to the equipment housing.
Exception:
SIf external equipment (such as printers, programming devices, etc.) is
connected, standard shielded cables connected at one end may also be
used.
These external devices may not be connected to the control during normal
operation. However, if the system cannot be operated without them, then the
cable shields must be connected at both ends. Furthermore, the external
device must be connected to the control via an equipotential bonding lead.
To ensure that the entire installation (control, power section, machine) has the
greatest possible immunity to interference, the following EMC measures must
be taken:
SSignal leads and load leads must be routed at the greatest possible distance
from one another.
SSignal cables from and to the NC or PLC must be supplied by SIEMENS.
SSignal leads must not be routed close to strong external magnetic fields
(e.g. motors and transformers).
SPulse-carrying HC/HV leads must always be laid completely separately from
all other leads/cables.
SIf signal leads cannot be laid at a sufficient distance from other leads, then
they must be installed in shielded cable ducts (metal).
SThe distance (noise field) between the following leads should be as small as
possible:
Signal lead and signal lead.
Signal lead and associated equipotential bonding lead.
Equipotential bonding lead and PE conductor (routed together).
!Important
For more information about interference suppression measures and connection
of shielded cables, please refer to
References: /EMC/, EMC Guidelines
Shielded
signal leads
Precautionary
measures
4
4
03.96
4.2 Measures to protect ESD-sensitive components
4-74 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
4.2 Measures to protect ESD-sensitive components
!Important
Handling of modules at risk from ESD:
SWhen electrostatic components are handled, it must be ensured that per-
sonnel, workstation and packaging are properly grounded.
SAs a general principle, electronic modules should only be touched if this is
absolutely unavoidable (owing to repair work, etc.). When you are handling
PCBs, therefore, make sure that you never touch any submodule pins or
conducting paths.
SYou may only touch components if
you are constantly connected to earth by means of an antistatic chain
you are wearing antistatic shoes or antistatic shoes with grounding
strips in conjunction with an antistatic floor surface.
SModules must always be placed on a conductive surface (table with antista-
tic covering, electrically conductive foam rubber, antistatic packaging mate-
rials, antistatic transport container).
SModules must not be placed near VDUs, monitors or television sets (not
closer than 10 cm from screen).
SModules must not be allowed to come into contact with chargeable, electri-
cally insulating materials such as plastic foil, insulating table tops or clothing
made of synthetic fibers.
SMeasurements may only be taken on modules if
the measuring instrument is grounded (e.g. via PE conductor) or
the measuring head on an isolated instrument is discharged briefly (e.g.
by being brought into contact with bare metal part of control housing)
before the measurement is taken.
J
4 EMC / ESD Measures
5
5-75
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Power On and Power-Up
5.1 Start-up sequence 5-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Power on and power-up 5-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Power on 5-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Power-up 5-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3 MMC100 MMC102/103 power-up 5-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.4 Error during control power-up (NC) 5-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.5 Machine control panel (MCP) power-up 5-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.6 Drive system power-up 5-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.7 MMC102/103 BIOS setup 5-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
5
03.96
5.1 Start-up sequence
5-76 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
5.1 Start-up sequence
All mechanical and electrical installation work must be complete. Before the
system is started up, it is important to ensure that the control and its compo-
nents power up correctly. It is also essential that the equipment is installed in
accordance with the EMC guidelines given in the previous section.
The start-up procedure is detailed below. The order in which the individual steps
are taken is not mandatory, but recommended:
1. Check that SINUMERIK 840D powers up correctly (Chapter 5)
2. Enter basic settings (Section 6.6.1) and memory configuration (Section 6.7)
3. Scaling machine data (Section 6.8)
4. Set axis configuration (Section 6.9.1)
5. Configure and parameterize the drives (Section 6.9.2)
6. Set axis and spindle-specific machine data
Axis velocities (Section 6.9.9)
Axis monitoring (Section 6.9.11)
Axis reference point approach (Section 6.9.12)
Spindle data (Section 6.9.13)
Spindle encoder matching (Section 6.9.15)
Spindle velocities (Section 6.9.16)
Spindle positioning (Section 6.9.17)
Spindle monitoring (Section 6.9.19)
7. Transfer PLC user program and alarm texts (Chapters 7/8)
8. Axis/spindle test run (Chapter 9)
9. Drive optimization (Chapter 10)
Frequency response measurements on speed and position control loops
(Section 10.5)
Analog output (Section 10.8)
10. Data back-up (Chapter 11)
11. Software, hardware replacement (Chapter 12)
12. MMC (Chapter 13)
Start-up sequence
5 Power On and Power-Up
5
03.96 5.2 Power on and power-up
5-77
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
5.2 Power on and power-up
Fig. 5-1 below shows the operator control and display elements on the NCU
that are relevant for switching on and powering up the SINUMERIK 840D:
SVarious error and status LEDs
S7-segment status display
SNMI button
SRESET button
SNCK start-up switch
SPLC start-up switch
SPCMCIA slot
Various errors and status LEDs
Status display (H3)
RESET button (S1)
NMI button (S2)
PLC start-up switch (S4)
NCK start-up switch (S3)
PCMCIA slot
(X145)
MEMORYCARD
X172
S3
X130B
X130A
S4
RESETNMI
+5V
NF
CF
CB
CP
PR
P
S
P
F
PF0
Fig. 5-1 Operator control and display elements of the NCU
Operator control
and display
elements relevant
to power-up
5 Power On and Power-Up
5
03.96
5.2 Power on and power-up
5-78 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
5.2.1 Power on
The installation should be inspected visually for any obvious faults or defects.
Make sure that the mechanical installation of components is correct and that
electrical connections are firmly in place (e.g. in the DC link). Make sure that all
electrical connections have been made correctly before switching on the power
supply. Please check the supply voltages 230V AC and 24V DC and the
shielding and grounding.
Please perform and check the assignments of the components MCP, HHU, PLC
I/Os as part of the installation procedure.
References: /BH/, Operator Components Manual
The MCP, HHU and MMC components can be switched on in any desired se-
quence if they are physically installed.
Switch on the power supply on all components and on the mains supply mod-
ule. No enabling signals need be present initially on the mains supply module.
However, the LEDs on the mains supply module may not indicate any errors/
faults in the power supply. There are no enabling signals on the MMC modules,
power-up is started immediately.
5.2.2 Power-up
When the power is switched on the control powers up. The system software is
stored on a PCMCIA card on delivery (see Fig. 5-1 for PCMCIA slot, page 5-77).
Note
Power up takes longer than for a standard configuration if modules via L2DP
and certain FM and CP modules are used.
To bring the control system into a defined initial state, initialization (NCK general
reset) is required when the power is first connected. To execute an NCK reset,
place turn start-up switch S3 on the NCU to position 1 and switch on the control.
The control then powers up, the SRAM memory is erased and the machine data
are preset to the default values.
Visual inspection
Assignments
Power on
sequence
Power on
NCK general reset
5 Power On and Power-Up 05.97
5
03.96 5.2 Power on and power-up
5-79
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Table 5-1 Meaning of NCK start-up switch S3
(see Fig. 5-1, page 5-77)
Setting Meaning
0Normal mode: The control powers up with the set data.
1Start-up mode: The data in the buffered RAM (SRAM) are erased and stan-
dard (default) machine data loaded.
27 Reserved
When the NCK has powered up correctly, the digit 6 is output on the status
display of the NCU. The +5V and SF (SINUMERIK READY) LEDs light up.
Now switch the NCK start-up switch S3 back to the 0 setting.
NCK power-up can also be initiated via the softkey NCK RESET in the Diag-
nostics operating area (corresponds to position 0 on start-up switch S3). The
message Start-up successful appears in the status line.
A general reset clears the program memory of the PLC.System data blocks and
the diagnostics buffer of the PLC are not erased. After the NCK has powered
up, the PLC must be set to its initial state by means of a general reset. There
are two ways of doing this:
1. By means of the programming device for Step7.
2. By means of the PLC start-up switch S4 on the NCU module.
Table 5-2 Settings with the PLC start-up switch S4
(see Fig. 5-1, page 5-77)
Setting Meaning
0PLC RUN PROGRAMMING: RUN state. It is possible to intervene in the PLC
program without activating a password.
1PLC RUN: RUN state. The program can only be accessed for reading via the
programming device. After activation of the password, it is possible to inter-
vene in (i.e. change) the PLC program.
2PLC STOP: STOP state.
3MRES: A module reset (general reset function) can be executed with the
switch in this setting.
The following operation initiates a PLC RESTART:
Turn PLC start-up switch S4 from position 2 (STOP state) to position 1 or 0
(RUN state).
End of NCK
power-up
Power-up via MMC
PLC general reset
Operation for PLC
restart
5 Power On and Power-Up
05.97
5
03.96
5.2 Power on and power-up
5-80 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Perform the following operating steps with PLC start-up switch S4 to generate a
GENERAL RESET of the PLC:
1. Turn switch to setting 2 (operating state STOP)
PS LED lights up.
2. Turn switch to setting 3 (MRES state, request general reset) and hold in
this position (approx. 3 seconds) until PS STOP LED lights up again
PS LED goes out and lights up again.
3. Within 3 seconds, turn switch to settings
STOPMRESSTOP (2”–“3”–“2)
PS LED flashes first at a frequency of approx. 2 Hz and then displays a
continuous light again
PF LED lights up.
4. After PS and PF LEDs light up, turn switch S4 to setting 0
PS and PF LEDs go out and LED PR (green) lights up
The PLC program memory is now erased, PLC is operating in cyclic
mode.
Note
If a reset followed by an acknowledgement is triggered in position 3, as is the
case for GENERAL RESET, the entire SRAM of the PLC is erased, i.e. both the
system data blocks and the diagnostics buffer are erased. These data can no
longer be accessed. The system data blocks must be loaded again. If setting
3 (MRES) is selected for less than 3 seconds, then no general reset is
requested. The STOP LED does not light up if the switch is not changed from
STOP to MRES to STOP within 3 seconds after a general reset has been
requested.
References: /S7H/, SIMATIC STEP7300
5.2.3 MMC100 MMC102/103 power-up
When the power supply is switched on, the MMC powers up automatically. The
system software is installed in the factory and is ready to run. The basic display
appears on the screen if the MMC has powered up successfully.
Operation for PLC
general reset
MMC100/102/103
power-up
5 Power On and Power-Up
5
03.96 5.2 Power on and power-up
5-81
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
MMC100
If the MMC100 cannot establish a link to the NC, the message: wait for NCU
connection:x seconds, x = 1 to 60 appears on the screen. If a connection
has still not been established after this time, then rebooting takes place soon
after. Check the following:
SIs the SINUMERIK 840D (NCU module) ready to operate (digit 6 on status
display)?
SIs the MPI cable inserted, is cable attached properly to connector?
SIf the reset button of the NCU was pressed again during power-up (e.g. as
performed during a software upgrade [position 1 / general PLC reset]), the
control system must be switched off and on again before the MMC can be
powered up successfully.
MMC102/103
If the MMC102/103 does not power up (screen remains dark), the 24V DC
power supply must be checked. If the power supply is present at the power unit
on the MMC102/103 and the seven-segment status display on the rear panel
does not light up, then the MMC102/103 module is defective.
If the MMC102/103 powers up, but cannot establish a link to the NC, then
Communication to NC failed is displayed in the message line at the bottom.In
this case, please check the following:
SIs the 840D (NCU module) ready for operation (digit 6 on status display)?
SIs the MPI cable inserted, is cable attached properly to connector?
SIs the baud rate in the Start-up/MMC/operator panel menu set correctly? It
must be set to 1.5 Mbaud (password for protection level 2 required).
Note
MMC 101/102
The display remains dark after a successful power-up.
The decimal point lights up during hard disk access operations.
MMC 103
An 8 is displayed after a successful power-up.
The decimal point lights up during hard disk access operations.
If the error message Corrupt SWAP File! appears under Windows 3.11, a new
swap file (20 MB) must be created under the standard Windows user interface.
Problems during
power-up
5 Power On and Power-Up
07.98
5
03.96
5.2 Power on and power-up
5-82 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
5.2.4 Error during control power-up (NC)
Various status messages are output via status display H3 (see Fig. 5-1, page
5-77) during power up. The digit 6 is output when the control has finished pow-
ering up.
If the digit 6 is not output after approximately 2 minutes, but:
Sanother number appears,
Sthe display remains dark,
Sthe display flashes,
then proceed as follows:
1. Repeat the NCK general reset process.
2. Switch S3 (NCU) must be reset to 0.
3. If the NCK general reset does not work, replace the PCMCIA card.
4. If none of these measures work, the NCU module must be replaced.
Status display H3
(7-segment
display)
Problems during
NCK power-up
5 Power On and Power-Up 07.98
5
03.96 5.2 Power on and power-up
5-83
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The following LEDs are located on the front plane of the NCU module
(see Fig. 5-1, Page 5-77). They display the PLC operating states:
PR PLC RUN (green)
PS PLC STOP (red)
PF PLC watchdog (red)
PFO PLC FORCE (yellow)
PROFIBUS (yellow)
Table 5-3 Statuses displayed by PR and PS LEDs
PR
LED
lights
up
off flashes
at
0.5 Hz
flashes
at 2 Hz
off off
PS
LED
off lights
up
lights
up
lights
up
lights up
off for 3 secs.
lights up
lights up
flashes at
2 Hz (min.
3 secs.)
lights up
Meaning RUN STOP HALT RE-
START
GENERAL RE-
SET requested
GENERAL RE-
SET in progress
RUN:
The PLC program is being processed.
STOP:
The PLC program is not being processed. STOP can be set by the PLC pro-
gram, error identifiers or an operator input.
HALT:
Halts the PLC user program (initiated by test function).
RESTART:
The control is started (transition from STOP to RUN state). If the start process is
aborted, the control switches back to the STOP state.
This LED lights up when the PLC watchdog has responded.
A defined value is assigned to a variable by means of the FORCE function. The
variable is write-protected and cannot be changed from any location. The write
protection remains effective until it is canceled by the UNFORCE function. If the
PFO LED is off, then no FORCE job is present.
The PROFIBUS LED is the BUSF LED on the SIMATIC CPU 315DP.
For a description, please consult the Hardware and Installation Manual.
Note
If all 4 LEDs on the status display flash simultaneously after the NCU hardware
has been replaced, then another NCK power-up must be initiated. A PLC gen-
eral reset can then be executed if required.
PLC status
displays
PR and PS LEDs
PF LED
PFO LED
Profibus LED
5 Power On and Power-Up
12.98
5
03.96
5.2 Power on and power-up
5-84 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
5.2.5 Machine control panel (MCP) power-up
The SW version installed on the MCP can be displayed via the LEDs on the
MCP by pressing the Feed start and Feed stop keys during power-up (MCP
flashes).
The SW version is indicated by three digits:
Example: Software version v01_02_03
one LED lights up in the left-hand LED block
two LEDs light up in the center LED block
three LEDs light up in the right-hand LED block
This display indicates that the system software on the MCP has booted cor-
rectly and is waiting for control messages from the PLC.
5.2.6 Drive system power-up
After an NCK general reset the drives are deactivated. No data records (so-
called boot files) are available for the drives. The SF LEDs on the NCU mod-
ule and the 611D closed-loop control module (if installed) light up.
The drives must be configured and parameterized with the SIMODRIVE 611D
start-up tool.
Note
The SF LEDs on the NCU and the red LED on the 611D closed-loop control
module do not go out until the drives have been started up successfully.
5.2.7 MMC102/103 BIOS setup
The defaults in the BIOS of the MMC102/103 can be displayed directly on the
screen during power-up by selecting key combination
CTRL+ALT+ESC
Note
The BIOS setup settings are described in
References: /BH/, Operator Components Manual
J
SW version
Power-up
Start-up tool
5 Power On and Power-Up 03.96
6
6-85
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Assigning Parameters to the Control and
the PLC Program
6.1 Machine and setting data 6-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Handling machine and setting data 6-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Protection level concept 6-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Machine data masking filter (SW 4.2 and higher) 6-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 Function 6-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2 Selecting and setting the masking filter 6-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3 Saving the filter settings 6-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Example for installation and start-up concept 6-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 System data 6-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.1 Basic settings 6-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 Memory configuration 6-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.1 Dynamic RAM 6-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2 Static RAM 6-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 Scaling machine data 6-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9 Axes and spindles 6-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.1 Description of the axis configuration 6-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.2 Drive configuration (FDD, SLM, MSD) 6-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.3 Parameterization of axis-specific setpoints/actual values 6-114. . . . . . . . . .
6.9.4 Drive parameterization (FDD, MSD) 6-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.5 Parameterization of incremental measuring systems 6-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.6 Parameterization of absolute measuring systems (EnDat interface) 6-121.
6.9.7 Overview of optimization drive parameters 6-124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.8 Axis data 6-127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.9 Velocity/speed matching (axis) 6-129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.10 Position controller data (axis) 6-130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.11 Monitoring functions (axis) 6-133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.12 Reference point approach (axis) 6-138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.13 Spindle data 6-140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.14 Spindle configuration 6-142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.15 Encoder matching (spindle) 6-142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.16 Speeds and setpoint adjustment for spindle 6-144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.17 Spindle positioning 6-145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.18 Synchronizing spindle 6-146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.19 Monitoring functions 6-148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.20 Example: Start-up of NCK I/O devices 6-150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors) 6-152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.1 General information about starting up linear motors 6-152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.2 Start-up: Linear motor with one primary section 6-154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.3 Start-up: Linear motors with 2 identical primary sections 6-163. . . . . . . . . .
6
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6-86 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.10.4 Mounting dimensions 6-165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.5 Temperature sensor for 1FN1 and 1FN3 motors 6-166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.6 Measuring system 6-169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.7 Parallel connection of linear motors 6-172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.8 Test measurements on linear motor 6-174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11 AM/V/Hz function 6-176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.12 System settings for power up, RESET and part program start 6-177. . . . . .
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.1 Machine and setting data
6-87
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.1 Machine and setting data
The control system is adapted to the machine by means of machine and setting
data.
The machine data (MD) are classified as follows:
SGeneral machine data
SChannel-specific machine data
SAxis-specific machine data
SMachine data for operator panel
SMachine data for feed drive
SMachine data for main spindle drive
The setting data (SD) are classified as follows:
SGeneral setting data
SChannel-specific setting data
SAxis-specific setting data
For enabling options. The option data are included in the scope of delivery of
the option concerned.
The machine and setting data are classified as follows:
Table 6-1 Overview of machine and setting data
Area Designation
from 1000 to 1799 Machine data for drives
from 9000 to 9999 Machine data for operator panel
from 10000 to 18999 General machine data
from 19000 to 19999 Reserved
from 20000 to 28999 Channel-specific machine data
from 29000 to 29999 Reserved
from 30000 to 38999 Axis-specific machine data
from 39000 to 39999 Reserved
from 41000 to 41999 General setting data
from 42000 to 42999 Channel-specific data
from 43000 to 43999 Axis-specific setting data
from 51000 to 61999 General machine data for compile cycles
from 62000 to 62999 Channel-specific machine data for compile cycles
from 63000 to 63999 Axis-specific machine data for compile cycles
References: /LIS/, Lists
Parameterization
Machine data
Setting data
Option data
Overview of
machine and
setting data
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.1 Machine and setting data
6-88 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Appropriate displays are provided for the entry of machine data. How to select
displays:
Select Area switchover key on the MMC. The menu with the areas Machine,
Parameters, Program, Services, Diagnosis and Start-up is then displayed. Se-
lect Start-up and then Machine data.
Note
The password of protection level 2 EVENING must be set before MD can be
entered.
A bit editor has been implemented to make it easier to set certain machine data
bits. If the input cursor is positioned on a machine data in HEX format in the MD
list, you can call up the editor by pressing the toggle key.
Note
The bit editor for HEX machine data is available only in conjunction with MMC
102/103 and with SW versions 4.1 and higher.
Fig. 6-1 Input screen form of the bit editor for HEX machine data
You can set or reset single bits by clicking them with the mouse or by selecting
them with the cursor keys by pressing the toggle key.
SYou can terminate the bit editor and accept the value set with the softkey
Ok.
SWith the softkey Cancel, you can terminate the bit editor and reject the
value set. The previous setting is then valid again.
Entering
machine data
Bit editor for HEX
machine data
05.97
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.2 Handling machine and setting data
6-89
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.2 Handling machine and setting data
MDs and SDs are addressed by number or by name (identifier). The number
and name are displayed on the MMC. The following must also be taken into
account:
SActive
SProtection level
SUnit
SDefault value
SValue range
The levels at which a data becomes active are listed below in order of priority.
A change to the data takes effect after:
SPOWER ON (po) NCK RESET
SNEW_CONF (cf) Set MD active softkey on MMC
RESET key on MCP
Changes at block ends in program mode
SRESET (re) M2/M30 at program end or
RESET key on MCP
SIMMEDIATE (so) After entry of value
Protection level 4 or higher (keyswitch position 3) must be activated to display
machine data. The appropriate protection level must generally be enabled by
means of password EVENING to start up the system.
The unit refers to the default setting of the machine data:
SCALING_FACTOR_USER_DEF_MASK,
SCALING_FACTOR_USER_DEF and
SCALING_SYSTEM IS METRIC = 1.
If the MD is not based on any physical unit, then the field contains a “–”.
This is the preset value for the MD or SD.
Note
When entered via the MMC, the value is limited to 10 places plus decimal point
and sign.
Specifies the input limits. If no value range is specified, the data type deter-
mines the input limits and the field is marked ∗∗∗.
Number and
identifier
Active
Protection levels
Unit
Default value
Value range
(minimum and
maximum)
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.3 Protection level concept
6-90 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.3 Protection level concept
Protection levels for enabling data areas are implemented in the
SINUMERIK 840D. There are protection levels 0 to 7;
0 is the highest and
7 is the lowest. Protection levels
S0 to 3 are disabled by means of a password and
S4 to 7 by means of keyswitch positions.
The operator only has access to information protected by one particular level
and the levels below it. The machine data are assigned various protection lev-
els as standard.
Protection level 4 (keyswitch position 3) and higher is required to display ma-
chine data.
The appropriate protection level must generally be enabled by means of pass-
word EVENING to start up the system.
Note
For information about changing protection levels, refer to
References: /BA/ Operators Guide
/FB/ A2, Various Interface Signals
Table 6-2 Protection level concept
Protection level Locked by Area
0 Password Siemens
1Password: SUNRISE (default) Machine manufacturer
2Password: EVENING (default) Installation engineer, service
3Password: CUSTOMER (default) End user
4Keyswitch position 3 Programmer, machine setter
5Keyswitch position 2 Qualified operator
6Keyswitch position 1 Trained operator
7Keyswitch position 0 Semi-skilled operator
Protection levels 0 to 3 require the input of a password. The password for
level 0 provides access to all data areas. The passwords can be changed after
activation (not recommended). If, for example, the passwords have been forgot-
ten, then the system must be reinitialized (NCK general reset). This sets all
passwords back to the standard settings of this software version.
The password remains valid until it is reset with the DELETE PASSWORD soft-
key. A POWER ON does not reset the password.
Protection levels
Protection
levels 03
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.3 Protection level concept
6-91
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Protection levels 4 to 7 require a particular keyswitch setting on the machine
control panel. Three keys of different colors are provided for this purpose. Each
of these keys is capable of providing access to particular data areas. The asso-
ciated interface signals are located in DB10, DBB56.
Table 6-3 Meaning of keyswitch positions
Key color Switch position Protection level
All (no key used) 0 = Remove key position 7
Black 0 and 1 67
Green 0 to 2 57
Red 0 to 3 47
The user can change the priority of the protection levels. Only protection levels
of a lower priority may be assigned to machine data. Levels of a lower or higher
priority may be assigned to setting data.
Example:
%_N_UGUD_DEF File for global variables
;$PATH=/_N_DEF_DIR
REDEF $MA_CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR APR 2 APW 2
(APR ... read authorization)
REDEF $MA_ENC_SEGMENT_NR APR 2 APW 2
(APW ... write authorization)
REDEF $SN_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD APR 2 APW 2
M30
The file becomes active when the next _N_INITIAL_INI is read in. Different
protection levels are specified for writing (changing) or reading (part program or
PLC).
Example:
MD 10000 is protected by levels 2 / 7, i.e. protection level 2 (password) must be
disabled to write it and protection level 7 to read it. Keyswitch position 3 or
higher is required to reach the machine data area.
Protection levels
47
Redefinition of
protection levels
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.4 Machine data masking filter (SW 4.2 and higher)
6-92 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.4 Machine data masking filter (SW 4.2 and higher)
6.4.1 Function
If you use the masking filter, you can reduce the number of machine data dis-
played and adapt it to the users requirements.
All machine data in the areas
SGeneral machine data
SChannel-specific machine data
SAxis-specific machine data
SDrive machine data (FDD/MSD)
are assigned to certain groups.
You can see to which group a machine data belongs in the
machine data list.
Reference /LIS/ Lists
SEach area has its own division into groups
SEach machine data in the areas can be assigned to several groups.
6.4.2 Selecting and setting the machine data masking filters
The filters are selected and activated in a list display that is opened with the
Display options vertical softkey in the relevant machine data areas.
Fig. 6-2 Display options screen for setting the masking filter
Selecting the
list displays
08.97
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.4 Machine data masking filter (SW 4.2 and higher)
6-93
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
If the users access rights (password) are insufficient, the machine data is not
displayed. If the access rights are fulfilled, the system checks to see if the mask-
ing filters are activated.
Note
You can see to which group a machine data belongs from the machine data
list.
Table 6-4 Display criteria
Masking filter active SInactive: All machine data are displayed
SActive: Checking the group filter
Expert mode SInactive: The MD is assigned to expert mode
=> MD not displayed
SActive: The MD is assigned to expert mode
=> MD displayed (note index)
Group filter SInactive: The MD is assigned to the group
=> MD not displayed
SActive: The MD is assigned to the group
=> MD displayed (note index)
All others SInactive: For MDs not assigned to a group
=> MD not displayed
SActive: For MDs not assigned to a group
=> MD displayed (note index)
Index from to SInactive: All subparameters of the MD are
displayed
SActive: Only the specified subparameters of the MD are
displayed
The checkboxes are selected with the cursor keys and activated and deacti-
vated with the toggle key.
SIf a filter is deactivated (not crossed), the corresponding
machine data are not displayed.
SIf a filter is activated (crossed), the corresponding machine data are dis-
played. Please also note the Index from to filter.
Note
If the Index from to filter is active, please note the following:
If the first index (0) only is to be displayed, the settings for the override switch,
for example, (MD 12000.1: OVR FACTOR_AX_SPEED) are not visible.
Display criteria
Activating the
group filter via
checkboxes
05.97
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.4 Machine data masking filter (SW 4.2 and higher)
6-94 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SSelect all softkey
The checkboxes of the groups are activated.
The softkey does not affect the checkboxes of:
Filter active
Expert mode
Index from to
All others
SDeselect all softkey
The checkboxes of the groups are deactivated.
The softkey does not affect the checkboxes of:
Filter active
Expert mode
Index from to
All others
SCancel softkey
Return to the machine data display.
The old filter settings are retained.
Any changes are lost.
SOK softkey
Changed filter settings are stored.
The machine data display is reconstructed.
The input field is positioned on the current MD again. If the MD has
been masked the field is positioned on the first MD.
The expert mode setting is intended to simplify initial start-up.
Intended procedure:
SActivate all filters (check).
SActivate Mask filters active (check).
SDeactivate expert mode (do not check).
SOnly the machine data required for performing the basic functions are dis-
played (e.g. proportional gain, reset time, filter).
Data such as machine data for adaptation, reference model, etc. are not
displayed.
If all the machine data of an area are masked by the filter setting, the following
message appears when you select this area:
With the current access rights and the current filter setting no machine data can
be displayed.
After acknowledgment with the OK softkey an empty machine data window ap-
pears.
Vertical softkeys
Expert mode
Masking all
machine
data
08.97
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.4 Machine data masking filter (SW 4.2 and higher)
6-95
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.4.3 Saving the filter settings
The filter settings are saved area-specifically in the file C:\MMC2\IB.INI. This file
must be backed up before an MMC software upgrade and restored after up-
grading to retain the settings.
For information about data backup see
Reference /IAD/ Chapter 11, Data Backup
Saving
08.97
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.5 Example of start-up design concept
6-96 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.5 Example of start-up design concept
1. Simple series start-up during initial start-up
2. Inclusion of machine options (e.g. rotary tables or 2nd spindle)
3. Shortening of the start-up time
4. Simplification of the machine data handling in user displays for mechanics
and technicians making measurements
5. Standardized PLC program for the entire machine series
The following variations, e.g. for a milling machine with one or two rotary tables
or spindles are possible.
Starting from a basic variation
Swith three axes (X11,Y11,Z11),
Smagazine axis (B11),
Sspindle (C11)
a series start-up file is generated.
In the declaration of the machine data for this basic machine, all axes that might
be present as options are declared in the machine axis data.
This applies to one or two rotary tables (A11,A22) and/or a second spindle
(C22).
Because all the machine axes that are possible in the series are declared, all
the axis data modules are set up in the PLC (DB 31 38).
The axis assignment is the same whatever axes the machine has.
This is necessary for a standardized PLC program.
N10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[0]=X11Axis X
N10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[1]=Y11Axis Y
N10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[2]=Z11Axis Z
N10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[3]=A11Rotary table 1
N10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[4]=A22Rotary table 2
N10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[5]=B11Magazine axis
N10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[6]=C22Spindle 2
N10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[7]=C11Spindle 1
Machine data files are set up for individual machine options that then only
contain the changed machine data.
Objective
Basic machine
Machine data
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.5 Example of start-up design concept
6-97
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
%_N_COMPLETE_TEA_INI;
OPTION 5 AXES [X,Y,Z,A11,B] 1 SPINDLE [C]; Rotary axis A11 with double axis module!
CHANDATA(1); OPTION 5 AXES 1 SPINDLE
N13000 $MN_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[0]=1
N13000 $MN_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[1]=1
N13000 $MN_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[2]=1
N13000 $MN_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[3]=1
N13000 $MN_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[4]=1
N13000 $MN_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[5]=1
N13000 $MN_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[6]=0
N13000 $MN_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[7]=0
N13010 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[0]=8
N13010 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[1]=1
N13010 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[2]=3
N13010 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[3]=2
N13010 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[4]=6
N13010 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[5]=4
N13010 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[6]=5
N13010 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[7]=0
N13030 $MN_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[0]=1
N13030 $MN_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[1]=2
N13030 $MN_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[2]=2
N13030 $MN_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[3]=2
N13030 $MN_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[4]=2
N13030 $MN_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[5]=2
N13030 $MN_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[6]=2
N13030 $MN_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[7]=9
CHANDATA(1)
N20000 $MC_CHAN_NAME=Milling_machine
N20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[0]=1
N20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[1]=2
N20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[2]=3
N20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[3]=4
N20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[4]=6
N20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[5]=8
N20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[6]=0
N20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[7]=0
N20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[0]=X
N20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[1]=Y
N20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[2]=Z
N20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[3]=A1
N20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[4]=B1
N20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[5]=C1
N20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[6]=“”
N20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[7]=“”
M17
1. Read in streamer tape with all machine option files
2. Start series start-up for the basic machine in the Services / Archive area
3. Start series start-up file PLC
4. Start machine option file (e.g. for 6 axes), NCK reset
5. Set PLC options in the PLC dialog
Example file
Procedure for
initial start-up
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.5 Example of start-up design concept
6-98 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
After completion of these steps, the machine is fully functional with the basic
data.
Time required: 1 hour
The files for the machine options also consider the size of the tool magazine
(36, 48, ..locations).
N10900 $MN_INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1=36
N10910 $MN_INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1[0]=0
N10910 $MN_INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1[1]=10
N10910 $MN_INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1[2]=20
.........
The remaining steps of initial start-up include measurement of the axes and
entry of the corresponding compensation values (e.g. backlash) by the
mechanic or measuring technician.
To simplify operation, you can create user displays in the Start-up/machine
data area.
Examples: MECHANIK and QSK user displays.
After completion of the initial start-up, all the data are saved in a series start-up
file. This file is then specific to the machine that was started up and can be used
later on if it is necessary to put the machine back into the condition in which it
was supplied.
The files in the Services / Archive area for the basic machine and the machine
options are no longer required and must therefore be deleted.
The compensation data (e.g. spindle pitch) also have to be backed up
separately from the Services / Active NC data into the archive area.
The last step in the start-up sequence is to back up all MMC 102/103 data onto
a streamer.
Size of the tool
magazine
Axis measurement/
compensation
values
Data backup
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.6 System data
6-99
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.6 System data
6.6.1 Basic settings
The control operates according to time cycles which are defined via machine
data. The basic system clock cycle is defined in seconds; the other time cycles
are calculated through multiplication with the basic system clock cycle.
The time cycles are set as standard to an optimum and should only be changed
if the requirements of the NC cannot be fulfilled with the preset values.
Table 6-5 Control time cycles
Machine data Name NCU 571 NCU 572 NCU 573
MD 10050: SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME Basic system
clock cycle
= 0.0060 s ––>
6 ms
= 0.0040 s ––>
4 ms
= 0.0020 s ––>
2 ms
MD 10060:
POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO
Factor for
position control
clock cycle
= 1 = 1 6 ms
= 6 ms
= 1 = 1 4 ms
= 4 ms
= 1 = 1 2 ms
= 2 ms
MD 10070: IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO Factor for
interpolator clock
cycle
= 4 = 4 * 6 ms
=24 ms
= 4 = 4 * 4 ms
=16 ms
= 4 = 4 * 2 ms
=8 ms
!Warning
If you have changed the time cycles, check that the operating response of the
control is correct in all operating modes before ending the start-up process.
A control system is switched over from the metric to an inch system by means
of MD 10240: SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC (basic system metric, active
after power ON). The additional conversion factor is specified in MD 10250:
SCALING_VALUE_INCH (conversion factor for switchover to INCH system,
factor = 25.4). The existing data are converted to inches after power ON and
displayed. After switchover data must be entered in inches.
Setting MD 10260: CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM=1 in SW version 5 has
made it considerably easier to switch the dimension system over.
SAvailability of an MMC softkey in the MACHINE operating area for dimen-
sion system switchover.
SAutomatic conversion of NC active data when dimension system
is switched over.
SData back-up with current dimension system identifier.
SMachine data MD 10240: SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC becomes active
on Reset.
SThe dimension system for sag compensation is configured in
MD 32711:CEC_SCALING_SYSTEM_METRIC.
The basic programming setting (G70, G71, G700, G710) is switched over on a
channel-specific basis in MD 20150: GCODE_RESET_VALUES [12]. In the
case of softkey toggling via MMC, the value changes between G700 (inches)
and G710 (metric).
In SW version 5 and later, feedrates (inch/min or mm/min) are interpreted in the
dimension system in addition to length data in response to G700/G710.
Control time
cycles
Switchover from
metric to inch
system
12.9812.98
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.6 System data
6-100 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The standard units of the physical quantities of the machine data are as follows:
Physical quantity Metric Inch
Linear position 1 mm 1 inch
Angular position 1 degree 1 degree
Linear velocity 1 mm/min 1 inch/min
Angular velocity 1 rev/min 1 rev/min
Linear acceleration 1 mm/s2 1 inch/s2
Angular acceleration 1 rev/s21 rev/s2
Linear jerk 1 mm/s3 1 inch/s3
Angular jerk 1 rev/s31 rev/s3
Timing 1 s 1 s
KV factor (servo gain) 1/s 1/s
Rotational feedrate 1 mm/rev 1 inch/rev
Linear position (compensation value) 1 mm 1 inch
Angular position (compensation value) 1 degree 1 degree
The physical quantities for the input/output of machine and setting data (V24,
MMC) can be defined system-wide via MD 10220: (activation of scaling factors)
and MD 10230: SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF (scaling factors of physical
quantities).
If the appropriate activation bit is not set in MD 10220 (activation of scaling
factors), then scaling is implemented internally with the conversion factors listed
below (default setting, exception KV factor). If all bits are set in MD 10220 and if
the default settings are to remain valid, then the following scaling factors must
be entered in MD 10230.
Index no. Physical quantity Input/output Internal unit Scaling factor
0Linear position 1 mm 1 mm 1
1Angular position 1 degree 1 degree 1
2Linear velocity 1 mm/min 1 mm/s 0.016666667
3Angular velocity 1 rev/min 1 degree/s 6
4Linear acceleration 1 m/s21 mm/s21000
5Angular acceleration 1 rev/s21 degree/s2360
6Linear jerk 1 m/s31 mm/s31000
7Angular jerk 1 rev/s31 degree/s3360
8 Timer 1 s 1 s 1
9 KV factor 1 m/minmm 1/s 16.66666667
10 Rotational feedrate 1 mm/rev 1 mm/degree 1/360
11 Linear position (compensation value) 1 mm 1 mm 1
12 Angular position (compensation value) 1 degree 1 degree 1
Internal physical
quantities
Physical
quantities for input
and output
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.6 System data
6-101
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Input values for machine data
Internal physical quantity
MD 10230
Scaling factor
MD 10220
Scaling factor
activated? Internal scaling
no
yes
Fig. 6-3 Changing physical quantities
The user wishes to enter the linear velocity in m/min.
The internal physical quantity is mm/s.
min * 1 m * 60 s = 1000/60 [mm/s] = 16.666667
1 m * 1000 mm * 1 min
[m/min] =
The machine data must be entered as follows:
MD 10220: SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK = H4 (activation of new factor) and
MD 10230: SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF [2] = 16.6666667 (scaling factor
for linear velocity in m/min).
The machine data are automatically converted to these physical quantities after
input of the new scale and power ON. The new values are displayed on the
MMC and can then be saved.
The unit of the physical quantities for programming in the part program is
specified in the Programming Guide.
The internal control calculation resolutions are entered in MD 10200:
INT_INCR_PER_MM (calculation resolution for linear positions) and
MD 10210: INT_INCR_PER_DEG (calculation resolution for angular
positions).
The default value for this machine data is 1000. The control thus calculates as
standard in 1/1000 mm or 1/1000 degrees. If greater accuracy is required, only
these two machine data need to be changed. It is useful to enter machine data
in powers of 10 (100, 1000, 10000). If required, rounding (and thus also
falsification) of the internal values can only be achieved with finer units.
However, it is essential that the measuring system is adapted to this degree of
accuracy. The internal calculation resolution also determines the accuracy with
which positions and selected compensation functions are calculated. Changes
to the MD have no influence on the velocities and cycle times which can be
attained.
In MD 9004: DISPLAY_RESOLUTION, you can set the number of decimal
places after the decimal point for the position values on the operator panel.
The input value limitation depends on what values can be displayed and input
on the operator panel.
This limit is reached at 10 digit positions plus decimal point plus sign.
Example
Internal
calculation
resolutions
Display resolution
Input and display
limit values
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.7 Memory configuration
6-102 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.7 Memory configuration
The following table shows the hardware configuration of the available NC
CPUs:
D-RAM S-RAM
not
buffered
S-RAM
buffered
FLASH PCMCIA
NCU 570 1.5 MB 0.25 MB 2.25 MB
NCU 571 4 MB 0.5 MB/2.0 MB* 4 MB
NCU 572 8 MB 0.5 MB/2.0 MB* 4 MB
NCU 573 8 MB 0.5 MB/2.0 MB* 4 MB
NCU 573.2 8 MB 2.0 MB 4 MB
NCU 573.2 32 MB* 2.0 MB 4 MB
*) available as an option, see Catalog NC 60.1
The memory areas for user data in the NC are preset to suit most user require-
ments during an NCK general reset. The following areas can be adjusted to
achieve optimum utilization of the available user memory:
STool management
STool offsets
SUser variables
SR parameters
SCompensations (e.g. LEC)
SProtection zones
SFrames
The memory must be sectionalized before commencement of the actual start-up
process because all buffered user data (e.g. part programs, drive data) are lost
when the memory is re-allocated. Machine data, setting data and options are
not erased.
The MDs for the memory configuration are activated by power ON.
Hardware
configuration
Memory areas
Activation
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.7 Memory configuration
6-103
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
!Caution
Before increasing the DRAM areas (e.g. local user variables, function
parameters), check first that there is enough memory available (MD 18050
must be higher than 15000). If more dynamic memory is requested than is
available, the SRAM is also erased without prior warning the next time the
control is powered up and the following user data are lost:
Drive machine data
Part programs
Memory configuration data
Configurable memory areas
References: /FB/, Step7, Memory Configuration
6.7.1 Dynamic RAM memory
Set the following machine data:
Table 6-6 MDs for allocating DRAM
MDs for DRAM Meaning
MD 18242: MM_MAX_SIZE_OF_LUD_VALUE This data is preset to 8192 bytes for Cycle 95. It can be
reduced to 2048 if Cycle 95 is not in use.
MD 28040: MM_LUD_VALUE_MEM Memory size for local user variables.You should increase
this MD from 25 Kbytes (default) to 35 50 Kbytes only if
you need more than 2048 bytes in MD 18242.
Check the available DRAM memory area in MD 18050. Values of more than
15000 must be displayed. If the value is lower, the memory resources are ex-
hausted and there is a risk that user data will be lost if more DRAM memory
space is allocated.
DRAM check
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.7 Memory configuration
6-104 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.7.2 Static RAM memory
Set the following machine data:
Table 6-7 MDs for allocating SRAM
MDs for SRAM Meaning
MD 18120: MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK Number of global user data
MD 18130: MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN Number of channel-specific global user variables
MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Memory allocation for tool management
Set the tool management parameters according to
the machine requirements. If you are not using the
TM function, set MD 18084 and 18086 to 0. This
gives you more part program memory.
MD 18082: MM_NUM_TOOL Number of tools according to machine
MD 18100: MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA Number of tool cuttings edges per TOA module ac-
cording to requirements of end customer
MD 18160: MM_NUM_USER_MACROS Number of macros
MD 18190: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA
MD 28200: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN
MD 28210: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIV
Number of files for machine-related protection
zones
Number of files for channel-specific protection
zones
Number of protection zones simultaneously active in
one channel
MD 28050: MM_NUM_RPARAM Number of R parameters required
MD 28080: MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES Number of frames required
MD 38000: MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS Number of compensation points required
If the NCU 571/572/573 with larger memory is used, the memory must be
enabled.
SEnter value 1900 in MD 18230: MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED.
SMake a copy of the series installation file.
SPerform POWER ON (the memory is reorganized).
SReload series installation file in the control.
MD 18060 shows how much user memory is still available.
Recommendation:
Values greater than 15000 should be displayed so that data (e.g. tool offsets)
can be imported at any time.
Note
Under normal circumstances do not change any of the other memory settings!
SRAM with
2 MB module
SRAM check
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.7 Memory configuration
6-105
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The following machine data cause a reconfiguration of the control SRAM when
their contents are changed. When a change is made, the alarm 4400 MD
alteration will cause reorganization of buffer (data loss!) is displayed. When this
alarm is output, all data must be saved because all buffered user data will be
erased during the next booting.
Table 6-8 Machine data for memory configuration
MD number MD name Meaning
MD 18020 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK Number of global user variables
MD 18030 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN Number of global user variables
MD 18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Memory tool management
MD 18082 MM_NUM_TOOL Number of tools
MD 18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE Number of magazines
MD 18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION Number of magazine locations
MD 18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM Number of magazine data
MD 18092 MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM Number of magazine location data
MD 18094 MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM Number of tool-specific data
MD 18096 MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM Number of TOA data
MD 18098 MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM Number of monitoring data
MD 18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA Tool offsets per TOA module
MD 18110 MM_NUM_TOA_MODULES Number of TOA modules
MD 18118 MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES Number of GUD files
MD 18120 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK Number of global user variables
MD 18130 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN Number of channel-specific user variables
MD 18140 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_AXIS Number of axis-specific user variables
MD 18150 MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM Memory location for user variables
MD 18160 MM_NUM_USER_MACROS Number of MACROS
MD 18190 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCKC Number of protection areas
MD 18230 MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED User memory in SRAM
MD 18270 MM_NUM_SUBDIR_PER_DIR Number of subdirectories
MD 18280 MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR Number of files
MD 18290 MM_FILE_HASH_TABLE_SIZE Hash table size for files in a directory
MD 18300 MM_DIR_HASH_TABLE_SIZE Hash table size for subdirectories
MD 18310 MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILESYSTEM Number of directories in passive file system
MD 18320 MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM Number of files in passive file system
MD 18330 MM_CHAR_LENGTH_OF_BLOCK Max. length of an NC block
MD 18350 MM_USER_FILE_MEM_MINIMUM Minimum user memory in SRAM
MD 28050 MM_NUM_R_PARAM Number of channel-specific R parameters
MD 28080 MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES Number of settable frames
MD 28085 MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT Allocation of a TO unit to a channel
MD 28200 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN Number of files for protection areas
MD 38000 MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS [n] Number of interpol. points with interpol. compensation
Erasure of SRAM
through MD
change
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram 03.96
6.8 Scaling machine data
6-106 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.8 Scaling machine data
Machine data also include data which define how machine data are scaled with
respect to their physical unit (e.g. velocities).
The following machine data refer to scaling:
SMD 10220: SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK (activation of scaling factors)
SMD 10230: SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF (scaling factors of physical
quantities)
SMD 10240: SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC (basic system metric)
SMD 10250: SCALING_VALUE_INCH (conversion factor for switchover to
INCH system)
SMD 30300: IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis)
When machine data are loaded (via MMC, V.24 interface, program), they are
scaled according to the physical unit which is currently valid. If this data record
contains a new scale (e.g. rotary axis declaration), those machine data which
are dependent upon scaling data are converted to the new scale after the next
POWER ON. The MDs do not then contain the expected values (e.g. rotary
axis traverses at very low F values).
Example:
The control has been started up with default values. The 4th axis is defined as a
rotary axis in the MD file to be loaded and contains the following machine data:
axis is defined as a rotary axis and contains the following machine data:
$MA_IS_ROT_AX[A1] = 1 (rotary axis)
$MA_MAX_AX_VELO [A1] = 1000 [rev/min] (maximum axis velocity)
When the MD block is loaded the velocity is interpreted with respect to a linear
axis (default setting $MA_IS_ROT_AX[A1]=0) and normalized according to the
linear velocity.
During the next POWER ON process, the control detects that this axis is de-
fined as a rotary axis and normalizes the velocity with reference to rev/min. The
value in the machine data is then no longer 1000, but 2.77777778
(1000/360).
If the MD file is loaded again, the axis is already defined as a rotary axis and the
velocity is interpreted as the rotary axis velocity. The MD then contains the
value 1000 that is interpreted in rev/min by the control system.
Either
SChange the relevant machine data by hand via the MMC (MD 10220,
10230, 10240, 10250, 30300) followed by NCK power-up. After that, read in
the MD set via V.24 and start an NCK power-up, or
SCreate an MD set with the standard machine data (MD 10220, 10230,
10240, 10250, 30300). Load this MD set and initiate an NCK power-up. After
that read in the complete MD set and start an NCK power-up, or
Scaling
machine data
Step-by-step
loading of
machine data
12.97
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.8 Scaling machine data
6-107
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SAs an alternative to the options listed above, an MD block can also be
loaded twice (via V24), with an NCK start-up in each case.
Note
If a scaling MD is altered, then the control outputs alarm 4070 Scaling data
changed.
Standard machine data can be loaded in several ways.
SSet switch S3 to position 1 on NCU module and initiate NCK reset.
Note
During this operation, the complete SRAM on the NCU module is re-initialized.
All user data are erased.
SMD 11200: INIT_MD (loading standard MD during next power-up)
By entering certain values in MD: INIT_MD, it is possible to load various data
areas with default values when the NCK next powers up. The machine data is
displayed in HEX format. After MD: INIT_MD has been set, Power ON must be
executed twice:
SThe MD is activated when the power is switched on the first time.
SThe function is executed and the MD reset to 0 when the power is
switched on the second time.
Value 0
The stored machine data MD are loaded during the next power-up.
Value 1
On the next power-up, all machine data (with the exception of the memory con-
figuring data) are overwritten with default values.
Value 2
On the next power-up, all MDs that configure the memory are overwritten with
default values.
Value 4
reserved.
Standard data
Meaning of input
values in MD11200
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-108 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9 Axes and spindles
6.9.1 Description of the axis configuration
The SINUMERIK 840D is supplied as standard with the following configuration:
SNCU 571: 1 channel and 5 axes.
SNCU 572/573: 2 channels and 8 axes with simulated setpoint or
actual value channel.
> 2 channels are provided on the SINUMERIK 840D.
Machine axes are all axes existing on the machine. They are defined as geom-
etry axes or additional axes.
The workpiece geometry is programmed with the geometry axes. The geometry
axes form a rectangular coordinate system (2D or 3D).
In contrast to geometry axes, there is no geometric relationship between special
axes such as:
rotary axes
turret axes
position-controlled spindles
The axis configuration is defined on 3 levels:
1. Machine level
2. Channel level
3. Program level
MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB
An axis name is defined here for each machine axis in
MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB.
Example:
Turning machine Milling machine
with X, Z, C axis/spindle 4 axes + spindle/C axis
X1
01
Z1 C1
342
X1
01
Y1 Z1
342
A1 C1
MD 10000
Index
Number of
channels
Machine axes
Geometry axes
Special axes
Axis configuration
1. Machine level
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-109
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Example for milling machine: MD 10000
AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[0] = X1
AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[1] = Y1
AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[2] = Z1
AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[3] = A1
AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[4] = C1
SMD 20070: AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[0...7]
The machine axes are assigned to a geometry channel with the channel-
specific MD.
Turning machine Milling machine
1234512300
SMD 20080: AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[0...7]
This MD defines the names of the axes in the channel. Enter the
names of the geometry and auxiliary axes here.
ACCXZ ZXY
SMD 20060: AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[0...2]
This MD specifies the names to be used in the part programs for the geome-
try axes (workpiece axes not specific to machine).
XYZXY*Z
* In a transformation e.g. TRANSMIT
the 2nd geometry axis coordinate
must also be assigned a name (e.g. Y)
SMD 20050: AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[0...2]
Defines the assignment between the geometry axes and the channel axes
(MD20070) without transformation. (For assignment with an active trans-
formation, please refer to: References: /FB/, K2.)
Note the relationship with the inclusion of tool offsets in the calculation (G17,
G18, G19).
123102
2. Channel level
3. Program level
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-110 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
In a program run, the coordinates that are not assigned via MD 20060/
MD 20050 are always mapped directly onto the axes of the channel (in the
milling machine example, axes A and C).
Machine axis no. for channel
1 2 3 4 5
A C
Axis name in channel (addition. axes)
X Y Z
GEO axis
Assignment of
GEO axes
A C
Additional axes
MD 20070: AXCONF_MACHAX_USED
Machine axes used in channel
AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[0]=1
AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[1]=2
AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[2]=3
AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[3]=4
AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[4]=5
MD 20080: AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB
Name of additional axes in channel (for use in
part program)
AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB [0]=
AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB [1]=
AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB [2]=
AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB [3]=A
AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB [4]=C
MD 20050: AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB
Assignment of GEO axes to channel axes.
AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB [0]=1
AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB [1]=2
AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB [2]=3
X to X, Y to Y, Z to Z
Name of GEO axes
MD 20060: AXCONF_GEO_AX_NAME_TAB[0]=X
MD 20060: AXCONF_GEO_AX_NAME_TAB[0]=Y
MD 20060: AXCONF_GEO_AX_NAME_TAB[0]=Z
Fig. 6-4 Example of a milling machine: 4 axes + spindle/C axis
The names defined in MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB or the as-
sociated index are used for
Saccessing axis-specific machine data (loading, saving, displaying)
Sreference point approach G74
Smeasurements
Sfixed point approach G75
Straversing commands from PLC
Sdisplay of axis-specific alarms
Sdisplay of actual-value system (machine-related)
SDRF handwheel function
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-111
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.2 Drive configuration (FDD, SLM, MSD)
Note
The drive configuration and start-up of synchronous linear motors (SLM) are
described in
References: /FBLI/ Description of Functions, Linear Motor.
There are no drive parameters stored in the control in the delivery state or after
a general reset.
Before the drives can be parameterized, the drive configuration (power sections
and motors) connected to the control system must be entered and assigned to
the axes declared in MD 20070: AXCONF_MACHAX_USED/ MD 10000: AX-
CONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB.
Fig. 6-5 Drive configuration display with MMC102/103 (SW 4.1 and higher)
Note
The settings made in the display Drive configuration are described one by
one below.
The drive configuration settings are entered in the Drive configuration display
on the MMC or 611D start-up tool. You can call up this display via the Machine
data / Drive configur.
SA physical slot number is assigned to each power section.
SIf a slot is not used or no power section installed, then it must be coded as
passive.
SA logical address via which the relevant drive is addressed (setpoint/actual
value assignment, access to parameters) is assigned to each slot used.
Setting the drive
configuration
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-112 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Once the drive type has been defined (FDD, SLM, MSD) the corresponding
power section is selected by:
direct entry of the power section code (e.g. from Table 6-9)
selection from the power section list defined for the control (MLFB num-
bers) with the Power section selection... vertical softkey, selection of
the power section with the cursor keys, confirmation with the OK softkey
which then automatically takes you back to the configuration display.
Precondition: The cursor must be positioned in the line of the relevant
slot.
Table 6-9 Assignment of drive/power section/power section code
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Drive type
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Amperage
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Power
section
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Code
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 / 3 / 3 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
8 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5 / 5 / 8 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
15 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
8 / 10 / 16 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
25 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
24 / 32 / 32 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
50 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
06
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
30 / 40 / 51 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
80 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
07
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
45 / 60 / 76 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
108 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0D
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
45 / 60 / 76 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
120 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
08
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
60 / 80 / 102 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
160 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
09
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
85 / 110 / 127 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
200 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
A0
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
120 / 150 / 193 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
300 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0B
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
200 / 250 / 257 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
400 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0C
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
FDD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 / 6 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
8 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
11
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
FDD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5 / 10 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
15 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
12
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
FDD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9 / 18 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
25 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
14
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
FDD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
18 / 36 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
50 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
16
ÁÁÁÁÁ
FDD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
28 / 56 A
ÁÁÁÁ
80 A
ÁÁÁÁ
17
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
FDD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
56 / 112 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
160 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
19
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
FDD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
70 / 140 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
200 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1A
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
FDD
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
140 / 210 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
400 A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C1
Power section
selection
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-113
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D with 3 axes and one spindle
Mains
supply
module
NCU
module
MSD
module
80A
FDD
module
50A
FDD
2-axis
module
2x25A
M
G
Gearing
Linear scale
Axis
The encoder
is always
installed with
611D
Logic drive no. 432
1
Machine axis name C1 X1 Y1 Z1
14
Module slots 23
Z1 axis
Fig. 6-6 Example 1 of a SINUMERIK 840D with 3 axes and 1 spindle
Table 6-10 Data for example shown in diagram above
Slot Power sec-
tion module
Drive Log. drive no. Direct mea-
suring sys-
tem
Position mea-
suring sys-
tem 1
Position
measuring
system 2
180 A MSD 4 no Motor encoder no
250 A FDD 1 no Motor encoder no
325 A FDD 2 no Motor encoder no
425 A FDD 3 yes Linear scale no
Fig. 6-7 Drive configuration
Example 1 of a
machine
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-114 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.3 Setting the axis-specific setpoint/actual value parameters
One setpoint channel (i.e. a logical drive number) and at least one actual-value
channel for the position measuring system must be assigned to each axis/
spindle. A second channel for a second position measuring system can be spe-
cified optionally.
The motor measuring system (X411) is always used for the speed control func-
tion. The table below shows the fixed assignment between the motor connec-
tions and motor measuring system connections:
The motor and motor measuring system must always be connected to the same
module.
Setpoint channel assignment (axis-specific)
MD Meaning Input for example 1 (see Fig. 66)
MD 30110: CTRLOUT_MO-
DULE_NR Assignment of a logical drive no.
to setpoint channel X1=1Slot 2
Y1=2Slot 3
Z1=3Slot 4
C1=4Slot 1
MD 30130: CTRLOUT_TYPE Setpoint channel present 1
Actual-value channel assignment (axis-specific)
MD Meaning Input for example 1
MD 30200: NUM_ENCS Number of measuring channels
1 if only one position measuring
system is installed
(2 if two position measuring sy-
stems are installed)
X1=1
Y1=1
Z1=1
C1=1
MD 30240: ENC_TYPE[0] Encoder type
1 for incremental encoder
(4 for absolute encoder with En-
Dat interface)
X1=1
Y1=1
Z1=1
C1=1
MD 30220:
ENC_MODULE_NR[0] Assignment of a logical drive no.
to actual-value channel for posi-
tion measuring system 1
X1 =1 Slot 2
Y1 =2 Slot 3
Z1 =3Slot 4
C1 =4 Slot 1
MD 30220:
ENC_MODULE_NR[1] Assignment of a logical drive no.
to actual-value channel for posi-
tion measuring system 2
Position measuring system 2 is not in use
MD 30230: ENC_INPUT_NR[0] Assignment for position measu-
ring system 1
1 for motor measuring system
2 for direct measuring system
X1 =1
Y1 =1
Z1 =2
C1 =1
MD 30230: ENC_INPUT_NR[1] Assignment position measuring
system 2
1 for motor measuring system
2 for direct measuring system
Position measuring system 2 is not in use
Assignment of
setpoint/actual
value channels
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-115
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
Each logical drive number may be entered only once in the configuration dis-
play. All activated slots must be assigned to an axis (setpoint channel).
If axes/spindles must stay temporarily inactive during start-up, MD 30240:
ENC_TYPE and MD 30130 CTRLOUT_TYPE must be set to 0 and the as-
signed power section slot declared as passive.
The default setting for MD 30100: CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR=1, MD 30210:
CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR=1 and MD 30210: ENC_SEGMENT_NR =1 must
not be changed.
It is possible to select whether or not the interface signals of a simulation axis
are output at the PLC interface (e.g. during program test if no drive hardware is
installed) via MD 30350: SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT.
Once the drive configuration and setpoint/actual value assignment have been
entered, an NCK reset must be executed to initiate a control reset to make the
set configuration operative.
The message Start-up required requesting parameterization of the drive data
is output for all activated drives.
Restart
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-116 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.4 Drive parameterization (FDD, MSD)
A motor type must be specified for all drives via the MMC102/103 or SIMO-
DRIVE 611 start-up tool in the Machine data FDD or Machine data MSD
menu (see vertical softkey bar). The selection is made from a list via the motor
order number (1FT6VVVVVVV, 1FT7VVVVVVV, 1PHVVVVVVV see
rating plate).
SWith FDDs, only the selection of motor 1 is visible.
SWith MSDs, the selection of motors 1 and 2 is visible (e.g. for Y/D
changeover).
To avoid incorrect parameterization for MSD, the OK softkey remains dis-
abled until a valid motor or unlisted (non-Siemens) motor has been selected
for motor 1.
SAfter you have selected the motor and confirmed with the OK softkey, a
menu for entering the encoder data is displayed.
SWhen you select the motor type the most important control data are preset.
Display Measuring system data appears when you acknowledge the Motor
selection display.
Fig. 6-8 Example of measuring system data for FDD motor selection
The measuring system installed in the motor must be selected in this display,
i.e. incremental encoder or absolute encoder with EnDat interface. When you
select a measuring system, defaults are automatically assigned to all the other
required values. Now acknowledge by pressing OK.
Drive
parameterization
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-117
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Example:
SIncremental motor encoder (ERN1387)
1FV6VVVVVVVVAVV
Incremental with zero mark: You can now accept the display with OK
because the system will correctly preset the other parameters for standard
motors.
SAbsolute motor encoder (EQN1325)
1FV6VVVVVVVVEVV
EnDat interface: You can now accept the display with OK because the sys-
tem will correctly preset the other parameters for standard motors.
Note
In the case of 1FK6 motors with optical encoders, the torque utilization option is
supported by automatic identification procedures. In this case, traversing mo-
tions < 5 degrees mechanical are not exceeded. The identification procedure
is performed on every power-up.
If you are using a non-Siemens motor, you must open the menu for entering the
non-Siemens motor data with the Non-Siemens motor softkey. After you have
entered the data and returned to the motor selection menu, the entry Non-Sie-
mens motor is automatically displayed in the selection box for motor 1 or mo-
tor 2.
References: /FBA/ DM1, Motor, Power Section Parameters
Once you have selected a motor, the drive data block must be saved individu-
ally for each axis/spindle with the Save boot file command. The data block is
stored as a VSAxx.BOT or HSAxx.BOT file in the user memory (SRAM) on the
NC module.
Non-Siemens
motor
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-118 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.5 Parameterization of incremental measuring systems
The following table lists all the data that you need to enter in order to match a
rotary encoder.
Table 6-11 Machine data for matching rotary encoders
Machine data Linear axis Rotary axis
Encoder on
motor
Encoder on
machine
Encoder on
motor
Encoder on
machine
30300: IS_ROT_AX 0011
31000: ENC_IS_LINEAR 0000
31040: ENC_IS_DIRECT 0101
31020: ENC_RESOL Marks/rev. Marks/rev. Marks/rev. Marks/rev.
31030: LEADSCREW_PITCH mm/rev. mm/rev.
31080: DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA Motor rev. Load rev. Motor rev. Load rev.
31070: DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM Encoder rev. Encoder rev. Encoder rev. Encoder rev.
31060: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA Motor rev. Motor rev. Motor rev. Motor rev.
31050: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM Spindle rev. Spindle rev. Load rev. Load rev.
M
IS_ROT_AX=0
ÍÍÍÍÍ
Table
ENC_IS_LINEAR_=0
ENC_RESOL
G
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA No. of motor rev.
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM =No. of spindle rev.
ENC_IS_DIRECT=0
LEADSCREW_PITCH
n
Encoder
Measuring
gearing
nMotor
Load
gearing
nSpindle
Leadscrew
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM No. of motor revolutions
No. of encoder revolutions
Fig. 6-9 Linear axis with motor-mounted rotary encoder
Rotary encoders
Linear axis with
motor-mounted
rotary encoder
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-119
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
M
IS_ROT_AX=0
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
Table
ENC_RESOL
G
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA No. of spindle rev.
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM =No. of encoder rev.
ENC_IS_DIRECT=1
LEADSCREW_PITCH
Spindle
ENC_IS_LINEAR_=0
Load
gearing
Measuring
gearing
n
Spindle nEncoder
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA No. of motor rev.
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM =No. of spindle rev.
Fig. 6-10 Linear axis with machine-mounted rotary encoder
M
IS_ROT_AX=1
ENC_RESOL
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA No. of motor revolutions
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM =No. of encoder revolutions
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA No. of motor rev.
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM =No. of load rev.
ENC_IS_DIRECT=0
LG
n
Encoder
Rotary table
Load
gearing
nMotor
Measuring
gearing
nLoad
ENC_IS_LINEAR=0
Fig. 6-11 Rotary axis with motor-mounted rotary encoder
L
IS_ROT_AX=1
ENC_IS_LINEAR_=0
ENC_RESOL
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA No. of load rev.
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM =No. of encoder rev.
ENC_IS_DIRECT=1
GM
Measuring
gearing
Load
gearing
Rotary table
Load
n
Encoder
n
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM No. of motor revolutions
No. of load revolutions
Fig. 6-12 Rotary axis with machine-mounted rotary encoder
Linear axis with
machine-mounted
rotary encoder
Rotary axis with
motor-mounted
rotary encoder
Rotary axis with
machine-mounted
rotary encoder
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-120 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The following table lists all the data you need to enter for linear measuring
systems.
Table 6-12 Machine data for encoder matching with linear measuring systems
Machine data Linear axis
MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX 0
MD 31000: ENC_IS_LINEAR 0
MD 31030: LEADSCREW_PITCH mm/rev
MD 31040: ENC_IS_DIRECT Encoder mounted on motor: 0
Encoder mounted on machine: 1
MD 31010: ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST Scale graduations
MD 32110: ENC_FEEDBACK_POL Actual value sign (feedback
polarity)
[1; -1]
MD 31060: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA Motor revolution
MD 31050: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM Spindle revolution
M
IS_ROT_AX=0
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Leadscrew
Load gearing
Table
Linear scale
ENC_IS_LINEAR=1
ENC_IS_DIRECT=1
ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST (for linear encoder)
ENC_FEEDBACK_POL= [1 or -1]
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA No. of motor rev.
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM =No. of spindle rev.
LEADSCREW_PITCH
Fig. 6-13 Linear axis with linear scale
Matching encoders
with linear
measuring
systems
Linear axis with
linear scale
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-121
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.6 Parameterization of absolute measuring systems
(EnDat interface)
In order to adapt the absolute encoder to the real data of the machine, the en-
coder must be matched in a similar fashion to a rotary or linear incremental en-
coder.
The following additional axis machine data must be noted with respect to abso-
lute encoders:
Table 6-13 Axis machine data for absolute encoders
Rotary absolute encoder Linear absolute en-
coder
MD Mounted on motor Mounted on machine Mounted on machine
1005: ENC_RESOL_MOTOR Marks/rev.
(2048 on standard motor)
*)
1007: ENC_RESOL_DIRECT Marks/rev. Scale graduations in [nm]
1011: ACTUAL_VALUE_CONFIG Bit 3 *)
1030: ACTUAL_VALUE_CON-
FIG_DIRECT
Bit 3 Bit 3 + Bit 4
34200: ENC_REEP_MODE [n]:
0...max. no. encoders -1
000
34220: ENC_ABS_TURNS_MO-
DULO [n]: 0...max. no. encoders -1
Multiturn resolution
(4096 on standard motor)
Multiturn resolution
*) Measuring system parameter has been set automatically after motor selection.
To set up the encoder, the offset between the machine zero and the absolute
encoder zero is determined and stored in the SRAM of the NC module.
The adjusted state is identified by the control through MD 34210:
ENC_REFP_STATE = 2.
References: /FB/, R1, Reference Point Approach
The absolute encoder must be set once the axes are ready to traverse during
machine start-up. However, it may also be necessary to re-adjust the encoder at
a later point in time, e.g.
Safter dismantling/installing the encoder or the motor with absolute encoder
or,
Sgenerally: if the mechanical connection between the encoder and the load
has been separated and an unacceptable deviation remains when the two
are joined together again, or
Sif data are lost in the NC SRAM, battery voltage failure, PRESET,
Safter gear stage changeover between load and absolute encoder the setting
in MD 34210: ENC_REFP_STATE is deleted.
Precondition
Setting up the
absolute encoder
Readjustment
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-122 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
In all other cases, the user him/herself is responsible for ensuring that
MD 34210: ENC_REFP_STATE switches to 0 or 1 and for readjusting the
encoder.
In the case of Position back-up after Power Off, setting REFP_STATE=1
merely causes the setting to change to 2 if referencing has already taken
place.
To end this mode, REFP_STATE must be set to 0. This Referenced/Adjusted
state will otherwise remain valid forever, even after REFP_MODE has been
changed and Power Off.
The following MDs must be noted before the encoder is adjusted:
MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE=0 (with absolute encoder: Transfer of
REFP_SET_POS)
MD 34220: ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO (required only for rotary axes)
1. Set MD 30240: ENC_TYPE=4.
2. Set MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE=0.
3. Execute NCK reset.
4. Move axis to reference position, setting MD 34010:
REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS according to the approach direction. (If the
axis is traversed in the negative direction towards the reference position,
then MD 34010 must be set to 1.)
5. Set MD 34100: REFP_SET_POS to the actual value of the reference posi-
tion.
6. Set MD 34210: ENC_REFP_STATE to 1 to activate the adjusted settings.
7. Select the adjusted axis on the MCP and press RESET button on MCP.
8. Select JOG/REF mode, issue feed enabling command for axis.
9. The adjustment process must be initiated with traversing key + or “–” ac-
cording to MD 34010: REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS and the direction of ap-
proach towards the reference position. (Backlash has been eliminated.) The
axis does not traverse. Instead, the offset between the correct actual value
(reference position) and the actual value supplied by the encoder is entered
in MD 34090: REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR. The current actual value ap-
pears in the basic display, the axis signals referenced. The value 2 is
entered in MD 34210 as the result.
Example:
MD 34010 = 1 (negative) and reference position has been traversed in neg-
ative direction. In this case, the “–” key on the MCP must also be pressed.
Readjustment of
absolute encoder
Sequence of
operations
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-123
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
EQN 1325 type encoders can represent 4096 revolutions. This means that the
detected positional value is unique over the maximum specified ranges:
SRotary axis, encoder on load: 4096 load revolutions.
SRotary axis, encoder on motor: 4096 motor revolutions.
SLinear axis, encoder on motor: 4096 * effective spindle lead.
In the case of linear axis with an effective spindle lead of 10 mm, a travers-
ing range of 40.96 m is covered.
Note
As from SW 4 the traversing range is identical with that of incremental encod-
ers.
The user must ensure that when the encoder is switched off (power off/on,
parking), the axis is moved by less than half the clearly representable absolute
encoder number range.
In this case, the software can reconstruct the new position by shortest-path
detection.
Otherwise position movements when the encoder is active is possible across
the whole traversing range without any limitations.
The following limitations apply to endlessly turning rotary axes with absolute
encoders:
SWhen the encoder is installed on the load, the load-sided actual value can
be processed only as modulo 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, ..., 4096 revolutions (only pow-
ers of 2 are allowed).
SWhen the encoder is installed on the motor, the gearbox ratio with respect to
the load must be n:1 (n motor revolutions to 1 load revolution). For n also,
only powers of 2 are allowed.
For normal applications (encoder 1:1 on the load) there are no limitations for
endlessly turning rotary axes.
Note
The limitations described above are eliminated in software version 4 and
higher.
Any transmission ratios are permitted, the numerator and denominator must be
integers; the overrun compensation required for this is performed by the soft-
ware.
After you have entered and stored all drive data sets, you must perform an NCK
Reset. The SF LED then goes out and the drives can be traversed after PLC
start-up (presetting of speed controller).
After the axis-specific velocity and traversing range limits have been adjusted,
the speed control preset values should be optimized.
Rotary
absolute encoder
with wide
traversing range
Limitations with
rotary axes
NC RESET
12.9712.98
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-124 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.7 Overview of drive optimization parameters
Use the following parameters to optimize the drive (see also Section 10):
Table 6-14 Speed controller settings
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
No.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Identifier
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Name
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Drive
ÁÁÁÁ
1401
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MOTOR_MAX_SPEED[0...7]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Setpoint scaling
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1001
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEEDCTRL_CYCLE_TIME[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Speed controller clock cycle
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1407
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Speed controller P gain
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
1409
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Speed controller reset time
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1413
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_ENABLE[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Selection of speed controller adaptation
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1408
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_2[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
P gain, upper adaptation speed
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
1410
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_2[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reset time, upper adaptation speed
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1411
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_1[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Lower adaptation speed
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1412
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_2[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Upper adaptation speed
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1421
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_FEEDBK
[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Time constant integrator feedback
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
Table 6-15 Field weakening with MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
No.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Identifier
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Name
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Drive
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1142
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
FIELD_WEAKENING_SPEED[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Threshold speed field weakening
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1143
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
LH_CURVE_UPPER_SPEED[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Upper speed Lh characteristic
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
1144
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
LH_CURVE_GAIN[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Gain factor Lh characteristic
ÁÁÁÁ
MSD
Table 6-16 Current setpoint filter
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
No.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Identifier
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Name
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Drive
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1200
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NUM_CURRENT_FILTERS[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
No. of current setpoint filters
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1201
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_CONFIG[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
current setpoint filter type
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
1202
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_1_FREQUENCY[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Natural freq. setp. current filter 1
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1203
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_1_DAMPING[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Damping current setpoint filter 1
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1204
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_2_FREQUENCY[0,..7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Natural freq. setp. current filter 2
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
1205
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_2_DAMPING[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Damping current setpoint filter 2
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1206
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_3_FREQUENCY[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Natural freq. setp. current filter 3
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1207
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_3_DAMPING[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Damping current setpoint filter 3
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
1208
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_4_FREQUENCY[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Natural freq. setp. current filter 4
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1209
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_4_DAMPING[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Damping current setpoint filter 4
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1210
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_1_SUPPR_FREQ[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Blocking freq. current setpoint filter 1
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
1211
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_1_BANDWIDTH[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Bandwidth current setpoint filter 1
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1212
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_1_BW_NUM[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Numerat. bandwidth current setpoint filter 1
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1213
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_2_SUPPR_FREQ[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Blocking freq. current setpoint filter 2
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
1214
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_2_BANDWIDTH[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Bandwidth current setpoint filter 2
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1215
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_2_BW_NUM[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Numerat. bandwidth current setpoint filter 2
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1216
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_3_SUPPR_FREQ[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Blocking freq. setp. current filter 3
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1217
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_3_BANDWIDTH[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Bandwidth current setpoint filter 3
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
1218
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_3_BW_NUM[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Numerat. bandwidth current setpoint filter 3
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1219
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_4_SUPPR_FREQ[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Blocking freq. current setpoint filter 4
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1220
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_4_BANDWIDTH[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Bandwidth current setpoint filter 4
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
1221
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_FILTER_4_BW_NUM[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Numerat. bandwidth current setpoint filter 4
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-125
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Table 6-17 Speed setpoint filter
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
No.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Identifier
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Name
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Drive
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1500
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NUM_SPEED_FILTERS[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Number of speed setpoint filters
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1502
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEED_FILTER_1_TIME[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Time constant speed setpoint f. 1
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
Table 6-18 Major monitoring and limiting functions
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
No.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Identifier
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Name
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Drive
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1145
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
STALL_TORQUE_REDUCTION[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Stall torque reduction factor
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1230
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
TORQUE_LIMIT_1[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1st torque limit value
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1239
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
TORQUE_LIMIT_FOR_SETUP[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Torque limit for setup mode
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1235
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
POWER_LIMIT_1[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1st power limit value
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1237
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
POWER_LIMIT_GENERATOR[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Maximum generator output
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1105
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MOTOR_MAX_CURRENT_REDUCTION[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reduction in max. motor current
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1238
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CURRENT_LIMIT[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Current limit value
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1605
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEEDCTRL_LIMIT_TIME[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Timer n controller at limit
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1606
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEEDCTRL_LIMIT_THRESHOLD[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Threshold n controller at limit
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1405
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MOTOR_SPEED_LIMIT[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Motor monitoring speed
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1420
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MOTOR_MAX_SPEED_SETUP[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Max. motor speed setting-up mode
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1147
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEED_LIMIT[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Speed limitation
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
Table 6-19 Important messages
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
No.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Identifier
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Name
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Drive
ÁÁÁÁ
1417
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEED_THRESHOLD_X[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
nx for nact<nx signal
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1418
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEED_THRESHOLD_MIN[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
nmin for nact>nmin signal
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1426
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_TOL[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Toler. band for nset=nact signal
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1428
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X[0...7,DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Threshold torque Mdx
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1602
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MOTOR_TEMP_WARN_LIMIT[DRx]
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Motor temp. warning threshold
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
FDD/MSD
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-126 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Filter 2
Current setpoint filter
n_act iq_set
Filter 4
Speed setpoint
limitation
Speed
setpoint filter
n_set
Torque setpoint
monitoring
Actual speed monitoring
=> Torque setpoint limitation = 0 +
Filter 3
Torque setpoint limitation
Torque conversion
to cross current
Speed controller
Setup mode
1239 TORQUE_LIMIT_FOR_SETUP
PT2:
1208 CURRENT_FILTER_4_FREQUENCY
1209 CURRENT_FILTER_4_DAMPING
Bandstop filter
1219 CURRENT_FILTER_4_SUPPR_FREQ
1220 CURRENT_FILTER_4_BANDWIDTH
1725 MAXIMAL_TORQUE_FROM_NC
1230 TORQUE_LIMIT_1
1233 TORQUE_LIMIT_GENERATOR
1235 POWER_LIMIT_1
1237 POWER_LIMIT_GENERATOR
1145 STALL_TORQUE_REDUCTION (MSD)
1409 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1
1413 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_ENABLE
1410 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_2
1411 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_1
1412 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_2
Setup mode
1420 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED_SETUP
1405 MOTOR_SPEED_LIMIT
PT1:
1500 NUM_SPEED_FILTERS
1502 SPEED_FILTER_1_TIME
PT2:
1204 CURRENT_FILTER_2_FREQUENCY
1205 CURRENT_FILTER_2_DAMPING
PT2:
1206 CURRENT_FILTER_3_FREQUENCY
1207 CURRENT_FILTER_3_DAMPING
Bandstop filter
1216 CURRENT_FILTER_3_SUPPR_FREQ
1217 CURRENT_FILTER_3_BANDWIDTH
1218 CURRENT_FILTER_3_BW_NUM
Bandstop filter
1213 CURRENT_FILTER_2_SUPPR_FREQ
1214 CURRENT_FILTER_2_BANDWIDTH
1215 CURRENT_FILTER_2_BW_NUM
1200 NUM_CURRENT_FILTERS
1201 CURRENT_FILTER_CONFIG
Bit 3 2 1 0
Filter 4 3 2 1 0:= Low pass
1:= Band-stop
1605 SPEEDCTRL_LIMIT_TIME
ALARM: 300608 axis %1, drive %2
speed controller output limited
n_act <1606 SPEEDCTRL_
LIMIT_THRESHOLD
+
+
Speed controller
Reset time
Integrator feedback
Speed controller
P gain
nact > MD 1147 SPEED_LIMIT
1221 CURRENT_FILTER_4_BW_NUM
1621 CURRENT_FILTER_4_BW_NUM
1
1413 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_ENABLE
1411 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_1
1412 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_2
1407 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN 1[n]
1408 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_2[n]
1421 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_FEEDBK [n]
Scaling
1401 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED
Fig. 6-14 Speed controller with the most important setting parameters
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-127
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
References: /FBA/ DD2, Speed Control Loop
Note
For details about signals and alarms, please refer to
References: /FBA/ DÜ1, Diagnosis and Monitoring Functions
Note
Changes to the FDD or MSD MD will be retained beyond by an NCK reset if
Save boot file(s) is not performed beforehand.
6.9.8 Axis data
With the SINUMERIK 840D, 8 linear axes are active by default (5 with the
NCU 571). These are assigned to channel 1 (or 2). The assignment to the
rotary axis and spindle must be made on start-up.
MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX must be set for a rotary axis. This setting causes the
setpoint unit to be switched over from mm to degrees.
The rotary axis display is programmed with reference to 360 degrees,
MD 30320: DISPLAY_IS_MODULO (modulo 360 degrees display for rotary
axes), MD 30310: ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis).
These MD are activated after power ON. When MD 30300 is set followed by
power ON, the active axis machine data (e.g. for velocity, acceleration, jerk) are
converted automatically to the new physical unit.
Velocity = 10000 mm/min for linear axes MD 30300:
IS_ROT_AX = 0
After conversion to rotary axis, the value 27.77777778 is entered in this MD and
the unit is now rpm.
The user must specify in MD 30500: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POSTAB (indexing
axis assignment) which global list (general machine data 10900:
INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB1 or MD 10910: INDEX_AX_POS_TAB1 for list
1 and MD 10920 or MD 10930 for list 2) with indexing positions is to be used.
The axis can be defined as a Concurrent positioning axis in MD 30450:
IS_CONCURRENT_POS_AX.
References: /FB/ P2, Positioning Axes
Difference between
linear axis and
rotary axis
Example
Axis types
Indexing axis
Concurrent
positioning axis
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-128 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
In the case of the machine data with the Control parameter set no. field
parameter, the first field is used for normal axis operation. In the case of
interpolations which include one spindle, e.g. with G331 (tapping without
compensating chuck), the selected gear stage determines the appropriate field
of the axes involved (1st gear stage –––> field index 1). This applies to all
machine axes which can be traversed via geometry axes. See Section 6.9.2.
In the case of axes which interpolate with a spindle during thread cutting opera-
tions (G33, G331, G332), the machine data with indices [1]...[5] must also be
supplied with appropriate values.
All existing gear stages must be parameterized for rotary axes that are to be
operated as a spindle with gear stage change (indices [1]...[5]).
Parameter set
1
2
3
4
5
0Default Spindle in
axis mode
Axis interpolates
with spindle (G33)
Axis interpolates
with spindle (G33)
Axis interpolates
with spindle (G33)
Axis interpolates
with spindle (G33)
Axis interpolates
with spindle (G33)
Spindle mode
Spindle mode
Spindle mode
Spindle mode
Spindle mode
1st
3rd
2nd
4th
5th
As specified by
manufacturer
Spindle gear stage
Axis Spindle
Fig. 6-15 Validity of parameter sets in axis and spindle modes
MD 31050: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM (denominator load gearing)
MD 31060: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA (numerator load gearing)
MD 32200: POSCTRL_GAIN (KV factor)
MD 32800: EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME (substitute time constant, current control
loop for feedforward control)
MD 32810: EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME (substitute time constant, speed
control loop for feedforward control)
MD 32910: DYN_MATCH_TIME (dynamic response matching time constant)
MD 36200: AX_VELO_LIMIT (threshold value for speed monitoring)
MD 32200: POSCTRL_GAIN [0,Z1] = 1 (KV for normal axis operation)
MD 32200: POSCTRL_GAIN [1,Z1] = 1 (KV for G331, spindle gear stage 1)
MD 32200: POSCTRL_GAIN [3,Z1] = 1 (KV for G331, spindle gear stage)
MD 32200: POSCTRL_GAIN [0,X1] = 1 (KV for normal axis operation)
MD 32200: POSCTRL_GAIN [1,X1] = 1 (KV for G331, spindle gear stage 1)
MD 32200: POSCTRL_GAIN [3,X1] = 1 (KV for G331, spindle gear stage 3)
Parameter sets
Axis
Spindle
Example
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-129
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
In order to guarantee that the control boots reliably, all activated axes are de-
clared as simulation axes (without hardware) during initialization.
MD 30130: CTRLOUT_TYPE = 0
MD 30240: ENC_TYPE = 0
When the axes are traversed, the control loop is simulated and no hardware-
specific alarms are output. For the purpose of axis or spindle start-up, the value
1, or the value corresponding to the hardware identifier, must be entered in
this MD.
The user can select in MD 30350: SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT whether the inter-
face signals of a simulation axis are output at the PLC interface (e.g. during
program test, if there is no drive hardware).
The measuring system which is active for the position control is selected via
interface signals.
IS Position measuring system 1 selected (DB31, DBX1.5)
IS Position measuring system 2 selected (DB31, DBX1.6)
If both signals are set, then the position measuring system 1 is active.
References: /FB/, A2, Various Interface Signals
6.9.9 Velocity matching (axis)
The following machine data must be defined:
MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity)
MD 32010: JOG_VELO_RAPID (conventional rapid traverse)
MD 32020: JOG_VELO (conventional axis velocity)
MD 34020: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM (reference point approach
velocity)
MD 34040: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER [n] (creep velocity)
MD 34070: REFP_VELO_POS (reference point approach velocity)
Note
When new velocity/speed values are entered, the velocity/speed monitor
(MD 36200: AX_VELO_LIMIT) must be matched accordingly.
The motor speed for the axis drives which results in velocity MAX_AX_VELO
(MD 32000) must be entered in MD 1401.
In order to ensure correct setpoint scaling, it is essential to enter the correct load
gearbox data!
MD 31060: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA
MD 31050: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM
Interface signals
for measuring
system switchover
Machine data for
velocity matching
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-130 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.10 Position controller data (axis)
The closed-loop control of an axis consists of the speed control loop, the current
control loop and a higher level position control loop.
Position
controller
Speed
controller
iset
nset
Current
controller
nact iact
Position setpoint
from
interpolator Motor Encoder
Actual position
value
Fig. 6-16 Control loops
If the axis does not traverse in the desired direction, then an adjustment can be
made in MD 32100: AX_MOTION_DIR (traversing direction). The value “–1
reverses the direction of motion. Allowance is made internally for the control
direction of the position controller. If the control direction of the position
measuring system is incorrect, it can be adjusted with MD 32110:
ENC_FEEDBACK_POL (actual value sign).
In order to obtain high contour accuracy with an interpolation, the loop gain (KV
factor) of the position controller must be large. However, an excessively high KV
factor causes overshoot, instability and impermissibly high machine loads. The
maximum permissible KV factor is dependent on the design and dynamic
response of the drive and the mechanical quality of the machine.
Following error
Velocity
KV = [m/min]
[mm]
The KV factor is entered in MD 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN on the basis of the
following conversion formula:
min mm
m
KV (s1)=[m/min]
[mm]
KV *== K
V * 16.66667 s 1
1000 mm 1 min
1 m 60 s
*
For the factor KV 1 (m/min)/mm, the numerical value must be entered in
MD 32200: POSCTRL_GAIN. Allowance for the factor 16.667 is made by
MD 10220: SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK and
MD 10230: SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF.
For continuous path control, all axes included in the interpolation must have the
same dynamic response. They must all have the same following error at a given
velocity.
Control loops
Traversing
direction
Loop gain
Definition of KV
factor
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-131
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
Axes which interpolate with one another must have the same following error at
a given velocity. This can be achieved by setting the same KV factor or through
dynamic response matching via
MD 32900: DYN_MATCH_ENABLE and
MD 32910: DYN_MATCH_TIME.
References: /FB/, G2, Velocities, Actual Value Systems, Cycle Times
If a KV factor is already known for the machine in question, this can be set and
checked. To check the factor, the axis acceleration must be reduced via
MD 32300: MAX_AX_ACCEL in order to ensure that the drive does not reach
its current limit during acceleration and braking.
The KV factor must also be checked for high speeds of the rotary axis and
spindle (e.g. for spindle positioning, tapping).
The approach behavior at various speeds can be checked by means of a
storage oscilloscope or the SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software. The speed
setpoint is recorded for this purpose.
nset
[V]
t [ms]
nset
[V]
t [ms]
Badly”“Well
selected KV factor selected KV factor
Fig. 6-17 Speed setpoint characteristic
No overshoots may occur while the drive is approaching the static statuses; this
applies to all speed ranges.
The SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software offers various methods of checking the
KV factor (e.g. frequency measurement, speed and position control loop mea-
surement).
SAcceleration too high (current limit is reached)
SError in speed controller (re-optimization necessary)
SMechanical backlash
SMechanical components canted
For safety reasons set the KV factor to a little less than the maximum possible
value. Static checking of the KV factor is performed with the Service Axis
softkey in the Service Display menu. The real KV factor must precisely match
that set because monitoring functions are derived from the KV factor that would
otherwise respond (e.g. contour monitoring).
Checking the
loop gain
Causes of
overshoots in
position control loop
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-132 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The axes are accelerated and braked at the acceleration value entered in MD
32300: MAX_AX_ACCEL. This value should allow the axes to be accelerated
and positioned rapidly and accurately while ensuring that the machine is not
unduly loaded. The acceleration default settings are in the 0.5 m/s2 to 2 m/s2
range.
The acceleration data entered can be either empirical values or the maximum
permissible acceleration values which the user must calculate. The data must
always be checked after entry for which the SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software
and an oscilloscope are required.
MD 32300: MAX_AX_ACCEL
Overshoot-free acceleration and approach with rapid traverse velocity under
maximum load (heavy workpiece).
Via analog outputs (Section 10) or
start-up software for SIMODRIVE 611D
After the acceleration has been entered, the axis is traversed rapidly and the
actual current values and current setpoint are recorded. This recording shows
whether the drive reaches the current limit. While traversing rapidly, the drive
may reach the current limit briefly. However, the current must be well below the
current limit before the rapid traverse velocity or the final position is reached.
Slight load changes during machining must not cause the current limit to be
reached. Excessive current during machining causes falsification of the contour.
It is therefore advisable in this case as well to enter a slightly lower acceleration
value in the MD than the maximum permissible value. Axes can be assigned
different acceleration values even if they do interpolate with one another.
Fine
inter
polation
Jerk
limitation
Dynamic Feedforward
control Speed
setpoint
processing
Actual value
processing
tung
IS position
meas.
system 1/2
MD32400 AX_JERK_ENABLE
MD32410 AX_JERK_TIME MD32200 POSCTRL_GAIN
MD33000
FIPO_TYPE MD32900 DYN_MATCH_ENABLE
MD32910 DYN_MATCH_TIME
MD32620 FFW_MODE
MD32630 FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE
MD32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT
MD32650 AX_INERTIA
MD32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME
MD32800 EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME
MD32100 AX_MOTION_DIR
MD32500 FRICT_COMP_ENABLE
MD32110 ENC_FEEDBACK_POL
MD32700 ENC_COMP_ENABLE
MD32450 BACKLASH
response
matching
Closed loop
control
Fig. 6-18 Additional parameters for position control
Acceleration
Checking and
calculating
acceleration
values
Setting
Identification
Measurement
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-133
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.11 Monitoring functions (axis)
References: /FB/, A3, Axis monitoring
During positioning, a function monitors whether the axis has reached the
positioning window (exact stop). It also monitors whether an axis for which no
traverse command is pending leaves a certain tolerance window (zero speed
monitoring, clamping tolerance).
STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (fine exact stop)
SIS Position reached with coarse exact stop (DB31, ... DBX60.6).
STOP_LIMIT_FINE (fine exact stop)
SIS Position reached with fine exact stop (DB31, ... DBX60.7).
POSITIONING_TIME (coarse exact stop delay)
SThis MD represents the delay after which the actual value must have
reached the Fine exact stop tolerance window when the setpoint position
at the block end is reached.
SIf the value does not reach the fine exact stop window within this time, the
alarm 25080 axis [name] positioning monitoring is generated.
The control switches to follow-up mode.
STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (zero speed tolerance)
SThe machine data specifies the position tolerance which a stationary axis
may not leave.
SIf the axis leaves the tolerance window, the alarm 25040 axis [name] zero
speed control is output. The control switches to follow-up mode.
STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME (zero speed monitoring delay)
SThe MD represents the delay after which the actual value must have
reached the zero speed tolerance window when the setpoint position at the
block end is reached.
SIf the position tolerance is not reached within this time, the alarm 25040 axis
[name] zero speed monitoring is generated.
The control switches to follow-up mode.
CLAMP_POS_TOL (clamping tolerance)
SPosition tolerance while the clamping active signal is present at the PLC
interface. When the tolerance is exceeded, the alarm 26000 axis [name]
clamping monitoring is generated.
SIS Clamping active (DB31, ... DBX2.3)
Monitoring of
positioning
MD 36000
MD 36010
MD 36020
MD 36030
MD 36040
MD 36050
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-134 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
STANDSTILL_
DELAY_TIME
Clamping active
interface signal
CLAMP_POS_TOL
STANDSTILL_POS_TOL
STOP_LIMIT_COARSE
STOP_LIMIT_FINE
Fine exact stop signal
Coarse exact stop signal
POSITIONING_TIME
Actual value
Setpoint
V or s
Time t
Fig. 6-19 Positioning, zero speed and clamping monitor
For each axis, monitoring is possible via the PLC interface. A signal exists for
every traversing range limit informing the NC that the corresponding traversing
range limit has been approached. When the limit switch is reached, the axis or
axes used for interpolation is/are stopped. Deceleration can be set via
MD 36600: BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE (deceleration behavior with hardware limit
switch).
MD 36600: BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE = 1 (rapid braking with setpoint 0)
MD 36600: BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE = 0 (braking characteristics are retained)
IS Hardware limit switch minus (DB31, ... DBX12.0)
IS Hardware limit switch plus (DB31, ... DBX12.1)
Alarm 21614 channel[name1] axis[name2] hardware limit switch [+/]
The axis must be retracted in the opposite direction in JOG mode.
Two software limit switch values can be specified in the machine data for each
axis. The active software limit switch is selected via the PLC. The axis does not
traverse beyond the software limit switch. The monitoring function is activated
after reference point approach and is deactivated after PRESET.
Monitoring of
positions via
hardware limit
switch
Machine data,
interface signals
and alarms
Monitoring of
positions via
software limit
switch
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-135
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
MD 36100: POS_LIMIT_MINUS (1st software limit switch minus)
MD 36110: POS_LIMIT_PLUS (1st software limit switch plus)
MD 36120: POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 (2nd software limit switch minus)
MD 36130: POS_LIMIT_PLUS2 (2nd software limit switch plus)
IS 2nd software limit switch minus (DB31, ... DBX12.2)
IS 2nd software limit switch plus (DB31, ... DBX12.3)
Alarm 10620 channel [name1] block [no.] axis [name2] reaches software limit
switch +/–”
Alarm 10621 channel [name1] axis [name2] stationary at software limit switch
+/ (JOG)
Alarm 10720 channel [name1] block [no.] axis [name2] programmed end point
is behind software limit switch +/–”
Working area limitations can be specified and activated for geometry axes via
setting data or from the part program (with G25/G26). Monitoring is active after
reference point approach.
SD 43400: WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE (working area limitation active in pos.
direction)
SD 43410: WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE (working area limitation active in
neg. direction)
SD 43420: WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS (working area limitation plus)
SD 43430: WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS (working area limitation minus)
Alarm 10630 channel [name1] block [no.] axis [name2] reaches working area
limitation +/–”
Alarm 10631 channel [name1] axis [name2] stationary at working area
limitation +/ (JOG)
Alarm 10730 channel [name1] block [no.] axis [name2] programmed end point
is behind working area limitation +/–”
2nd software
limit switch
(activated via PLC)
1st software
limit switchHardware limit
switch
Mechanical
traversing
limit
EMERGENCY STOP
Working
area limita-
tion
(for geome-
try axes
only)
Fig. 6-20 Overview of travel limits
Machine data,
interface signals
and alarms
Monitoring of
positions via
working area
limitations
Setting data and
alarms
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-136 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The velocity is adapted internally in the SINUMERIK 840D. The setpoint is
limited on a percentage basis in MD 36210: CTRLOUT_LIMIT with reference to
the speed value entered in MD 1401: MOTOR_MAX_SPEED. An alarm is
generated if the setpoint is exceeded for the time period set in MD 36220:
CTRLOUT_LIMIT_TIME. The axes are braked down to zero speed along a
braking ramp when the position control loop is open (MD 36610:
AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME). This MD must contain the time within which
the axis can brake to zero from maximum velocity.
MD 36210: CTRLOUT_LIMIT (maximum speed setpoint)
MD 36220: CTRLOUT_LIMIT_TIME (monitoring time for maximum speed
setpoint)
MD 36610: AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME (braking ramp time in event of
faults)
Alarm 25060 axis [name] speed setpoint limitation.
The monitoring function is provided to ensure that axes whose velocity is limited
in theory owing to the prevailing mechanical conditions (e.g. due to mechanical
limit frequency of pulse encoder) traverse correctly. The actual velocity monitor-
ing function is always active if at least one encoder is configured in the axis
(MD 30200 NUM_ENCS < > 0) which is lower than its limit frequency. Alarm
25030 is output when the threshold value is exceeded.
MD 36020: AX_VELO_LIMIT (threshold value for velocity monitoring)
MD 36610: AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME (braking ramp time in the event of
faults)
Alarm 25030 axis [name] actual velocity alarm limit.
The monitoring function is based on the continuous comparison between the
measured following error and the following error predicted on the basis of the
NC position setpoint. Contour monitoring is always active in position-controlled
operation. If the tolerance band is violated, then the Contour monitoring alarm
is generated and the axes are braked along a set braking ramp.
MD 36400: CONTOUR_TOL (contour monitoring tolerance band)
MD 36610: AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME (braking ramp time in the event of
faults)
Alarm 25050 axis [name] contour monitoring.
The frequency entered in MD: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT is monitored. If this is
exceeded, the Encoder frequency exceeded alarm is output and the axes
braked to zero speed. The Referenced/synchronized interface signal is reset
(DB31, ... DBX60.4, DBX60.5).
Example: Encoder with 2048 pulses mounted directly on motor, limit
frequency 200 kHz, nmax = (flimit / pulses) * 60 sec= 5900 rev/min
Result: It must be ensured that this speed is not reached at maximum axis
velocity (MAX_AX_VELO).
MD 36300: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT (encoder limit frequency),
IS Encoder limit frequency exceeded 1 (DB31, ... DBX60.2),
IS Encoder limit frequency exceeded 2 (DB31, ... DBX60.3),
Alarm 21610 channel [name] axis [name] encoder frequency exceeded.
Dynamic
monitoring
Velocity limitation
Velocity monitoring
Contour monitoring
Encoder monitoring
(encoder limit
frequency
monitoring)
08.97
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-137
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
MD 36310: ENC_ZERO_MONITORING activates the zero mark monitoring
function. The value specifies the number of pulses that may be lost.
Special feature:
Value=100, i.e. the HW monitoring for the encoder is also deactivated.
MD 36310: ENC_ZERO_MONITORING (zero mark monitoring)
MD 36610: AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME (braking ramp time in event of
faults)
Alarm 25020 axis [name] zero mark monitoring.
Two actual value branches can be defined in the SINUMERIK 840D. These
actual values must then, however, be present in the hardware. The actual value
branch which is active for the position control can then be selected via the PLC
interface. When this switchover takes place, the actual position value difference
is evaluated. If this difference is greater than the value entered in
MD: ENC_CHANGE_TOL, then the alarm Measuring system switchover not
possible is generated and the switchover process is prevented.
MD 36500 ENC_CHANGE_TOL (maximum tolerance for actual position value
switchover)
IS Position measuring system 1 (DB31, ... DBX1.5),
IS Position measuring system 2 (DB31, ... DBX1.6),
Alarm 25100 axis %1 measuring system switchover not possible.
Setpoint
processing
Setpoints
interpolator
Speed set-
point
Position
controller
AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME
CTRLOUT_LIMIT
Control loop
model
CONTOUR_TOL
STSTILL_VELO_TOL
AX_VELO_LIMIT
ENC_CHANGE_TOL
Actual value
processing
Actual value
processing
SIMODRIVE
611D
drive
ENC_FREQ_LIMIT
ENC_ZERO_MONITORING
IS Position measuring system 1/2 active
Following error
STOP_LIMIT_COURSE
STOP_LIMIT_FINE
POSITIONING_TIME
STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME
STANDSTILL_POS_TOL
CLAMP_POS_TOL
Braking
ramp SIMODRIVE
611D
drive
Fig. 6-21 Monitoring with SINUMERIK 840D
Note
The time set in MD 36620: SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME (cutout delay
servo enable) must always be set to a higher time than the setting in
MD 36610: AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME (braking ramp time in event of
faults). If this is not the case, the braking ramp in MD 36610 cannot become
operative.
Encoder monitoring
(zero mark
monitoring)
Encoder monitoring
(encoder switchover
tolerance)
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-138 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.12 Reference point approach (axis)
After the control has been switched on, it must be synchronized (referenced)
with the position measuring system of every machine axis.
Referencing must be carried out for axes with incremental measuring systems
and with distance-coded reference marks.
Referencing is started after selection of the REF function with traversing key
PLUS or MINUS (depending on reference point approach direction).
References: /FB/, R1, Reference Point Approach
MD 34000: REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE (axis with reference cam)
MD 34110: REFP_CYCLE_NR (axis sequence with channel-specific
reference point approach)
MD 30240: ENC_TYPE (encoder type)
MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE (referencing mode)
IS Activate referencing (DB21, ... DBX1.0)
IS Reference active (DB21, ... DBX33.0)
The reference point approach for incremental measuring systems is split into
three phases:
Phase 1: Approach reference cam
Phase 2: Synchronize with zero mark
Phase 3: Approach reference point
MD 11300: JOG_INC_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD (INC/REF in JOG mode)
MD 34010: REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS (approach reference cam in minus
direction)
MD 34020: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM (reference cam approach velocity)
MD 34030: REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST (maximum path to reference cam)
IS Traversing keys plus/minus (DB31, ... DBX4.7/DBX4.6)
IS Reference point approach delay (DB31, ... DBX12.7)
MD 34040: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER (creep speed)
MD 34050: REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE (direction reversal to
reference cam)
MD 34060: REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST (maximum path from cam to
reference mark)
MD 34070: REFP_VELO_POS (reference point approach speed)
MD 34080: REFP_MOVE_DIST (reference point distance zero speed)
MD 34090: REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR (additive reference point offset)
MD 34100: REFP_SET_POS (reference point value)
IS Reference point value 1...4 (DB31, ... DBX2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7)
IS Referenced/synchronized 1, 2 (DB31, ... DBX60.4, DBX60.5)
As from SW 4, it is possible to continue to run a conventional machine tool with
the original position information without explicit re-referencing after Power On/
Off.
A condition for correct referencing continuation of the axes after Power Off/On is
that the axes concerned have not been moved in the meantime.
General
machine data and
interface
signals
Reference point
approach for
incremental
measuring
systems
Machine data and
interface signals
for phase 1
Machine data for
phase 2
Machine data and
interface signals
for phase 3
Actual value
buffering via
Power Off
05.97
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-139
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
When the encoder is switched on, the NC then synchronizes to an internal buff-
ered old absolute value (condition: Set MD 34210: ENC_REFP_STATE=2).
Axis movements are blocked internally until this synchronization is completed.
The spindles can continue to turn.
Note
This functionality is permanent linked to the axis signal Fine exact positioning.
Axes or spindles that do not use this signal cannot use this functionality.
Referencing of axes with distance-coded reference marks is executed in 2
phases:
Phase 1: Synchronize by overriding 2 reference marks
Phase 2: Traverse to target point
MD 34310: ENC_MARKER_INC (differential distance between two reference
marks)
MD 34320: ENC_INVERS (inverse measuring system)
MD 11300: JOG_INC_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD (INC and REF in JOG mode)
MD 34040: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER (referencing speed)
MD 34060: REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST (maximum path between two refer-
ence paths)
MD 34300: ENC_REFP_MARKER_DIST (reference mark distance)
IS Traversing keys plus/minus (DB31, ... DBX4.7, DBX4.6)
IS Referenced/synchronized 1, 2 (DB31, ... DBX60.4, DBX60.5)
MD 34070: REFP_VELO_POS (target point approach speed)
MD 34090: REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR (absolute offset)
MD 34330: REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER (with/without target point)
IS Referenced/synchronized 1, 2 (DB31, ... DBX60.4, DBX60.5)
MD 34100: REFP_SET_POS (target point), for referencing to target.
If an axis uses an absolute encoder as its measuring system, then it only needs
to be referenced when the encoder is readjusted.
Note
See Section 6.9.6 for details of absolute encoders.
Reference point
approach with
distance-coded
reference markers
General
machine data
Machine data and
interface signals
for phase 1
Machine data and
interface signals
for phase 2
Referencing with
absolute encoders
05.97
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-140 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.13 Spindle data
In the SINUMERIK 840D control system, the spindle is a subfunction of the
entire axial functionality. The machine data for the spindle are therefore located
among the axis machine data (from MD 35000 onwards). For this reason, data
must be entered for a spindle which are described in the Sections relating to
axis start-up. The following description contains merely a cross-reference to
these MD.
Note
No spindle is defined after a general reset.
References: /FB/, S1, Spindles
The following machine data are required for a spindle definition:
SMD 30300: IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis)
SMD 30310: ROT_IS_MODULO (rotary axis with modulo programming)
SMD 30320: DISPLAY_IS_MODULO (displayed referred to 360 degrees)
SMD 35000: SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX (axis declared as spindle). Entry
ofspindle number with which spindle is to be addressed, e.g. 1 means
spindle name S1.
The following spindle operating modes are provided:
SOpen-loop control mode (M3, M4, M5)
SOscillation mode (support for gear changing operations)
SPositioning mode (SPOS, SPOSA)
SSynchronous mode
SRigid tapping
In spindle mode, the feedforward control switches on as standard
(FFW mode = 1). Exception: In the case of rigid tapping, the feedforward control
acts only when activated explicitly (e.g. by means of the programming com-
mand FFWON).
The set of parameters is selected that corresponds to the current gear stage.
Example:
2nd gear stage > Parameter block [2]
It is possible to switch directly from spindle mode into axis mode provided that
the same drive is used for both modes. The machine data for one axis must be
applied in axis operation. In axis mode, the first parameter set (index [0]) is se-
lected irrespective of the current gear stage.
After the spindle has been positioned, the rotary axis can be programmed di-
rectly with the axis name.
IS Axis/spindle (DB31, ... DBX60.0 = 0).
Spindle definition
Spindle operating
modes
Axis mode
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-141
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
MD 20090: SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND (master spindle reset position in
channel)
MD 35020: SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE (spindle initial setting)
This MD allows a spindle initial setting to be defined.
The following are possible:
SSpeed control without/with position control
SPositioning mode
SAxis mode
The time at which the spindle initial setting acts is defined by means of MD
35030: SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK.
The following are possible:
SPOWER ON
SPOWER ON and program start
SPOWER ON, program start and reset
MD 35040: SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (independent spindle reset)
This MD determines whether the spindle must be stopped by a RESET or a
program end. If the MD has been set, a termination of the spindle functions
must be initiated explicitly via a program command or the IS Spindle reset
(DB31, ... DBX2.2).
MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage changeover
possible. Spindle has several gear stages).
If this machine data is not set, the system assumes that the spindle has no gear
stages. A gear stage changeover is therefore impossible.
With the following machine data and the field parameter Gear stage no. and
Control parameter set no. the selected gear stage determines the appropriate
field index. The field with index 0 is not used for the spindle machine data!
(See above in this chapter in the Axis data section.)
MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (nmax for gear stage changeover)
MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (nmin for gear stage changeover)
MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (nmax for gear stage)
MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (nmin for gear stage)
MD 35200: GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL(acceleration in
speed control mode)
MD 35210: GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL (acceleration in
position control mode)
MD 31050: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM (denominator load gearing)
MD 31060: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA (numerator load gearing)
MD 32200: POSCTRL_GAIN (KV factor)
MD 36200: AX_VELO_LIMIT (threshold value for speed monitoring)
MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO [0,A1] = 500 (not used for spindle)
MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO [1,A1] = 500
(nmax for gear stage change, gear stage 1)
MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO [2,A1] = 1000
(nmax for gear stage change, gear stage 2)
General machine
data definitions
Parameter sets
Example
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-142 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.14 Spindle configuration
Setpoints: MD 30100: CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR
MD 30110: CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR
MD 30120: CTRLOUT_NR
MD 30130: CTROUT_TYPE
Actual values:
MD 30210: ENC_SEGMENT_NR
MD 30220: ENC_MODULE_NR
MD 30230: ENC_INPUT_NR
MD 30240: ENC_TYPE
Note
For further information about spindle configuration, see above in this chapter in
the Drive configuration section.
6.9.15 Encoder matching (spindle)
For the purpose of matching the spindle encoder, the same machine data apply
as for the axis. MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX and MD 30310: IS_ROT_MODULO
must always be set for the spindle so that the encoder is always matched to one
revolution. IS_ROT_AX and MD 30310: ROT_IS_MODULO must always be set
for the spindle so that the encoder is always matched in relation to one
revolution. In order to obtain a display which is always referring to 360 degrees,
MD 30320: DISPLAY_IS_MODULO must be set. If the motor encoder of the
611D system is used for the purpose of encoder matching, then the encoder
matching data must be entered for each individual gear stage if several gear
stages are present. The maximum multiple of the 611D drive is always used as
the maximum multiple of encoder lines. This multiple is 2048.
Table 6-20 Machine data for encoder matching
Machine data Spindle
Encoder on
motor
Encoder on spindle
30300: IS_ROT_AX 1 1
31000: ENC_IS_LINEAR 0 0
31040: ENC_IS_DIRECT 0 1
31020: ENC_RESOL Lines/rev. Lines/rev.
31080: DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA Motor rev. Load rev.
31070: DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM Encoder rev. Encoder rev.
31060: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA Motor rev. See following note
31050: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM Load rev. See following note
Machine data for
setpoints and
actual values
Encoder matching
via machine data
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-143
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
These MD are not required to match the encoder, but they must be entered
correctly for setpoint calculation. The load revolutions are entered in
MD 31050: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM and the motor revolutions in
MD 31060: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA.
Spindle with signal generator (500 pulses) mounted directly on spindle. Internal
multiple = 2048. Internal calculation resolution = 1000 increments per degree.
MD 31020 * 2048
360 degrees
Internal resolution = MD 31070
MD 31080
**
1000
500 * 2048 *1
360 * 1 * 1000
Internal resolution = 0.3515
The encoder increment corresponds to 0.3515 internal increments. An encoder
increment corresponds to 0.003515 degrees (highest possible positioning
resolution).
Spindle with rotary encoder on motor (2048 pulses), internal multiple = 2048, 2
gear stages:
Gear stage 1: Motor/spindle = 2.5/1
Gear stage 2: Motor/spindle = 1/1
Gear stage 1
MD 31020 * 2048
360 degrees
MD 31070
MD 31080
**
1000 incr/degr.
*MD 31060
MD 31050
Internal
resolution =
2048 * 2048 pulses
360 degrees 1
**
1000 pulses/degree
1
1
*2,5 = 0.034332
Internal
resolution =
One encoder increment corresponds to 0.034332 internal increments. An
encoder increment corresponds to 0.000034332 degrees (highest possible
positioning resolution).
Gear stage 2
MD 31020 * 2048
360 degrees
MD 31070
MD 31080
**
1000 incr/degr.
*MD 31060
MD 31050
Internal
resolution =
2048 * 2048 pulses
360 degrees 1
**
1000 pulses/degree
1
1
*1= 0.08583
Internal
resolution =
One encoder increment corresponds to 0.08583 internal increments. One
encoder increment corresponds to 0.00008583 degrees (highest possible
positioning resolution).
Example A of
encoder matching
Example B of
encoder matching
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-144 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.16 Speeds and setpoint adjustment for spindle
The spindle speed output is implemented in the NC with the SINUMERIK 840D.
The control contains the data for 5 gear stages. These stages are defined by a
minimum and maximum speed for the stage itself and by a minimum and maxi-
mum speed for the automatic gear stage changeover. A new gear stage is out-
put only if the newly programmed speed setpoint cannot be traversed in the
present gear stage. For the sake of simplification, the oscillation times for gear
stage changeovers can be specified directly in the NC; the oscillation function
must otherwise be implemented in the PLC. The oscillation function is initiated
via the PLC.
The spindle speeds for conventional operation are entered in axis machine data
MD 32010: JOG_VELO_RAPID (conventional rapid traverse) and MD 32020:
JOG_VELO (conventional axis velocity). The direction of rotation is specified via
the appropriate directional keys for the spindle on the MCP.
The direction of rotation of a spindle corresponds to the traversing direction of
an axis.
The speeds for drive control must be transferred to the drive as scaled values.
The values are scaled in the NC via the selected load gear and via the drive
MD 1401: MOTOR_MAX_SPEED (maximum motor operating speed). In the
case of a spindle drive, the maximum motor speed is entered in MD 1401. The
spindle attains the desired speed via the mechanical gear stage.
MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO
(maximum speed for gear stage changeover)
MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO
(minimum speed for gear stage changeover)
MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT
(gear stage maximum speed)
MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT
(gear stage minimum speed)
MD 35200: GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL
(acceleration in speed control mode)
MD 35220: ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT
(speed for reduced acceleration)
MD 35230: ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR
(reduced acceleration)
MD 35400: SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO (oscillation speed)
MD 35410: SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL (acceleration in oscillation mode)
MD 35430: SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR (start direction in oscillation mode)
MD 35440: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (oscillation time for direction M3 )
MD 35450: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW (oscillation time for direction M4 )
MD 31060: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA (numerator load gearing)
MD 31050: DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM (denominator load gearing)
MD 32010: JOG_VELO_RAPID (conventional rapid traverse)
MD 32020: JOG_VELO (conventional axis velocity)
Speeds, gear
stages
Speeds for
conventional
operation
Direction of
rotation
Setpoint
adjustment
Machine data and
interface
signals
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-145
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
IS Change over gear(DB31, ... DBX82.3)
IS Setpoint gear stage(DB31, ... DBX82.0 to DBX82.2)
IS No speed monitoring for gear changeover
(DB31, DBX16.6)
IS Gear stage changed over(DB31, ... DBX16.3)
IS ActGear stage (DB31, ... DBX16.0 to DBX16.2)
IS Oscillation speed (DB31, ... DBX18.5)
IS Oscillation via PLC(DB31, ... DBX18.4)
IS Oscillation mode(DB31, ... DBX84.6)
IS Open-loop control mode (DB31, ... DBX84.7)
IS Traversing keys minus (DB31, DBX4.6)
IS Traversing keys plus(DB31, ... DBX4.7)
Speed
Max. spindle speed
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Max. speed of gear stage 2
Max. speed for gear stage 2 changeover
Max. speed of gear stage 1
Max. speed for gear stage 1 changeover
Min. speed for gear stage 2 changeover
Min. speed of gear stage 2
Min. speed for gear stage 1 changeover
Min. speed of gear stage 1
Min. spindle speed
(rev./min)
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Gear
stage 2
Gear
stage 1
0
Fig. 6-22 Example of speed ranges with automatic gear stage selection (M40)
6.9.17 Spindle positioning
The control provides an oriented spindle stop function with which the spindle
can be moved into a certain position and held there (e.g. for tool changing pur-
poses). Several programming commands are available for this function which
define the approach and program processing.
References: /PA/, Programming Guide
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-146 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
STo absolute position (0 360 degrees)
SIncremental position (+/ 999999.99 degrees)
SBlock change when position reached
SBlock change on block end criterion
The control brakes the spindle down to creep speed at the acceleration rate for
speed operation. If the creep speed has been reached (INT Spindle in setpoint
range), the control branches into position control mode and the acceleration
rate for position control mode and the KV factor become active. The interface
signal Fine exact stop is output to indicate that the programmed position has
been reached (block change when position reached). The acceleration rate for
position control mode must be set such that the current limit is not reached. The
acceleration rate must be entered separately for each gear stage. If the spindle
is positioned from zero speed, it is accelerated up to a maximum speed corre-
sponding to creep speed; the direction is defined via machine data. The contour
monitoring function is activated as soon as the control mode switches to posi-
tion control.
MD 35300: SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO (creep speed)
MD 35350: SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR
(direction of rotation on positioning from zero speed)
MD 35210: GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL
(acceleration in position control mode)
MD 36000: STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (coarse exact stop )
MD 36010: STOP_LIMIT_FINE (fine exact stop)
MD 32200: POSCTRL_GAIN (KV factor)
MD 36400: CONTOUR_TOL (contour monitoring)
IS Position reached with fine/coarse exact stop (DB31, ... DBX60.6/60.7)
IS Positioning mode (DB31, ... DBX84.5)
6.9.18 Spindle synchronization
The spindle must match its position with the measuring system. This operation
is called synchronization. Synchronization always follows the zero mark of the
encoder or a Bero signal that is connected with the drive module of the SIMO-
DRIVE 611D. In MD 34200 ENC_REFP_MODE you set via which signal syn-
chronization is to be performed (zero mark (0) or Bero (1))
SAfter switch-on of the control if the spindle is moved with a programming
command.
SThe signal Resynchronize spindle 1/2 cancels the signal Referenced/syn-
chronized 1/2. The spindle resynchronizes with the next reference signal.
SAfter every gear stage changeover (MD 31040: ENC_IS_DIRECT=0)
SThe spindle goes out of synchronism if a speed above the encoder limit fre-
quency is programmed. When the speed drops to below the encoder limit
frequency, the spindle is re-synchronized. If the synchronized state has
been lost, it is impossible to implement functions such as rotational feed-
rate, constant cutting velocity, tapping with and without compensating chuck,
positioning and axis modes.
Functionality
Machine data and
interface signals
When
synchronization is
necessary?
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-147
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
To synchronize the spindle, it must always be rotary via a programming com-
mand (e.g. M3, M4, SPOS). It is not sufficient to enter a spindle speed via the
directional keys of the appropriate axis on the machine control panel.
MD 34100: REFP_SET_POS (reference point value, zero mark position)
The position of the reference signal during synchronization is entered in this
MD.
MD 34090: REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR (reference point offset, zero mark off-
set)
The zero mark offset resulting from the synchronization process is entered here.
MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE (position measuring system type)
IS Resynchronize spindle 1, 2 (DB31, ... DBX16.4 or 16.5)
IS Referenced/synchronized 1, 2 (DB31, ... DBX60.4 or 60.5)
Motor Motor
encoder
SIMODRIVE 611D MSD module
Chuck
BERO
Power con-
nection Motor en-
coder cable
Gearing
Toothed belt
Fig. 6-23 Synchronization via an external reference signal (BERO)
Note
If the spindle encoder is not mounted directly on the spindle and there are
speed-transforming gears between the encoder and spindle (e.g. encoder
mounted on motor), then a Bero signal connected to the drive module must be
used for synchronization. The control then automatically re-synchronizes the
spindle position after every gear stage changeover. The user need not take any
further measures in this respect. The attainable accuracy is impaired by
backlash, elasticity in the gearing and the Bero signal hysteresis, during the
synchronization progress.
If a Bero is used, MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE must be set to 2.
Machine data and
interface signals
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-148 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.19 Spindle monitoring
If the velocity falls below the value entered in MD 36060: STAND-
STILL_VELO_TOL, then the interface signal Axis/spindle stationary is output.
The path feed is then enabled if MD 35500:
SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START is set.
If the spindle reaches the tolerance range specified in MD 35150:
SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, then the signal Spindle in setpoint range is output.
The path feed is then enabled if MD 35510:
SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START is set.
The maximum spindle speed is entered in MD 35100: SPIND_VELO_LIMIT.
The NCK limits the speed to this value. If, however, the speed is exceeded by
the speed tolerance in spite of the NCK limitation (drive fault), then the IS
Speed limit exceeded is output together with the alarm 22150 channel [name]
block [number] spindle [number] maximum chuck speed exceeded.
The spindle speed is also monitored by MD 36200: AX_VELO_LIMIT and an
alarm is generated if the set value is exceeded. In position-controlled mode (e.g.
SPCON) a limitation is set within the control to 90% of the maximum speed spe-
cified by the MD or setting data (control reserve).
The maximum gear stage speed is entered in
MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT and the minimum speed in
MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT. The speed cannot leave this
range when the appropriate gear stage is engaged.
The function G25 S... permits a minimum spindle speed to be programmed and
function G26 S... a maximum spindle speed limitation. The limitation is active in
all operating modes. Function LIMS=... allows a spindle speed limit for G96
(constant cutting velocity) to be specified. This limitation is operative only when
G96 is active.
The maximum encoder limit frequency (MD 36300: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT) is moni-
tored. If this limit is exceeded, the synchronization is lost and the spindle func-
tionality reduced (thread, G95, G96). The position measuring systems which are
out of synchronism are automatically resynchronized as soon as the encoder
frequency drops below the value in MD36302: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW. The
encoder limit frequency value must be such that the mechanical encoder speed
limit is not exceeded or else the synchronization from high speeds will be incor-
rect.
Axis/spindle
standstill
Spindle in
set range
Maximum spindle
speed
Gear stage speed
min. / max.
Programmable
spindle speed
limitations
Max. encoder limit
frequency
08.97
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-149
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Speed
n
MD 36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT
MD 35110 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO
MD 35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT
Programmable spindle speed limitation G26
Programmable spindle speed limitation G25
Programmable spindle speed limitation G92
MD 35140 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT
MD 35120 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO
MD 36060 STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL
IS Axis/spindle stationary (DB31, DBX61.4)
Spindle speed range
Speed range of active gear stage
Speed range limited by G25 and G26
Speed range for constant cutting velocity through LIMS
IS Referenced/synchronized (DB31, ... DBX60.4/60.5)
MD 36200 AX_VELO_LIMIT
MD 35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT
Actual speed monitoring
Maximum spindle speed
Fig. 6-24 Ranges of spindle monitoring
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.9 Axes and spindles
6-150 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.9.20 Example: Start-up of NCK I/O devices
Table 6-21 Start-up of NCK I/O devices, drive no.: 4
Analog
Out
Analog
In
Analog
In
8 bits
Out
16 bits
Out
16 bits
In
OUTA [1] INA [1] INA [2] OUT [9] OUT [18] IN [9]
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OUT [17] OUT [33] IN [17]
1. Assign the logical drive number: 4,
select the module type: DMPC.
2. Perform an NCK Reset to set up the bus.
3. Set the number of analog inputs and outputs:
Analog inputs: MD10300 = 2, analog outputs: MD 10310 = 1.
Set the number of digital input and output bytes:
3 bytes for dig. inputs, 2 of these bytes external and 1 internal:
MD10350 = 3,
4 bytes for dig. outputs, 3 of these bytes external and 1 internal:
MD10360 = 4.
4. Assign the analog inputs to the hardware:
MD 10362 [0] = 01040201
1st input byte
Slot on terminal block
Logical drive number
Always = 01 on 840D
MD 10362 [1] = 01040301
5. Assign the analog outputs to the hardware:
MD 10364 [0] = 01040101
6. Assign the digital inputs to the hardware:
MD 10366 [0] = 01040602
2nd input byte
Slot on terminal block
Logical drive number
Always = 01 on 840D
7. Assign the digital outputs to the hardware:
MD 10368 [0] = 01040401
MD 10368 [1] = 01040502
8. Set the weighting factors for the analog inputs/outputs:
MD 10320 = 10000
MD 10330 = 10000
9. Set the option: Programmed analog output
12.98
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.9 Axes and spindles
6-151
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10. Program the following:
$A_OUTA [1] = 5000
(preset analog output 1 to 5000 mV)
FROM $A_INA [1] > 4000 DO $A_OUT [9] = TRUE
(if analog input 1 > 4000 mV, set output 9)
R1 = $A_INA [1]
(set value of analog input 1 in R parameter 1)
DO $A_OUT [9] = FALSE
(reset digital output 9)
DO $A_OUTA [1] = 0
(set analog output 1 to 0 mV)
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-152 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6.10.1 General information about starting up linear motors
Recommended reading
For detailed information about linear motors, encoder and power con-
nections and configuring and assembly, please refer to:
References: /PJLM/ Planning Guide Linear Motors
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
The following checks must be made:
1. Linear motor in general
Which linear motor is being used?
Is the motor listed?
If yes Type: 1FN_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _
If no Find out the manufacturers data for the unlisted linear
motor and enter
Is the cooling circuit operational and is the coolant mixture correct? (Rec-
ommended mix: 75% water, 25% Tyfocor).
2. Mechanical components
Can the axis move freely over the entire traversing range?
Do the mounting dimensions of the motor and the air gap between the
primary and secondary parts comply with the manufacturers specifica-
tions?
Vertical axis:
If the axis has weight compensation, is this functional?
Brake:
If a brake is fitted, is it being applied and released correctly?
Traversing range limitation:
Are mechanical limit stops installed on both sides of the travel path and
bolted securely in position?
Are the moving cables installed properly in a cable trailing device?
Checks in
the de-energized
state
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-153
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3. Measuring system
Is an incremental or an absolute (EnDat) measuring system installed?
a) Incremental measuring system:
Graduations _ _ _ _ _ _ mm
Number of zero markers _ _ _ _ _ _
b) Absolute measuring system:
Graduations _ _ _ _ _ _ mm
Determine the positive drive direction:
Where is the positive count direction of the measuring system? (see
Section 6.10.6)
––> invert the actual velocity value? j yes j no
4. Wiring
Power section (connection with phase sequence UVW, CW rotating field)
PE conductor connected?
Shield attached?
Various methods of temperature sensor evaluation
a) KTY84 evaluation via SIMODRIVE 611D only
b) Evaluation via SIMODRIVE 611D and external devices
c) Evaluation by external devices only
Note:
In case a) a temperature sensor coupling lead (dongle) must be con-
nected between X411 and the measuring system.
(See also PJLM/CON/Connections:
Section Encoder connection).
5. Measuring system cable
Check whether the measuring system cable is correctly attached to con-
nector X411 or to the adapter on the temperature sensor coupling lead.
(See also PJLM/CON/Connections:
Section Encoder connection).
04.0004.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-154 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.10.2 Start-up: Linear motor with one primary part
Linear motors with one primary part (single motor) must be started up using the
start-up tool as described below:
!Warning
For safety reasons, the pulse enabling signal on the closed-loop control plug-in
unit (term. 663) must be switched off initially before the drive is switched on.
1. Configure the drive:
Select drive type: SLM (Synchronous Linear Motor) ––>Insert module
Select the power section
Fig. 6-25 Drive configuration for synchronous linear motor
Start-up procedure
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-155
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2. Adapt the axis-specific machine data (MD) as for feed drive
Fig. 6-26 Minimum selection of axis machine data for linear motor
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-156 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3. Select the motor
Before the motor is selected, message 300701: Start-up required must be
displayed. (Fig. 6-27)
a) Is the linear motor included in the list of linear motors?
If yes: Select the appropriate motor
(parallel-connected linear motors start with 2x1FN. ...)
Fig. 6-27 Selecting a motor for which the data are already listed
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-157
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
b) Is the linear motor not included in the list of linear motors?
––> unlisted motor
Motor field ––> enter data
Fig. 6-28 Entering a motor without listed data
Enter the motor data:
Fig. 6-29 Entered motor data for unlisted motor
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-158 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
4. Measuring system / encoder dialog
Selection of motor measuring system and entry of encoder data
a) Incremental encoder
Fig. 6-30 Input for incremental measuring system with rotor position identification
Enter encoder data
The following selection can be made in the Linear measuring system field:
Incremental one zero marker
An incremental measuring system with one zero marker is installed in
the traversing area.
Incremental several zero markers
An incremental measuring system with several zero markers is installed
in the traversing area.
Incremental no zero marker
An incremental measuring system without a zero marker is installed in
the traversing area.
Invert actual velocity value: yes/no (Section 6.10.6)
Enter Graduations of measuring system
Coarse synchronization with field:
Rotor position identification: yes (applies only to incremental measuring
system)
Confirm acceptance of data with OK ––> Save bootfile and
select NCK reset.
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-159
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
b) Absolute value encoder (EnDat)
An absolute measuring system (EnDat interface) is installed.
Fig. 6-31 Input for absolute measuring system, e.g. LC181
The following inputs must be made:
In Linear measuring system field: Select absolute (EnDat interface)
–“Invert the actual velocity value (Section 6.10.6)
Enter Graduations of measuring system
Confirm acceptance of data with OK ––> Save bootfile and
select NCK reset.
5. Fixed temperature?
If the temperature monitor is not evaluated via the drive, but by an external
device (see Section 6.10.5), the monitoring function must be switched off
through input of a fixed temperature > 0.
MD 1608 e.g. 80_Monitor off
MD 1608 e.g. 0_Monitor on
6. Reduce maximum motor current for safety reasons
MD1105 (maximum motor current) = e.g. enter 20%
!Danger
Linear drives are capable of significantly higher acceleration rates and veloci-
ties than conventional drives.
The traversing area must be kept clear of obstacles at all times to protect oper-
ating personnel and the machine itself.
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-160 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
7. Determine the commutation angle offset
a) Incremental measuring system
Incremental one zero marker
Set MD 1017 = 1
The pulse and controller enabling signals may only be switched on now!
Every time the power is switched on and the enabling signals set, an
audible test current (MD 1019) flows through.
Traverse axis across zero marker, JOG mode
––> The angle offset is automatically entered in MD1016
––> Alarm 300799 appears
Accept with OK ––> save bootfile ––> NCK reset
Incremental none or several zero markers
The pulse and controller enabling signals may only be switched on now!
Synchronization takes place at the current position.
b) Absolute measuring system
The pulse and controller enabling signals may only be switched on now!
When the enabling signals are set, an audible test current (MD1019)
flows through once.
––> The angle offset is automatically determined and entered in
MD 1016
––> Alarm 300799 appears
Accept with OK ––> save bootfile ––> NCK reset
c) Distance-coded measuring system
This measuring system is not supported by the SIMODRIVE 611D.
Several zero markers must be selected incrementally.
(see Fig. 6-30)
8. Check and set rotor position identification
To check the rotor position identification routine, a test function can be used
to determine the deviation between the calculated rotor position angle and
the angle currently applied by the closed-loop control. The test sequence is
as follows:
Start the test function several times and evaluate the deviation
Set MD 1736 (test rotor position identification) = 1
Deviation MD 1737 (rotor position identification deviation)
= _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _
Is the variation in the measured values less than 10 degrees electrical?
No: Increase MD 1019 (e.g. by 10 %) and repeat
measurements.
If result is OK after repeat, then calculate the
commutation angle offset again as described below:
With an incremental measuring system:
a) Incremental one zero marker
see point 7. (Determine the commutation angle offset)
b) Incremental none or several zero markers
Select Save bootfile and then NCK reset
04.0004.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-161
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
With an absolute measuring system:
Switch off drive (NCK reset)
Switch on drive, set MD 1017 = 1 with pulse or controller enabling
signal inhibited
Switch on pulse and controller enabling signals
––> The angle offset is automatically entered in MD1016
––> Alarm 300799 appears
––> Save bootfile and then NCK reset
Example of rotor position identification:
Fig. 6-32 Result of rotor position identification run with absolute measuring system
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-162 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
9. Traverse axis and perform function check
Does the axis traverse in the correct direction with a positive
velocity setpoint?
No Change MD 32100 (travel direction)
Is the traversed distance correct? (Input = 10 mm ––> distance = 10 mm)
10. Set and perform referencing/adjustment
Incremental measuring system:
Referencing (see Section 6.9.12)
Absolute measuring system:
Adjustment (see Section 6.9.6)
11. Set software limit switches (see Section 6.9.11 under subheading
Monitoring of positions via software limit switches)
12. Optimization of axis controller settings
Note:
The automatic controller setting run does not produce any useful results for
linear motors since the measuring system mounting has a significant effect
on the control characteristic.
Current and speed controllers (see Section 10)
Position controller (see Section 10)
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-163
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.10.3 Start-up: Linear motors with 2 identical primary parts
If it is certain that the EMFs of both motors have the same phase relation, then
the motors can be operated on one drive if they have paralleled connecting
cables.
The start-up procedure for paralleled linear motors is based on the start-up op-
eration for a single linear motor.
Initially only one linear motor (motor 1) is connected to the drive and started up
as a single motor (1FNx...). The commutation angle offset is automatically cal-
culated and noted during this phase.
Motor 2 is then connected in place of motor 1 and operated as a single motor.
The commutation angle offset for this motor is also calculated automatically and
noted.
If the difference between the commutation angle offsets of motors 1 and 2 is
less than 10 degrees electrical, both motors can be connected in parallel to the
drive and started up as a parallel connection of 2 linear motors (e.g. 2x 1FN. ...).
The start-up sequence for paralleled linear motors is as follows:
1. Disconnect the paralleled motors
Connect motor 1 only to the power section.
2. Start up motor 1 as if it were a single motor
––> Note information in Section 6.10.1
––> Start up the linear motor as described in Section 6.10.2
(up to and including point 7.)
––> Check and set rotor position identification
(see Section 6.10.2, point 8.)
3. Traverse axis and perform function check
4. Note commutation angle offset of motor 1
MD 1016 (motor 1) = _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ degrees electrical
5. Switch off and wait until DC link has discharged
6. Connect motor 2 to the power section instead of motor 1
Caution:
In the case of a Janus configuration (see Section 6.10.7), interchange
phases U and V.
7. Switch on motor with pulse and controller enabling signals inhibited
General
Procedure for
starting up
paralleled linear
motors
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-164 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
8. Determine the commutation angle offset of motor 2
With an incremental measuring system:
(see Section 6.10.2, point 7: Determine the commutation angle offset)
With an absolute measuring system:
Switch off the drive (NCK reset)
Switch on the drive with pulse or controller enabling signals inhibited
Set MD 1017 = 1
Activate pulse and controller enabling signals
––> The angle offset is automatically entered in MD 1016
––> Alarm 300799 is output
Save bootfile and then NCK reset
9. Traverse axis and perform function check.
(Section 6.10.2, point 9.)
10. Note commutation angle offset of motor 2
MD 1016 (motor 2) = _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ degrees electrical
11. Deviation between point 4. (motor 1) and point 10. (motor 2)
if 10 degrees ––>OK
if 10 degrees ––> Check and correct mechanical assembly
(see Section 6.10.4 und 6.10.7)
Delete motor data of single motor ––> delete bootfile
12. Switch off and wait until DC link has discharged
13. Set up parallel connection of the 2 linear motors again
Connect both motors to the power section again.
14. Switch on motors with pulse and controller enabling signals inhibited
15. Start-up of paralleled linear motors
Carry out the complete start-up procedure described in Section 6.10.2
Select the paralleled motor (2x1FN...) in the Motor selection
dialog
or:
enter the data for the paralleled unlisted motor (as described under sub-
heading Unlisted motor parameters for SLM).
16. Compare commutation angle offset between motors 1 and 2
Check motor cable connection on power section,
adjust if necessary and determine the commutation angle offset.
With an incremental or absolute measuring system:
Refer to Section 6.10.2, point 7. (Determine the commutation angle off-
set).
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-165
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.10.4 Mounting dimensions
Mounting dimension e1 or e2 can be checked by means, for example, of gauge
blocks and feeler gauges before the motor is installed.
Note
The applicable mounting dimensions can be found in the following documents:
S/PJLM/ SIMODRIVE Planning Guide for Linear Motor
SThe data sheet of the appropriate 1FN1 or 1FN3 motor.
Please note with respect to mounting dimension and air gap:
The electrical and system-related properties of the linear motor are guaranteed
solely as a function of the mounting dimension and not the measurable air gap.
The air gap must be large enough to allow the motor to move freely.
Thermo-
insulating
bars
e1
e2
l
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
b
Fig. 6-33 Check dimensions for motor installation illustrated by a 1FN1 motor
Table 6-22 Check dimensions for mounting dimension and air gap for a 1FN1 linear motor
Linear motors 1FN1 ...
Check dimensions
1FN1 07j1FN1 12j
1FN1 18j
1FN1 24j
Mounting dimension e1 [mm] 80.7 0.3 106.7 0.3
Mounting dimension e2 [mm] (without thermo-insulating bars) 76.7 0.3 101.7 0.3
Measurable air gap l [mm] (not including mounting dimension tolerance) 1.1 +0.3/0.45 1.1 +0.3/0.45
Distance b [mm] (not including mounting dimension tolerance) 13 1 13 1
For mounting dimensions of 1FN3 linear motors, see dimension drawings in
appendix of 1FN Planning Guide, mounting height hM or hM1.
Check of
mounting
dimension
and
air gap
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-166 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.10.5 Temperature sensors for 1FN1 and 1FN3 motors
The following temperature sensing system is integrated in the primary part of
1FN1 motors:
1. Temperature sensor (KTY 84)
The KTY 84 temperature sensor has an approximately linear characteristic
(580 ohms at 20 °C and 2.6 kohms at 300 °C).
2. Temperature switch (3 series-connected NC contacts)
A switch with a two-position characteristic and an operating temperature of
120 °C is fitted for each winding overhang.
The temperature switch is generally only used for parallel connections or
protective separation.
The switches can be evaluated additionally by a higher-level external control
(e.g. a PLC). This option is recommended if the motor is frequently loaded at
maximum force at standstill.
As a result of different current levels in the 3 phases, different temperatures
(by as much as 15 K) may occur in the individual winding overhangs; only
temperature switches are capable of sensing them reliably.
The following temperature sensing system is integrated in the primary part of
1FN3 motors:
1. Temperature sensor (KTY 84)
The KTY 84 temperature sensor has an approximately linear characteristic
(580 ohms at 20 °C and 2.6 kohms at 300 °C).
2. PTC thermistor detector
A temperature sensor for each phase is integrated in the winding over-
hangs.
The operating temperature of the PTC sensor is 120 °C.
The 3RN1 thermistor motor protection control unit is the preferred option for
evaluating PTC detectors.
Note
If the temperature sensors or switches are not connected, they must be short-
circuited and connected to PE as protection against electrical damage and high
touch voltages.
!Important
When connecting up the temperature monitoring circuits, please read the spec-
ifications according to DIN EN 50178 regarding protective separation.
For information about protective separation, please refer to:
References: /PJLM/ Planning Guide for Linear Motor
Description of
1FN1
Description of
1FN3
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-167
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The signal leads for motor temperature monitoring on 1FN motors are not
installed in the encoder cable, but in the motor power cable. In order to sense
the winding temperature of the drive, the temperature sensor signal leads must
be looped into the encoder cable (temperature sensor coupling lead).
SIMODRIVE
611 D
X411
U2 V2 W2 PE
Drive A
white
black
yellow
red
brown
+ black
orange
+ red
1FN
Temperature sensor
coupling lead
Pin 13
Pin 25
Linear scale
Power cable
SIMODRIVE
611 D
X411
U2 V2 W2 PE
Drive A
white
black
yellow
red
brown
+ black
orange
+ red
1FN
Temperature sensor
coupling lead
Pin 13
Pin 25
Linear scale
Power cable
SIMODRIVE
611 D
X411
U2 V2 W2 PE
Drive A
white
black
yellow
red
1FN
Linear scale
Evaluation
external
Power cable
Case b)
The temperature is monitored via the drive and
an external device.
STemperature sensor via drive
SExternal temperature switch on 1FN1
SOn 1FN3 with PTC resistors via
control unit
Case a)
The temperature is monitored
via the drive.
Case c)
The temperature is monitored via
an external device only.
Evaluation
external
Fig. 6-34 Evaluation of KTY temperature sensor (black/white) and switch or PTC (yellow/red)
(whether temperature switch or PTC resistor depends on motor type, i.e. 1FN1 or 1FN3)
How are the
temperature
sensors
evaluated?
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-168 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
The outer and inner shield of the signal leads in the power cable and the shield
of the temperature sensor coupling lead must be attached in a 360° connection
with the shield connection plate.
Failure to connect the shield correctly can result in high touch voltages, mal-
functions and sporadic errors or irreparable damage to the closed-loop control
module.
Table 6-23 Assignments of temperature sensor coupling lead
Signal Power cable Temperature sensor coupling lead
(dongle)
X411
on drive
Temperature sensor + Black core Brown + black cores Pin 13
Temperature sensor White core Orange + red cores Pin 25
Temperature switch/PTC Yellow core
Temperature switch/PTC Red core
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-169
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.10.6 Measuring system
The control direction of an axis is correct if the positive direction of the drive
(= CW rotating field U, V, W) coincides with the positive count direction of the
measuring system.
Note
The instructions for determining the drive direction apply only to Siemens mo-
tors (1FNx motors).
If the positive direction of the drive and positive count direction of the measur-
ing system do not coincide, then the actual speed value must be inverted (MD
32110) in the Measuring system/Encoder dialog during start-up.
It is also possible to check the control direction by parameterizing the drive first
and then moving it manually with the enabling signals inhibited.
If the axis is moved in a positive direction (see definition in Fig. 6-35), then the
actual velocity value must be counted positively.
The direction of the drive is positive if the primary part moves in the opposite
direction to the outgoing cable in relation to the secondary part.
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Secondary part (solenoids)
+
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Secondary part (solenoids)
+
Primary part Outgoing cable direction
Primary part Outgoing cable direction
Fig. 6-35 Determining the positive direction of the drive
The method by which the count direction is determined depends on the measur-
ing system itself.
1. Heidenhain measuring systems
Note
The count direction of the measuring system is positive if the distance between
the scanning head and rating plate increases (see Fig. 6-36).
Determine the
control direction
Determine the
drive direction
Calculate the
count direction of
the measuring
system
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-170 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Scanning head
Rating plate
Scale +
Fig. 6-36 Calculating the count direction of Heidenhain measuring systems
2. Renishaw measuring systems (e.g. RGH22B)
The Renishaw RGH22B measuring system (graduations = 20 µm) has com-
patible connections with the Heidenhain products from serial number
G69289 onwards. The zero marker on earlier scanning head models cannot
be evaluated. Since the reference marker on the Renishaw RGH22B has a
direction-dependent position, encoder signals BID and DIR must be para-
meterized such that the reference marker is output in only one direction.
The direction (positive/negative) is dependent on the geometric configura-
tion on the machine and the reference point approach direction.
Table 6-24 Signal and pin assignments, routing on 1FN linear motor
Signal Cable
color
Circular
connector
Connected to
co
l
or connector
12-pin +5 V 0 V
BID black Pin 9 Reference marker in
both directions
Reference marker in
one direction
DIR orange Pin 7 Positive directions Negative direction
+5 V brown Pin 12
0 V white Pin 10
The count direction of the measuring system is positive if the scanning head
moves in the direction of the outgoing cable in relation to the gold strip.
ËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Gold strip
Scanning
head Measuring system
+
Fig. 6-37 Calculating the count direction of Renishaw measuring systems
Note
If the scanning head is mechanically coupled to the primary part, the
outgoing cable direction must be different. Otherwise invert the actual value!
04.0004.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-171
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
3. Zeiss measuring systems (e.g. LIE 5)
Note
The positive count direction of the Zeiss linear measuring system must be de-
termined in exactly the same way as that of the RGH22B Renishaw system
(see Fig. 6-37).
This connection variant has proved to extremely interference-immune and
should always be employed.
If an incremental measuring system is used, the drive is roughly synchronized
using the rotor position identification routine.
SIMODRIVE
611 D
X411
U2 V2 W2 PE
Drive A
Linear scale
6FX20012CG00xxxx (incremental)
6FX20022CH00xxxx (absolute)
Primary part
Temperature sensor coupling lead (dongle)
6FX20021AA14xxxx
Power cable
Encoder lead
Fig. 6-38 Temperature sensor coupling lead (recommended standard connection)
Temperature
sensor coupling
lead (= dongle)
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-172 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.10.7 Parallel connection of linear motors
The distances between the motor primary parts must ensure an identical phase
relation of the motor EMFs.
All primary parts are therefore connected cophasally in parallel to the converter.
Note:
Same outgoing cable direction
τM: Pole pair width (see MD1170)
n: 0, 1, 2, ...
Primary part
Secondary part
Primary part
Secondary part
n S M
n S M
Fig. 6-39 Parallel connection of linear motors (standard configurations)
With this type of parallel connection (Janus configuration), the outgoing
cable directions of the individual motors are opposed.
Note:
Different outgoing cable directions
τM: Pole pair width (see MD1170), 1FN107x: τM = 28.2 mm, 1FN11xx and 1FN12xx: τM = 36 mm
n: 0, 1, 2, ...
xx: Constant dimensions (see data sheet of motor manufacturer)
xx mm + n S M
Fig. 6-40 Parallel connection of linear motors (Janus configuration, special type)
Mechanical
construction
Janus
configuration
(special type of
parallel
connection)
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-173
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The temperature sensors can be evaluated, for example, as follows:
STemperature sensor
Motor 1: Evaluation via the drive
Motor 2: Not connected
(shorted-circuited or connected to PE)
STemperature switch or PTC
Motors 1 and 2: External evaluation
SIMODRIVE
611 D
X411
U2 V2 W2 PE
Drive A
white
black
yellow
red
brown
+ black
1FN
Temperature sensor
coupling lead
Pin 13
Pin 25
Linear scale
Power cable
orange
+ red
white
black
yellow
red
1FN
Power cable
External
evaluation
Motor 1 Motor 2
Fig. 6-41 Wiring of parallel-connected linear motors
Temperature
sensor and
electrical wiring
(see
Section 6.10.5)
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-174 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.10.8 Test measurements on linear motor
If the linear motor has been started up in accordance with instructions, but inex-
plicable error messages still appear, it will be necessary to test all signals by
means of an oscilloscope.
When the primary parts are connected in parallel,
EMF_U of motor 1 must be in phase with EMF_U of motor 2.
The same applies to EMF_V and EMF_W.
This in-phase condition must be checked by means of test measurements.
Procedure for taking test measurement:
SIsolate terminals 48 and 63 on the NE module and terminal 663 on the
closed-loop control plug-in unit.
SCaution: Wait for DC link to fully discharge!
SDisconnect power cable from drive.
Separate any parallel connection of primary parts.
SCreate an artificial neutral point using 1k ohm resistors.
U
V
W
1 k
Linear
motor
EMF_U
1 k1 k
EMF_W EMF_V
Fig. 6-42 Arrangement for test measurements
The phase sequence must be UVW with a positive traversing direction.
The direction of the drive is positive if the primary part moves in the opposite
direction to the outgoing cable in relation to the secondary part.
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Secondary part (solenoids)
+
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
Secondary part (solenoids)
+
Primary part Outgoing cable direction
Primary part Outgoing cable direction
Fig. 6-43 Determining the positive direction of the drive (CW rotating field)
Why measure?
Check phase
sequence
UVW
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.10 Linear motors (1FN1 and 1FN3 motors)
6-175
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
After the oscilloscope has been connected, the drive must be made to cross the
zero marker first in order to synchronize it.
Ch1/Phase U Ch3/Phase W
Ch2/Phase V
Ch4
Fig. 6-44 Determining the commutation angle offset by measuring the EMF and normal-
ized electrical rotor position via DAC in a positive drive direction.
Definition of channels (Ch1 ... Ch4):
SCh1: EMF phase U to neutral point
SCh2: EMF phase V to neutral point
SCh3: EMF phase W to neutral point
SCh4: Normalized electrical rotor position via DAC measuring signal
With a synchronized drive, the difference between EMF/phase U and the electri-
cal rotor position must not exceed 10_.
If the difference is greater, the position of the zero marker must be moved in the
software in MD 1016 COMMUNTATION_ANGLE_OFFSET.
Determining the
commutation
angle
04.00
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.11 AM / U/F function
6-176 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.11 AM / U/F function
Note
The AM / U/F function is described in
References: /FBA/, DE1, Extended Drive Functions
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.12 System settings for power up, RESET and part program start
6-177
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6.12 System settings for power up, RESET and part program
start
The behavior of the control after
SPower up (POWER ON),
SReset/part program end
SPart program start
can be changed with the machine data
MD 20110: RESET_MODE_MASK (definition of the control initial setting
after power up and reset) and
MD 20112: START_MODE_MASK (definition of the control initial setting
after part program start).
Table 6-25 Change system setting with MD
State Variable with MD
Power up (POWER ON) RESET_MODE_MASK
RESET/part program end RESET_MODE_MASK
Part program start START_MODE_MASK and
RESET_MODE_MASK
Select the required system behavior.
SAfter power up (POWER ON)
MD 20110: RESET_MODE_MASK, bit 0 = 0 or 1
Power up
(POWER ON)
MD 20110
RESET_MODE_MASK
bit 0
bit 0=0
bit 0=1
G codes acc. to MD 20150: GCODE_
RESET_VALUES
Tool length compensation not active
Transformation not active
No coupled-axis groupings active
No tangential correction active
not project. Synchronous spindle
coupling is deactivated
G codes acc. to MD 20150: GCODE_RESET_VALUES
Tool length compensation active to MD 20120: TOOL_RESET_
VALUE, MD 20121: TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE and
MD 20130: CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
Transformation active to MD 20140: TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
No coupled-axis groupings active
No tangential correction active
Not project. synchronous spindle coupling is deactivated
Fig. 6-45 System settings after power-up
Concept
Procedure
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.12 System settings for power up, RESET and part program start
6-178 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SRESET / part program end
MD 20110: RESET_MODE_MASK, bit 410 = 0 or 1
Bits 4 to 10 can be combined in any way.
RESET/
part program end
MD 20110
RESET_MODE_MASK
bit 0
bit 0=0
bit 0=1
The current settings are retained.
The following initial setting is activated on
the next part program start:
G codes acc. to MD 20150: GCODE_
RESET_VALUES
Tool length compensation not active
Transformation not active
No coupled-axis groupings active
No tangential correction active
Depending on how they are set bits 4 to 10 affect:
Current plane
Frame currently set
Active tool offset
Active transformation
Coupled-axis groupings
Tangential correction
Unconfigured synchronous spindle coupling
If synchronous spindle coupling is configured, the coupling is
set depending on MD 21330: COUPLE_RESET_MODE_1.
Fig. 6-46 System settings after RESET/part program end
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96 6.12 System settings for power up, RESET and part program start
6-179
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SAfter part program start
MD 20112: START_MODE_MASK, bit 410 = 0 or 1
Bits 4 to 10 can be combined in any way.
Part program start
MD 20112
START_MODE_MASK
bits 4 10
bits 410
= 0
bits 410= 1
The current settings are retained with
respect to
Current plane
Currently settable frame
Active tool offset
Active transformation
Coupled-axis groupings
Tangential correction
Unconfigured synchronous spindle
coupling
The current settings are reset with respect to:
Current plane
Currently settable frame
Active tool offset
Active transformation
Coupled-axis groupings
Tangential correction
Unconfigured synchronous spindle coupling
Fig. 6-47 System settings after part program start
References: /FB/ K2, Coordinate Systems:
Workpiece-Related Actual-Value System
J
6 Assi
g
nin
g
Parameters to the Control and the PLC Pro
g
ram
6
03.96
6.12 System settings for power up, RESET and part program start
6-180 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Notes
04.00
7
7-181
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
PLC Start-Up
7.1 PLC start-up
The PLC in the 840D is compatible with the SIMATIC S7-300 CPU 314. The
basic model has a memory configuration of 64 KB that can be extended by
32 KB to a total of 96 KB (option).
The PLC program is subdivided into a basic program and user program. The
entry points for the user program are marked in OBs 1, 40 and 100 of the basic
program.
PLC module
Basic program,
user program
7
7
03.96
7.1 PLC start-up
7-182 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Process alarm
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Cyclic
ÎÎÎÎ
processing
Start
GP_PRAL
GPOB 1
NCK
Mode grp.
Channel
Axis
Spindle
TM
(not FMNC)
User
program
User
program
User
program
OB 40
OB 1
OB 100
G group
distributor
FB 1
FC 14
FC 3
MCP,
HHU
FC 6
ASUB,
con.
axes/spindles
FC 19/25
Read/ write
var., PI
services
FB 2/3/4
MCP:
MCP_IFM
MCP_IFT
TM:
TM_Trans
TM_Dir
FC 7/8/22
ÎÎÎ
Restart
FC 2
FC (9/15/16/18)
Error and
operational
messages
FC 10
Star/delta
FC 17
HHU:
Display control
FC 13
Fig. 7-1 Structure of the basic program
The PLC basic program is an integral component of the SINUMERIK 810D
tool box.
Set the PLC memory option if necessary.
There are two ways in which the completed PLC program can be loaded:
1. Load, test and edit the PLC program using SIMATIC STEP7 HiGraph (see
also Readme file on the basic program floppy).
2. Load an archived PLC program with PCIN or via MMC 101/102
Tool box
PLC memory
Loading PLC
program
7 PLC Start-Up
7
03.96 7.1 PLC start-up
7-183
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
By default, the STEP7 project manager (S7 TOP) does not display the SDBs.
The SDB display is activated in the View / Set filter menu All modules with
SDBs.
The PLC status is displayed under the Diagnosis menu to permit control and
monitoring of PLC inputs, outputs, flags etc.
The PLC always powers up in RESTART mode, i.e. the PLC operating system
runs through OB100 after initialization and then commences cyclic operation at
the beginning of OB1. It does not return to the point of interruption (e.g. on a
power failure).
Bit memories, timers and counters are stored in modal and non-modal memory
areas. Both area types are contiguous, but are separated by a parameterizable
limit, the area with the higher-order address being designated as the non-reten-
tive area. Data blocks are always retentive.
If the retentive area is not buffered (backup battery empty), then start-up is
blocked. The following operations are performed during a restart:
SDelete IStack, BStack and non-retentive flags, timers and counters
SDelete process image of outputs (PIO)
SReject process and diagnostic alarms
SUpdate system status list
SEvaluate parameterization objects of modules (from SD100 onwards) or
output defaults parameters to all modules in single-processor mode
SProcess restart OB (OB100)
SRead in process image of inputs (PII)
SCancel command output disable (OD)
In chronological terms, the basic program is executed before the PLC user pro-
gram. In cyclic operation, the NC/PLC interface is fully processed. The current
G functions are transferred to the PLC (provided function is activated) on the
process alarm level.
A cyclic monitoring function is activated between the PLC and NCK once pow-
er-up and the first OB1 cycle have been completed. When the PLC fails, alarm
2000 sign of life monitoring PLC is displayed.
References: /FB/, P3, Basic PLC Program
/S7H/, SIMATIC S7300
PLC status
Start-up behavior
of the PLC
RESTART
Cyclic operation
Sign-of-life
monitoring
7 PLC Start-Up
7
03.96
7.2 Overview of organization blocks, function blocks and DBs
7-184 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
FB 1 (power-up block of basic PLC program) must be supplied with variables.
For an exact description of the variables and the ways in which parameter
settings can be altered, please refer to
References: /FB/, P3, Basic PLC Program
Note
Timers T0 to T9 are used by the basic program.
7.2 Overview of organization blocks, function blocks and
DBs
References: /FB/, P3, Basic PLC Program
J
Parameters of FB1
7 PLC Start-Up
8
8-185
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Alarm and Message Texts
8.1 Alarm and message texts 8-186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 Alarm text files for MMC 100 8-186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 Alarm text files for MMC 102/103 8-188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 Alarm text files for HPU 8-190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4 Syntax for alarm text files 8-192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.5 Alarm list characteristics 8-195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
8
03.96
8.1 Alarm and message texts
8-186 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
8.1 Alarm and message texts
8.1.1 Alarm text files for MMC 100
The installation routine stored on the MMC100 application diskette (see Sec-
tion 12) transfers
Sconfiguration settings,
Stexts,
Sthe configured interface and
Sthe user software
from the update directory on your PC/PG to the MMC100 hardware. The ways
in which the alarm text files can be adapted beforehand are described here.
SPC with DOS 6.x
SV.24 cable between the COM1 interface of the MMC100 (X6) and the COM1
or COM2 interface of your PC
SApprox. 3 MB free space on hard disk
SThe following description is based on the assumption that you have already
transferred the software from the supplied MMC100 application diskette
(no. 2) of the hard disk of your PC/PG as described in Section 12.
The texts are stored with the Siemens standard entries in the hard disk drive
you have selected on your PC. To simplify matters, this disk drive is always re-
ferred to as C: in the following description. The directory is:
C:\mmc 100 pj\proj\text\<LANGUAGE DIRECTORY>.
Depending on the selected language, one of the following letters stands for
<LANGUAGE DIRECTORY>:
D for German
G for English
F for French
E for Spanish
I for Italian
The alarm file names start with a and end in the extension .txt.
ALZ.TXT Cycle alarm texts
ALC.TXT Compile cycle alarm texts
ALP.TXT PLC alarm/message texts
Description
Preconditions
Alarm texts/
message texts
Files
8 Alarm and Messa
g
e Texts
8
03.96 8.1 Alarm and message texts
8-187
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The DOS editor edit should be used to edit the files. The standard texts con-
tained in the text files can be overwritten by user-specific texts. An ASCII editor,
e.g. DOS editor, must be used for this purpose. New entries can be added to
alarm text files.
Please refer to Section 8.1.4 for the applicable syntax rules.
MMC100 can be assigned two languages in online mode. These are referred to
as foreground and background languages. It is possible to exchange the
foreground and background languages of the MMC system using the applica-
tion diskette as described in Chapter 12 Hardware/Software Replacement.
During installation, it is possible to select any combination of two of the lan-
guages on the application diskette as the foreground and background lan-
guages.
By definition, the master language is German. It defines the number and order
of the alarm/message texts for the languages selected by the user.
The number and order of the alarm/message texts in the selected languages
must be identical to those of the master language.
After the text contents have been modified, the text files must be converted and
transferred to the MMC (Section12).
Note
128 KB are available to the user for additional text files.
Editor
More than one
language
Master language
Conversion and
transmission
8 Alarm and Messa
g
e Texts
04.00
8
03.96
8.1 Alarm and message texts
8-188 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
8.1.2 Alarm text files for MMC 102/103
Files containing error texts are stored in directory C:\dh\mb.dir\. The error text
files to be used are activated in file c:\mmc2\mbdde.ini.
Extract from mbdde.ini, relevant for the configuration of alarm text files:
...
[Textfiles]
MMC=c:\dh\mb.dir\alm_
NCK=c:\dh\mb.dir\aln_
PLC=c:\dh\mb.dir\plc_
ZYK=c:\dh\mb.dir\alc_
CZYK=c:\dh\mb.dir\alz_
UserMMC=
UserNCK=
UserPLC=c:\dh\mb.dir\myplc_
UserZyk=
UserCZyk=
...
The standard texts in ASCII format are stored in the following files on the hard
disk of the MMC 101/102/103:
MMC C:\dh\mb.dir\alm_XX.com
NCK C:\dh\mb.dir\aln_XX.com
PLC C:\dh\mb.dir\alp_XX.com
ZYK C:\dh\mb.dir\alc_XX.com
CZYK C:\dh\mb.dir\alz_XX.com
In these file names, XX stands for the code of the appropriate language. The
standard files should not be changed by the user to incorporate error texts. If
these files are replaced when new MMC101/102/103 software is installed, user-
specific alarms incorporated or modified by the user will be lost. Users should
store their own alarm texts in user files.
Users can replace the error text stored in the standard files by their own texts or
add new ones to them. To do so, load additional files in directory c:\dh\mb.dir
(MBDDE alarm texts) via the Services operating area. The names of the text
files are set in file c:\mmc2\mbdde.ini. An editor is available for this in area
Diagnostics\Start-up\MMC.
Examples of configuration of two additional user files (texts for PLC alarms, al-
tered alarm texts NCK) in file mbdde.ini:
...
User MMC =
User NCK = C:\dh\mb.dir\mynck_
User PLC = C:\dh\mb.dir\myplc_
User ZYK =
User CZYK =
...
Storage of
text files
Structure of
mbdde.ini
Standard files
User files
8 Alarm and Messa
g
e Texts
8
03.96 8.1 Alarm and message texts
8-189
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The texts from the user files overwrite standard texts with the same alarm num-
ber. Alarm numbers which do not already exist in the standard texts are added.
An ASCII editor must be used to edit the files (e.g. the DOS editor edit).
A language is assigned to the user alarm texts by means of the text file name.
The appropriate code and the extension .com are added to the user file name
entered in mbdde.ini:
Language Code
German gr
English uk
French fr
Italian it
Spanish sp
myplc_gr.com File for German PLC alarm texts
mynck_uk.com File for English NCK alarm texts
Note
Changes to alarm texts do not take effect until the MMC has powered up again.
When you generate text files, make sure that the date and time of day on your
PC are set correctly or else your texts may not be displayed!
File with German user texts, PLC:
myplc_gr.com
700000 0 0 DB2.DBX180.0 set
700001 0 0 No lubrication pressure
The maximum length of an alarm text is 110 characters for a 2-line display.
Editor
Alarm text
languages
Example
Example of
MMC102/103
8 Alarm and Messa
g
e Texts
8
03.96
8.1 Alarm and message texts
8-190 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
8.1.3 Alarm text files for HPU
The alarm text files for the NC and PLC are created and incorporated in the
same manner as for the MMC 100.
The installation routine HPUSETUP on the HPU system diskette transfers
Sconfiguration settings,
Stexts,
Sthe configured interface and
Sthe user software
from the update directory on your PC/PG to the HPU hardware. The ways in
which the alarm text files can be adapted beforehand are described here.
SPC with DOS 6.x
SV.24 cable between the COM1 interface of the HPU and the COM1 or
COM2 interface of your PC
SApprox. 3 MB free space on hard disk
SThe following description is based on the assumption that you have already
transferred the software from the supplied system diskette to the hard disk of
your PC/PG as described in ReadMe file supplied.
1. Call HPUSETUP
2. Once you have copied the software to the hard disk, exit the installation pro-
cedure (NO).
3. Modify the alarm text files in <INSTALLATION DIRECTORY>
\proj_hpu\text\al\...
4. After the text contents have been modified, the text files must be converted
(Mkalarm) and transferred to the HPU.
5. Call INSTALL in the <INSTALLATION DIRECTORY>.
The texts are stored with the Siemens standard entries in the hard disk drive
you have selected on your PC. To simplify matters, this disk drive is always re-
ferred to as C: in the following description. The directory is:
C:\hpu_dvk\proj_hpu\text\al\<LANGUAGE DIRECTORY>.
Depending on the selected language, one of the following letters stands for
<LANGUAGE DIRECTORY>:
D for German
G for English
F for French
E for Spanish
I for Italian
Description
Preconditions
Procedure
Alarm texts/
message texts
8 Alarm and Messa
g
e Texts 05.99
8
03.96 8.1 Alarm and message texts
8-191
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The alarm file names start with a and end in the extension .txt.
ALZ.TXT Cycle alarm texts
ALC.TXT Compile cycle alarm texts
ALP.TXT PLC alarm/message texts
The DOS editor edit should be used to edit the files.The standard texts con-
tained in the text files can be overwritten by user-specific texts. An ASCII editor,
e.g. DOS editor, must be used for this purpose. New entries can be added to
alarm text files.
Please refer to next Section for the applicable syntax rules.
The HPU can be assigned two languages in online mode. These are referred to
as foreground and background languages.
It is possible to exchange the foreground and background languages of the
MMC system using the system diskette.
During installation, it is possible to select any combination of two of the lan-
guages on the system diskette as the foreground and background languages.
By definition, the master language is German. It defines the number and order
of the alarm/message texts for the languages selected by the user.
The number and order of the alarm/message texts in the selected languages
must be identical to those of the master language.
After the text contents have been modified, the text files must be converted and
transferred to the HPU.
Files
Editor
More than one
language
Master language
Conversion and
transmission
8 Alarm and Messa
g
e Texts
05.99
8
03.96
8.1 Alarm and message texts
8-192 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
8.1.4 Syntax for alarm text files
The following alarm numbers are available for alarms relating to cycles, compile
cycles and the PLC:
Table 8-1 Alarm numbers for cycle, compile cycle and PLC alarms
Number range Designation Effect Clear
60000 60999 Cycle alarms
(Siemens)
Display, NC start disable Reset
61000 61999 (Siemens) Display, NC start disable,
axis/spindle standstill
Reset
62000 62999 Display Cancel
63000 64999 Reserved
65000 65999 Cycle alarms
(user)
Display, NC start disable Reset
66000 66999 (user) Display, NC start disable,
axis/spindle standstill
Reset
67000 67999 Display Cancel
68000 69000 Reserved
70000 79999 Compile cycle alarms
400000 499999 PLC alarms, general
500000 599999 PLC alarms for channel
600000 699999 PLC alarms for axis and
spindle
700000 799999 PLC alarms for user
800000 899999 PLC alarms for sequential
controllers/graphs
The number range in the list is not available with every number
(see References: /FB/ P3, PLC basic program, Lists)
The structure of the text file for cycle and compile cycle alarms is as follows:
Table 8-2 Structure of text file for cycle alarm texts
Alarm number Display Help ID Text or alarm number
60100 10No D number %1 programmed
60101 1 0 60100
... ... ... ...
65202 01Axis %2 in channel %1 is still moving
// Alarm text file for cycles in German
Alarm number list
Alarm numbers
Text file
format for
cycle alarm texts
Alarm number
8 Alarm and Messa
g
e Texts 07.98
8
03.96 8.1 Alarm and message texts
8-193
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
This number defines the alarm display type:
0: Display in alarm line
1: Display in a dialog box
MMC 101/102/103 only (with hard disk): The default 0 means: The WinHelp
file supplied by Siemens provides a detailed description of the alarm. A value
between 1 and 9 uses an assignment entry in the MBDDE.INI file to refer to a
WinHelp file created by the user. See also 8.1.5, HelpContext.
The associated text is given in inverted commas with the position parameters.
SThe characters and # must not be used in alarm texts.
The character % is reserved for displaying parameters.
SIf the user wishes to use an existing text, a reference to the appropriate
alarm text can be inserted. 5-digit alarm number instead of text.
SThe alarm text file may contain comment lines which must start with //. The
maximum length of the alarm text is 110 characters for a 2-line display. If the
text is too long, it is cut off and the symbol * added to indicate missing text.
SParameter %1: Channel number
Parameter %2: Block number
The ASCII file for PLC alarm texts is structured as follows:
Table 8-3 Structure of text file for PLC alarm texts
Alarm
no.
Display Help ID Text Text on MMC
510000 1 0 Channel %K FDDIS allChannel 1 FDDIS all
600124 10 Feed disable axis %AFeed disable axis 1
600224 1 0 600124 Feed disable axis 2
600324 1 0 600224 Feed disable axis 3
703210 11 User textUser text
...
703211 11 User text%A ...User text
Axis 1 ...
// Alarm text file for PLC alarms
References: /FB/, P3, Basic PLC Program
This number defines the alarm display type:
0: Display in the alarm line
1: Display in a dialog box
MMC 101/102/103 only (with hard disk): The default 0 means: The WinHelp
file supplied by Siemens provides a detailed description of the alarm. A value
between 1 and 9 uses an assignment entry in the MBDDE.INI file to refer to a
WinHelp file created by the user. See also 8.1.5, HelpContext.
Display
Help ID
Text or alarm number
Format of the
text file for
PLC alarm texts
Display
Help ID
8 Alarm and Messa
g
e Texts
07.98
05.97
07.98
8
03.96
8.1 Alarm and message texts
8-194 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The associated text is given in inverted commas with the position parameters.
SThe characters and # must not be used in alarm texts.
The character % is reserved for displaying parameters.
SIf the user wishes to use an existing text, a reference to the appropriate
alarm text can be inserted. 6-digit alarm number instead of text.
SThe alarm text file may contain comment lines which must start with //. The
maximum length of the alarm text is 110 characters for a 2-line display. If the
text is too long, it is cut off and the symbol * added to indicate missing text.
SParameter %K: Channel number (2nd digit of alarm number)
Parameter %A: The parameter is replaced by the signal group no. (e.g.
axis no., user area no., sequential controller no.)
Parameter %N: Signal number
Parameter %Z: Status number
Text or alarm number
8 Alarm and Messa
g
e Texts
8
03.96 8.1 Alarm and message texts
8-195
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
8.1.5 Properties of alarm list
The properties of the alarm list can be changed in the MBDDE.INI file.
Table 8-4 Sections of the MBDDE.INI file
Section Meaning
Alarms General information about the alarm list (e.g. time/data format of the
messages)
TextFiles Path/file setting of the text lists for the alarms (e.g.
MMC=..\dh\mb.dir\alm_ <signalling module in dir. mb>)
HelpContext Names and paths of the help files (e.g. File0=hlp\alarm_)
DEFAULTPRIO Priorities of the various alarm types (e.g. POWERON=100)
PROTOCOL Properties of the log (e.g. File=.\proto.txt <name and path of the
logfile>)
KEYS Information about keys with which alarms can be cleared (e.g. Can-
cel=+F10 <clears alarms with key combination Shift+F10>)
You will find further details of file entries in:
References: /BN/, Users Guide: OEM package for MMC
The settings in this section define the following properties of the alarm list:
STimeFormat
The format that is to be used for output of the date and time is entered here.
It is the same as the CTime::Format of the Microsoft Foundation Classes.
SMaxNr
Defines the maximum size of the alarm list.
SORDER
Defines the sequence in which the alarms are sorted in the alarm list:
FIRST puts more recent alarms at the head of the list,
LAST puts new alarms at the foot of the list.
Example:
[alarms]
TimeFormat=%d.%m.%y %H:%M:%S
MaxNr=50
ORDER=LAST
J
Alarms
8 Alarm and Messa
g
e Texts
07.98
8
03.96
8.1 Alarm and message texts
8-196 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
8 Alarm and Messa
g
e Texts
Notes
04.00
9
9-197
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) – 04.00 Edition
Axis and Spindle Dry Run
9.1 Preconditions
To allow an axis to be traversed from the control system, it is necessary to
supply enabling terminals on the drive and to set enabling bits on the interface.
Pulse enable
+24 V
+24 V
63
9
64
9
48
9
drive enable signal
DC link start
+24 V
Pulse enable
+24 V
669
Mains supply module
Drive module
setting-up mode
+24 V
112
9
References: /PJ/, Planning Guide for SIMODRIVE 611–A/611–D
The following signals must be made available at the PLC interface for axis or
spindle:
IS “Controller enable” (DB31–48, DBX2.1)
IS “Pulse enable” (DB31–48, DBX21.7)
IS “Position measuring system 1 or 2” (DB31–48, DBX1.5, DBX 1.6)
The following signals on the interface must not be set or else the axis/spindle
motion will be disabled:
IS “Feed/spindle override switch” (DB31–48, DBB0) not at 0%
IS “Axis/spindle disable” (DB31–48, DBX1.3)
IS “Follow-up mode” (DB31–48, DBX1.4)
IS “Distance to go/spindle reset” (DB31–48, DBX2.2)
IS “Feed stop/spindle stop” (DB31–48, DBX4.3)
IS “Traverse key disable” (DB31–48, DBX4.4)
IS “Ramp function generator disable” (DB31–48, DBX20.1)
References: /FB/, A2, “Axis/Spindle Parking, Follow-Up, Enable
Controller”
Setting of hardware limit switches and interface signal check:
SHardware limit switch PLUS DB31 – 48.DBX12.1
SHardware limit switch MINUS DB31 – 48.DBX12.0
Axis
enabling
Enables
on the drive
Enabling via PLC
interface
Limit switches
9
9
03.96
9.2 Axis test run
9-198 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
9.2 Axis test run
Select JOG mode
and enable axis
Does the
axis move?
Check enabling signals on drive
I/RF module: Terminal 63 (pulse enable)
64 (drive enable)
48 (DC link start)
FDD module: 663 (pulse enable)
Check interface signals (DB 31 48)
DBB0 Feed compensation switch
DBX1.7 Compensation active
DBX1.5/1.6 Position measuring system 1/2
DBX1.4 Follow-up mode
DBX1.3 Axis disable
DBX2.2 Delete distance to go
DBX2.1 Controller enable
DBX4.3 Feed stop/spindle stop
DBX5.05.5 JOGINC
DBX4.6/4.7 Traversing keys
DBX20.1 RFG IS (drive)
DBX21.7 Pulse enable (611D)
Check machine data
MD 3200032050 Velocities
MD 3600036620 Monitoring functions
MD 32110 Actual value sign
Service display
Traversing
direction
OK? Check MD 32100: AX_MOTION_DIR
Set path 10 mm
Is path
evaluation
OK? Check MD 31000 31080 (encoder matching)
no
yes
yes
yes
1
no
no
9 Axis and Spindle Dr
y
Run
9
03.96 9.2 Axis test run
9-199
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Traverse with feedrate
1000 mm/min
Following
error OK? Check
MD 32200 (KV factor)
MD 32410 (time constant for jerk limitation)
MD 32910 (dynamic response matching)
MD 31050/31060 (load gearing)
MD 32610 (feedforward control)
MD 1401 (maximum motor operating speed)
MD for velocity adaptation
no
yes
Traverse in
rapid mode
1
Alarm?
no
yes
Interpret alarm and check machine
data for velocity adaptation
End
9 Axis and Spindle Dr
y
Run
9
03.96
9.3 Testing the spindle
9-200 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
9.3 Testing the spindle
Check enabling signals on drive
I/RF module 63 pulse enable
64 drive enable
48 DC link start
Drive module 663 pulse enable
Check interface signals (DB31 48)
DBB0 Spindle speed override
DBX1.7 Compensation active
DBX1.5/DBX1.6 Position measuring system 1/2
DBX1.3 Axis/spindle disable
DBX2.1 Controller enable
DBX16.7 Delete S value
DBX3.6 Velocity/spindle speed limi-
tation and MD 35160
DBX4.3 Feed stop/spindle stop
DBX20.1 RFG IS
DBX2.2 Spindle reset when MD 35050=1
DBX21.7 Pulse enable
Check machine and setting data
MD 3510035150 Spindle speed limitation
MD 36200 AX_VELO_LIMIT
SD 41200 JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO
SD 43220 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26
SD 43210 SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25
Service display
Enable spindle
(controller enable NC,
enable on drive)
Does the
spindle ro-
tate?
Rota-
tional di-
rection
OK?
Change MD 32100 AX_MOTION_DIR
yes
no
no
Define speed
Specified speed 100 rpm
Actual
speed
=
setpoint
speed?
Check MD 31000 31080 (encoder matching)
no
yes
yes
1
9 Axis and Spindle Dr
y
Run
9
03.96 9.3 Testing the spindle
9-201
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Position
spindle? no
yes
End
Change over
gear stage
no
Position
reached from
high speed and
zero speed?
yes
no
Check machine data
MD 36000 Coarse exact stop
MD 36010 Fine exact stop
MD 32200 KV factor
MD 35210 Acceleration in position control range
MD 35300 Creep speed
MD 36300 Encoder limit frequency
Check encoder matching
Check spindle synchronization (MD 34200)
All gear
stages
tested?
End
yes
IS Spindle
in setpoint range
(DB3148,
DBX83.5)?
no
yes
Check machine data and interface signals
MD 3511035140 Speeds for gear stages
MD 35150 Spindle speed tolerance
IS Actual gear stage (DB3148, DBB16)
IS Select drive parameter set (DB3148, DBB21)
IS Setpoint gear stage (DB3148, DBB82)
IS Active drive parameter set (DB3148, DBB93)
All gear
stages tested?
no
yes
1
Change over
gear stage
J
9 Axis and Spindle Dr
y
Run
12.98
9
03.96
9.3 Testing the spindle
9-202 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
9 Axis and Spindle Dr
y
Run
Notes
04.00
10
10-203
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10.1 Instructions for use 10-204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.1 Requirements of system 10-205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.2 Installation 10-205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3 Starting program 10-206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.4 Terminating program 10-206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 Measuring functions 10-207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 Interface signals Traverse request drive test and
Motion enable drive test10-209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4 Aborting measuring functions 10-210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5 Frequency response measurement 10-211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.1 Measurement of torque control loop 10-211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.2 Measurement of speed control loop 10-212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.3 Measurement of position control loop 10-216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6 Graphic display 10-219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7 Gantry axes (SW 5.1 and higher) 10-221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.1 Description 10-221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.2 Supplementary conditions 10-221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher) 10-222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.1 Description 10-222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.2 Operation, basic display 10-223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.3 Parameterization 10-224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.4 Performing measurements 10-227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.5 Display function 10-228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.6 File function 10-230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.7 Print graph 10-231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.9 Analog output (DAC) 10-233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10 Automatic controller adjustment
(MMC 103 only, SW 4.3 and higher) 10-234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10.1 Flow chart for self-optimization 10-236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10.2 Input options for self-optimization 10-240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
10
03.96
10.1 Instructions for use
10-204 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.1 Instructions for use
The start-up software Start-up tool is used to configure and parameterize drive
systems on SINUMERIK 810D and 840D.
This tool can be used during initial start-up to enter the drive configuration and
assign drive parameters with standard data records as determined by the mo-
tor/power section combination. It also allows the drive and control data to be
archived on the PG or PC.
Further functions are also provided to assist optimization and diagnosis.
The measuring functions make it possible to evaluate the most important speed
and position control loop quantities as well as the torque control in the time and
frequency range on the screen without any external measuring instruments.
All important control loop signals on the position, speed and torque levels can
also be output with the DAC configuration on external equipment (e.g. oscillo-
scope, signal recorder) via test sockets on the 611D drive modules.
Apart from the usual method of optimizing the control loop machine data based
on transient response, i.e. time characteristics, a particularly powerful tool for
assessing the control loop setting is provided in the form of the integrated Four-
ier Analysis (FFT) function which can also be applied to analyze the given me-
chanical characteristics. This tool must be used if
Sunsteady current, speed or position signal curves indicate problems with
stability
Sonly long rise times can be obtained in the speed loop.
References: /FBA/, DD2, Speed Control Loop
A detailed description of the circularity test is given in:
References: /FB2/K3/ Compensations
The measurement diagrams can be archived via file functions, allowing ma-
chine settings to be documented and facilitating remote diagnostics.
Scope of
application
Measuring
functions
Analog output
FFT analysis
(Fourier analysis)
Circularity test
Saving
measurement
results
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96 10.1 Instructions for use
10-205
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.1.1 System requirements
To be able to use the start-up tool, version 3.1 and higher, the following hard-
ware conditions must be fulfilled:
SIBMr AT-compatible PG/PC with DX486 microprocessor,
e.g. SIMATIC PG 740
SAt least 4 MB of main memory (ideally 8 MB)
SFloppy disk drive (3 1/2 or 5 1/4)
SHard disk drive for managing data
SMonochrome or color monitor (VGA)
SKeyboard
SMPI interface
SMouse
SConnecting cable to link PG/PC and NCU module
Software configuration for start-up tool, software version V 3.1x and higher
SOperating system MSDOSr version 3.1 and higher
SWINDOWST operator interface, software version 3.1 and higher
10.1.2 Installation
Please observe the contents of the Read Me file supplied.
To install the software, please follow the procedure detailed below:
The memory area of the MPI card must be excluded from use by memory man-
agers (files: CONFIG.SYS, SYSTEM.INI).
Insert the first floppy disk and start the SETUP.BAT file by means of the WIN-
DOWST file manager.
Enter the interface parameter node ID and baudrate (depending on interface
used) in file S7CFGPGX.DAT in the MPI driver directory using an ASCII editor.
Input for interface: X101: 3 (1.5 Mbaud)
The installation program requests all further necessary inputs and floppy disk
changes in user dialog.
Hardware
requirements
Software
requirements
Read.me
Requirement
Execution
Operator inputs
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96
10.1 Instructions for use
10-206 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.1.3 Starting the program
To start the start-up tool on a PG/PC, go to the file manager and double-click on
the file REG_CMD.EXE or select a user-defined icon in the Application group. If
it is not possible to communicate with the NCK, then the message No commu-
nication with NCK is output. If communication is interrupted, e.g. through an
NCK reset, then the start-up tool tries to reestablish the link automatically.
10.1.4 Terminating the program
The start-up tool is deselected by the following actions:
SPress function key F10
SYou can terminate the program by activating the Exit softkey.
Calling the
program
Deselecting the
program
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96 10.2 Measuring functions
10-207
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.2 Measuring functions
A range of measuring functions allow the time and/or frequency response of
drives and closed-loop controls to be displayed in graphic form on the screen.
For this purpose, test signals with an adjustable interval are connected to the
drives.
The test setpoints are adapted to the application in question by means of mea-
surement or signal parameters, the units of which are determined by the rele-
vant measuring function or operating mode. The measurement or signal param-
eter units are subject to the following conditions:
Table 10-1 Quantity and units for measurement or signal parameters
Quantity Unit
Torque Specified in percent referred to the peak torque of the power section
used. The torque calculation for the power section is based on: MD
1108 x MD 1113
Velocity Metric system:
Specified in mm/min or rev/min for linear or rotary motions
Inch system:
Specified in inch/min or rev/min for linear or rotary motions
Distance Metric system:
Specified in mm or degrees for linear or rotary motions
Inch system:
Specified in inches or degrees for linear or rotary motions
Time Specified in ms
Frequency Specified in Hz
The default setting for all parameters is 0.
Functions which initiate a traversing motion are selected via the softkey menu;
they are all actually started by means of the NC START key on the machine
control panel. If the basic display for the function is deselected without the tra-
versing motion being initiated, then the function selection is reset.
Once the traversing function has been started, the basic display can be dese-
lected without any affect on the traversing motion.
Explanation
Measurement/
signal parameters
Additional
information
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96
10.2 Measuring functions
10-208 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
!Important
The NCK is in the Follow-up state during traversing motions with the start-up
tool.
Neither the software limit switches nor the working field limitations are moni-
tored in this state.
Prior to initiating traversing motions with the start-up tool, the start-up engineer
must position the axes such that the start-up tool traversing range limits (which
are monitored) are not exceeded. Thus collisions on the machine can be pre-
vented.
Note
The user must ensure that
Sthe EMERGENCY STOP button is within reach.
Sthere are no obstacles in the traversing path.
Traversing motions can normally be aborted with
SNCSTOP key
SRESET key
SSTOP softkey in any basic display.
or by canceling the
Scontroller enabling command
Sdrive enable signal
Straverse enabling signal
Sfeed or spindle enabling command
or with the 0% position on the feedrate override switch or 50% position on the
spindle override switch.
NCK or drive alarms (e.g. Function abort by NC) likewise cause a traversing
motion to be aborted. For further details, please refer to Section 10.4 Aborting
measuring functions or in:
References: /DA/, Diagnostics Guide
!Important
NC JOG mode must be selected when measuring functions are started, thus
ensuring that no axis or spindle can be moved by the part program.
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96 10.3 Interface signals Traverse request and Motion enable drive test
10-209
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.3 Interface signals Traverse request and Motion enable
drive test
Axes with a mechanical brake may need the brake to be activated in some
cases. For this, select the option Enable with PLC in the basic display of the
traverse function being used.
The request signal generated on selection of the measuring function Traverse
request drive test (DB31.DBX61.0) and acknowledgement signal Motion en-
able drive test (DB31.DBX1.0) can be gated accordingly in the PLC user pro-
gram.
This safety mechanism can be deselected via the Enable without PLC option.
The traversing range monitoring function can be deactivated for axes with an
endless traversing range.
Explanation
Additional
information
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
04.00
10
03.96
10.4 Aborting measuring functions
10-210 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.4 Aborting measuring functions
SEmergency stop
SNC stop
SReset (mode group, channel)
SFeed override = 0
SSpindle override = 50
SNo controller enabling command
SChange in operating mode (JOG) or operating mode JOG not selected
SActuation of traversing keys
SActuation of handwheel
SNo traversing enable signals
SAlarms leading to axis shutdown
SHardware limit switch reached
STraversing range limits exceeded
SSelection of parking (in position-controlled operation)
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96 10.5 Frequency response measurement
10-211
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.5 Frequency response measurement
10.5.1 Measurement of torque control loop
The torque control loop need only be measured for diagnostic purposes in the
event of an error or in cases where no standard data are available for the motor/
power section combination used, resulting in unsatisfactory speed controller
frequency responses.
Note
The user must take special safety precautions before measuring the torque
control loop for vertical axes that have no external weight compensation (drive
must be securely clamped).
1. Set the traversing range monitoring function and enabling logic in the basic
display.
2. Set the necessary parameters in the measuring parameter display
3. Display the results of the measurement on the screen with softkey Display
Fig. 10-1 Display diagram: Example of current control loop
Amplitude
This parameter determines the magnitude of the test signal amplitude (unit:
peak torque specified in %). Values between 1% and 5% are suitable.
Functionality
Procedure
Measurement
parameter
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96
10.5 Frequency response measurement
10-212 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Bandwidth
Analyzed frequency range
S4.0 kHz at 840D, double axis module (sampling rate 16.0 kHz).
S0.8 kHz on the 840D (sampling rate 16.0 kHz).
Averaging operations
The accuracy of the measurement, but also the measurement time, are in-
creased with this value. A value of 20 is normally suitable.
Settling time
This value represents the delay between recording of the measured data and
injection of the test setpoint and offset. A value of approximately 10 ms is rec-
ommended.
The measuring parameters and the results of the measurement (diagrams) can
be loaded and saved with softkey File functions.
10.5.2 Measurement of speed control loop
This measurement function basically analyzes the response to the motor mea-
suring system. Depending on which basic measurement setting has been se-
lected, various measurement parameters lists as described below are made
available.
The traversing range monitoring function is set and the enabling logic (external/
internal) selected in the basic display.
1. Set the traversing range monitoring function and enabling logic in the basic
display.
Four different types of measurement are available for testing the speed con-
trol loop:
SReference frequency response
SInterference frequency response
SSetpoint step change
SDisturbance step change
2. Set the necessary parameters in the measuring parameter display
3. Display the results of the measurement on the screen with softkey Display
Additional
information
Functionality
Procedure
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96 10.5 Frequency response measurement
10-213
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Fig. 10-2 Display diagram: Example of speed control loop
The frequency response measurement calculates the response of the speed
controller. The response range should be as wide as possible and without reso-
nance. It may be necessary to install stop or low-pass (611D) filters. Particular
care must be taken to prevent resonance within the speed controller limit fre-
quency range (stability limit approx. 200500Hz).
Alternatively, the interference frequency response can be recorded in order to
assess how well the control suppresses interference.
Amplitude
This parameter determines the magnitude of the test signal amplitude. This
should give rise to only a very low speed of a few (approximately 1 to 2) revs/
min at the motor end.
Offset
The measurement requires a slight speed offset of a few motor revolutions per
minute. The offset must be set to a higher value than the amplitude.
SW 4.1 and higher:
SThe Offset is run up via an acceleration ramp.
SThe acceleration value is defined for one
axis: check MD 32300: MAX_AX_ACCEL
spindle: check MD 35200: GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL
MD 35210: GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL
SThe following applies:
Acceleration value = 0, no ramp
Acceleration value > 0, ramp active
SThe actual measuring function is only activated when the offset value is
reached.
Reference
frequency
response
Interference
frequency
response
Measurement
parameters for
reference and
interference
frequency
response
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.97
10
03.96
10.5 Frequency response measurement
10-214 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Bandwidth
Analyzed frequency range
S4.0 kHz on the 840D (sampling rate 8.0 kHz).
Averaging operations
The accuracy of the measurement, but also the measurement time, are in-
creased with this value. A value of 20 is normally suitable.
Settling time
This value represents the delay between recording of the measured data and
injection of the test setpoint and offset. A value of between 0.2 s and 1 s is re-
commended.
The transient response (response to setpoint changes or disturbances) of the
speed control in the time range can be assessed with the step stimulation func-
tion. The test signal is connected to the speed controller output for recording of
the response to disturbances.
Amplitude
This parameter determines the magnitude of the specified setpoint or distur-
bance step change.
Measuring time
This parameter determines the recorded time range (maximum 2048 x speed
controller cycles).
Offset (as from SW 4.1)
You can select a small offset of a few motor rpm to preclude the influence of
static friction.
SW 4.1 and higher:
SThe Offset is run up via an acceleration ramp.
SThe acceleration value is defined for an
Axis: check MD 32300: MAX_AX_ACCEL
Spindle: check MD 35200: GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL
MD 35210: GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL
SThe following applies:
Acceleration value = 0, no ramp
Acceleration value > 0, ramp active
SThe actual measuring function is only activated when the offset value is
reached.
Settling time
This value represents the delay between measured data recording / test set-
point output and the injection of the offset.
Setpoint/
disturbance step
changes
Measurement
parameters for
setpoint/
disturbance step
changes
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.97
10
03.96 10.5 Frequency response measurement
10-215
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Speed set-
point
Amplitude
Offset
Settling time Measurement time
Time
Time
0
0
Position char-
acteristic
Fig. 10-3 Setpoint signal with Speed control loop step change response measurement
function
The measuring parameters and the results of the measurement (diagrams) can
be loaded and saved with softkey File functions.
Additional
information
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96
10.5 Frequency response measurement
10-216 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.5.3 Measurement of position control loop
This measurement function basically analyzes the response to the position
measuring system. If the function is activated for a spindle without a position
measuring system, the NCK generates an error message. Depending on which
basic measurement setting has been selected, various measurement parame-
ters lists as described below are made available.
1. Set the traversing range monitoring function and enabling logic in the basic
display.
One of three different types of measurement can be selected:
SReference frequency response
SSetpoint step change
SSetpoint ramp
2. Set the necessary parameters in the measuring parameter display
3. Display the results of the measurement on the screen with softkey Display
Fig. 10-4 Display diagram: Example of position control loop
The reference frequency response measurement determines the response of
the position controller in the frequency range (active position measuring sys-
tem). The setpoint filters, Kv value and feedforward control must be parameter-
ized such that resonance is avoided wherever possible over the entire fre-
quency range. In the case of dips in the frequency response, the setting of the
feedforward control balancing filters should be checked. Excessive resonance
requires
1. Decrease of the Kv value
2. Decrease of the feedforward control value
3. Use of setpoint filters
Functionality
Procedure
Reference
frequency
response
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96 10.5 Frequency response measurement
10-217
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The effects of these measures can also be checked in the time range.
Amplitude
This parameter determines the magnitude of the test signal amplitude. It should
be set to the smallest possible value (e.g. 0.01 mm).
Offset
The measurement requires a slight speed offset of a few motor revolutions per
minute. The offset must be set such that no speed zero crossings occur at the
set amplitude.
Bandwidth
Setting of analyzed frequency range (maximum setting = half the position con-
troller sampling frequency). The lower this value, the finer the frequency resolu-
tion and the longer the measurement time. The maximum value corresponds to
half the position controller sampling rate (e.g. 200 kHz with position controller
sampling time of 2.5 ms).
Averaging operations
The accuracy of the measurement, but also the measurement time, are in-
creased with this value. A value of 20 is normally suitable.
Settling time
This value represents the delay between recording of the measured data and
injection of the test setpoint and offset. A value of between 0.2 s and 1 s is rec-
ommended. Do not set too low a value for the settling times or the frequency
response and phase diagrams will be distorted.
The transient or positioning response of the position control in the time range,
and in particular the effect of setpoint filters, can be assessed with the step and
ramp stimulation functions. If an offset value other than zero is input, the step
change is stimulated during traversal. For the sake of clarity, the displayed posi-
tion actual value does not include this speed offset. The following quantities can
be measured:
SActual position value (active position measuring system)
SControl deviation (following error)
Amplitude
This parameter determines the magnitude of the specified setpoint step change
or ramp.
Offset
The step is stimulated from standstill or starting from the constant traverse
speed set in this parameter.
Measurement time
This parameter determines the period of time to be recorded (maximum: 2048
position controller cycles).
Settling time
This value represents the delay between measured data recording and test
setpoint output and the injection of the offset.
Ramp duration
In basic setting Setpoint ramp the position setpoint is preset according to the
set ramp duration. In this case, the acceleration limits which currently apply to
the axis or spindle are effective.
Measurement
parameters for
reference
frequency
response
Setpoint step
change and
setpoint ramp
Measurement
parameters for
setpoint step
change and
setpoint ramp
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96
10.5 Frequency response measurement
10-218 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
A jerking motion can be set with the axis-specific NC MD 32410
AX_JERK_TIME (when NC MD 32400 AX_JERK_ENABLE is set to 1).
The position setpoint and the actual value of the active measuring system are
recorded.
Speed
Amplitude
Offset
Settling time Measurement time
t
t
0
0
Position
Ramp
time
Fig. 10-5 Signal waveform with position setpoint / ramp measuring function
At maximum axis velocity, there is a (virtual) step change in the velocity (contin-
uous line).
The curves represented by the dashed line correspond to a realistic, finite
value. The offset component is excluded from the display graphic in order to
emphasize the transient processes.
In order to avoid damage to the machine, the step height for the setpoint step
change is limited to the value specified in MD 32000 MAX_AX_VELO. This can
prevent the desired step height from being achieved.
The machine data MD 32000 MAX_AX_VELO and MD 32300 MAX_AX_AC-
CEL have the same effect in the ramp area.
The MD 32000 MAX_AX_VELO limits the ramp rate of rise (velocity limitation),
whereby the drive does not reach the programmed end position (amplitude).
The acceleration limitation caused by MD 32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL rounds the
transition at the beginning and end of the ramp.
!Danger
Changes should not be made to the MD 32000 MAX_AX_VELO and MD
32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL machine data without being knowledgeable, for ex-
ample just to achieve a specific jump height. These MD have been set to ex-
actly correspond to the machine!
Step height
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96 10.6 Graphic display
10-219
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.6 Graphic display
The display is called by pressing the Display softkey in the basic display of the
measuring function.
Fig. 10-6 Display diagrams 1 and 2 of speed control loop
These softkeys are used to switch backwards and forwards between the two
single graphic displays and the screen output with both graphics.
When these softkeys are selected, a vertical or horizontal line, which marks the
abscissa or ordinate, appears in the selected diagram. The associated coordi-
nates are also output. The X marker or Y marker softkeys must be selected
again in order to deselect the marker. The markers are moved by means of the
cursor keys.
Explanation
Softkeys
display 1,
display 2
Softkeys X marker
and Y marker
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96
10.6 Graphic display
10-220 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Fig. 10-7 Display diagram: Application of X or Y marker
To adapt the time scale, press softkey Expand which marks the current X
marker position as the beginning of the range to be expanded. Then select soft-
key again to move the X marker to the end of the range to be expanded and
once again to display the marked area in full-screen size. Press softkey Ex-
pand again to return to the normal display. The Expand function is active only in
the currently selected diagram.
With softkey X Lin/Log you can switch between the linear and logarithmic ab-
scissa of the selected diagram.
The Y scale is normally processed automatically. You can also define a scale
manually with softkey Scale.
Note
The function generator and measuring functions must only be activated for the
master axis of GANTRY axes in software versions up to and including 3.1. The
slave axis traverses simultaneously because it is coupled to the actual value of
the master axis. If the zero speed monitor on the slave axis responds, the mon-
itoring window must be enlarged temporarily. The system does not reject ac-
tivation of the function generator and measuring function for the slave axis or
for the master/slave axes simultaneously, but such a measure is not recom-
mended and may lead to damage to the machine if handled incorrectly. If it is
absolutely essential to activate these functions for the slave axis in order to
measure the machine, then the slave axis must be programmed as the master,
and vice versa, temporarily.
Softkey Expand
Softkey X Lin/Log
Y scale
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
10
03.96 10.7 Gantry axes (SW 5.1 and later)
10-221
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.7 Gantry axes (SW 5.1 and later)
Axis groups were not supported by the previous Measuring function and
Function generator start-up tools. Software package 5 extends the existing
functionality of the MMC interface.
There is now an option for simple optimization by measuring the axes individu-
ally.
10.7.1 Description
The MMC interface allows the start-up engineer to measure each axis of the
gantry group separately.
The MMC configures the axes so that they execute identical movements.
The user can record the results simultaneously for up to 2 axes. This corre-
sponds to the previous measuring function for 2 independent axes.
10.7.2 Conditions
611D: only one function generator or measuring function can be activated on a
multiple module, i.e. the new functionality is only available if the gantry axes are
implemented on different modules.
References: /FB3/ G1, Gantry axes
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.98
10
03.96
10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
10-222 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
Note
The trace function can be used only with MMC 102/103 or the start-up tool.
10.8.1 Description
Servo trace function with graphic user interface for checking and monitoring
drive/servo signals and states. You can select measuring signals and set the
measuring parameters with softkeys and dropdown lists. The function is oper-
ated using the mouse or keyboard.
Individual functions of the trace function
S4 trace buffers with up to 2048 values each
SSelection of SERVO and 611D signals (in position control cycle)
STrace/trigger signals can be set with the absolute address and value mask-
ing.
SDifferent trigger conditions to start recording.
Triggering always on trace 1
SPretriggering and posttriggering possible
SMeasuring signal display
SFixed Y scaling selectable for each trace.
SMarker function selectable for each trace. Expand function in the time axis.
SSelective loading and saving of the measuring parameters and traces.
Function
overview
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.98
10
03.96 10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
10-223
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.8.2 Operation, basic display
Toggle key
The cursor is controlled us-
ing the arrow keys on the
operator panel or with the
mouse.
If the cursor is placed on a
list box, press the insert key
to open the list box.
You page in the list
using the arrow
keys.
You accept a value
using the
input key.
Fig. 10-8 Cursor control
You can access the basic display of the trace function with the softkeys
Drives/servo \ Servo trace.
Fig. 10-9 Basic display of servo trace
Basic display
Servo trace
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.98
10
03.96
10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
10-224 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.8.3 Parameterization
In the basic display you can select
SThe axis/spindle to be measured
SThe signal to be measured
SThe duration of measurement
SThe triggering time
SThe type of triggering
SThe triggering threshold
The cursor must be positioned on the Axis/spindle name list box of the trace
concerned. You can select it with the softkeys Axis+ and Axis or by accepting
a value from the dropdown list.
The cursor must be on the Signal selection list box of the trace concerned.
You can select a value by accepting it from the dropdown list.
Parameterization
in the basic
display
Signal selection
Input field
axis/spindle name
Input field
Signal selection
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.98
10
03.96 10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
10-225
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The measuring time is written directly into the Measuring duration field.
Direct input of pretriggering and posttriggering.
With negative input values (sign minus ) recording starts in advance of the
triggering event by the time set.
With positive input values (without sign) recording starts
the time set after the triggering event.
Condition: Triggering time + measuring duration 0.
The type of triggering is selected from the Trigger dropdown list.
The trigger always refers to trace 1. Once the triggering conditions are fulfilled
traces 2 to 4 are started simultaneously.
Settable triggering conditions:
SNo trigger, i.e. measurement starts when you operate the softkey Start (all
traces are started in synchronism).
SPositive edge
SNegative edge
Direct input of the triggering threshold.
The threshold is only active with the types of triggering Positive edge and
Negative edge.
The unit refers to the signal selected.
Selects the axis/spindle when the cursor is positioned on the corresponding
axis/spindle name list field.
You can also select the axis/spindle directly in the list box from the dropdown list
using the cursor.
With the Start softkey, trace function recording is started.
With the Stop or RESET softkey, you can cancel a running measurement.
Measurement
parameters
Measuring duration
field
Triggering time field
Trigger field
Threshold field
Softkeys
Axis +
Axis
Softkeys
Start
Stop
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.98
10
03.96
10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
10-226 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The output point is the basic display of the servo trace function.
SThe signal type physical address must be selected in the trace.
SThe cursor in the trace must be in the associated field of the signal selection
(to physical address).
If you press the softkey Physical address the input screen form is displayed.
Note
This function is only required in exceptional cases, for example, if the informa-
tion provided by the known signals (see Signal selection list field) is not ade-
quate. Please discuss how to proceed after that with the SIMODRIVE hotline.
Fig. 10-10 Input screen form for parameterization of the physical address
All parameters are input in hex format.
Direct input of the segment address of the signal to be recorded.
Direct input of the offset address of the signal to be recorded.
If you only want certain bits to be displayed you can select them here.
The field labeled Threshold is only used to enter the triggering threshold for
the physical address of trace 1. If you exit the input screen form with the Ok
softkey, this hex value is then entered in the field Threshold of the basic servo
trace display.
Physical address
softkey
Segment address
field
Offset address field
Mask field
Threshold field
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.98
10
03.96 10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
10-227
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.8.4 Performing measurement
After parameterization, measurement is started by operating the
softkey Start. How measuring is performed depends on the conditions defined
under measuring parameters/Trigger field.
Measurement is terminated after the time set under measuring parameters/input
field Measuring duration or is stopped when you operate the softkey Stop.
Interrupted measurement cannot be displayed (softkey display).
Start measurement
End of
measurement
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.98
10
03.96
10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
10-228 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.8.5 Display function
After measurement, you can display the result in graphical form.
By pressing horizontal softkey Display Fig. 10-11 is displayed.
The measured traces are displayed as a diagram.
Graph1 shows trace 1 and trace 2, graph2 shows trace 3 and
trace 4.
Fig. 10-11 Display of Graph1 and Graph2
The X/Y marker is switched on or off in the active graph. The corresponding
position value is displayed in the graph. You can move the markers with the
cursor keys.
Extension function for the X coordinate. The X marker must be activated.
The first time you operate the softkey Expand, a second X marker is displayed.
The first X marker remains fixed at the current position. The second marker can
be moved using the cursor keys.
If you press the softkey Expand again, the range between the markers is ex-
panded. In that way, you can expand the section.
After selection of this softkey, Fig. 10-12, Y axis scaling, appears on the screen.
You can scale the relevant traces in this display.
Softkeys
X marker
Y marker
Softkey
Expand
Softkey
Scale...
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.98
10
03.96 10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
10-229
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Fig. 10-12 Scaling of Graph1 and Graph2
On the Scaling field, you can select between automatic and manual (fixed)
scaling using the toggle key.
For every trace you can enter the scaling in the input fields Y max and Y min.
You can only select the input fields if the type of scaling is fixed.
With fixed scaling the inputs are only transferred to the graph when you exit
the display.
In the Markers field , you can assign the marker to the appropriate traces with
the toggle key.
In Graph1 you can select the marker for trace 1 or trace 2 and in Graph2 for
trace3 or trace4.
With the softkeys Graph1 or Graph2, you can display either graphs as a large
single display. You can switch back with the vertical softkeys
Graph1 + Graph2.
With the softkey Print graph you can print the displays
(Graph1/Graph2 or Single displays) on the printer selected in the printer setup.
Graph
parameterization
Scaling field
Y max
Y min
fields
Markers field
Softkeys
Graph1...
Graph2...
Softkey
Print
graph
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.98
10
03.96
10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
10-230 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.8.6 File function
With the File functions softkeys you can switch to the display File functions.
Here, you can save/load/delete the measurement settings and the measured
values of the trace function.
The file functions are not intended to be a substitute for making a copy of all
system and user data, e.g. for archiving or series start-up purposes.
Fig. 10-13 File function servo trace
In the File frame, you can select an existing file from the dropdown list or enter
one in the text field underneath.
In the Directory frame, you can select the directory under which you want to
save the file.
This can also be a directory under Services or the basic directory of data man-
agement (list entry: standard directory).
In the Data frame, you can select the data to be stored.
You can only select one data type. You select it using the cursor keys and ac-
cept it with the toggle key.
New directories are created in the Services area.
You create a new directory in Data management mode under the directory
Diagnostics.
See operating area Services.
References: /BA/, Operators Guide
Description
Assigning
file names
Selecting the
directory
Selecting the data
type
Creating
subdirectories
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.98
10
03.96 10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
10-231
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.8.7 Print graph
You can access the basic display for printer selection (Fig. 10-14) with softkeys
MMC \ Printer selection.
With the toggle key you can selection whether the graph displayed is to be sent
directly to the printer or to a bitmap file when actuating the softkey Print graph.
Fig. 10-14 Basic display of the printer selection
The printer must be set up under MSWindows.
Set Output to printer in the selection field.
In the display called Display you can press the softkey Print graph to output
the graph displayed to the connected printer.
You want to save the graph as a bitmap file (*.bmp).
In the selection field for printer setting, set Output to bitmap file.
After you have pressed the Print graph softkey in the display called Display,
the screen form for assigning a file name is displayed (Fig. 10-15). In the drop-
down list, you can enter a new file name or an existing file name for overwriting.
Printer setting
Direct output to
printer
Output to
bitmap file
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.98
10
03.96
10.8 Trace function (SW 4.2 and higher)
10-232 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Fig. 10-15 File name assignment for bitmap printing
In the File name box, you can select an existing file from the dropdown list or
enter one in the text field underneath.
In the Directory box, you can select the directory under which you want to
save the file.
This can also be a directory under Services or the basic directory of data man-
agement (list entry: standard directory).
With the softkey OK, the file is saved.
With the softkey Cancel you can return to the current graphic display.
Assigning
file names
Selecting the
directory
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.98
10
03.96 10.9 Analog output (DAC)
10-233
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.9 Analog output (DAC)
Note
A description of the DAC function is to be found in
Reference /FBA/, DD1, Diagnostic Functions
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.9808.97
10
03.96
10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher)
10-234 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and
higher)
Functions of automatic speed controller setting:
SDetermination of the gain and reset time in three different
variants.
SAutomatic determination of any current setpoint filters required (up to three
band-stop filters).
SDisplay of the measured or calculated frequency response as with the
measuring functions.
Note
If the tables natural resonance frequencies are very low (natural resonance
frequency < 20Hz), the reset time should be checked manually.
The setting may be too low.
In the Start-up user area, select the Drives/servo softkey.
In the extended menu tree, press the Auto. ctrl setting softkey. The Automatic
controller adjustment basic display appears.
Fig. 10-16 Automatic controller setting basic display
Functionality
Procedure
a) Normal case
Auto. controller
setting
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.9805.99
10
03.96 10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher)
10-235
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The entries in the Drive test travel enable and Travel range sections of the
window have the same meaning as for the measuring functions.
The type of adjustment is defined in the mode function area.
1. Select in the Mode function area the setting type
Variant 1.
2. Press the Start softkey.
3. Follow the interactive instructions
(see flow chart below, boxes shaded gray).
4. When prompted, press the OK softkey.
5. When prompted, press the NC Start key.
Caution: When you press NC Start, the axis starts to move!
To optimize further axes, select the axes with the Axis+ or Axis–” softkeys
and repeat the procedure starting at step 1.
The controller setting can be
Sparameterized,
Sstarted,
Sdisplayed and
Ssaved.
The type of adjustment is defined in the mode function area. Three different
variants are available:
SVariant 1: Standard setting
SVariant 2: Setting with critical dynamic response
SVariant 3: Setting with good damping
Axis+ softkey:
Selects the next axis to be optimized.
Axis–” softkey:
Selects the previous axis to be optimized.
Direct selection softkey:
Allows direct selection of the axis to be optimized in a dialog window.
Start softkey:
Starts the automatic controller setting for the selected axis.
Stop softkey:
Stops the automatic controller setting for the selected axis (if a measuring
function is active).
b) Special case:
Changing the
parameters
Vertical softkeys
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.9805.98
10
03.96
10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher)
10-236 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.10.1 Flow chart for self-optimization
Self-optimization can be terminated at any time by pressing the Cancel soft-
key.
1
SK Start
Load current
drive MD
and write stan-
dard values
Start mech.
measurement
part 1?
SK OK
Confirm NC Start prompt
Caution:
When you activate NC Start, the
axis starts to move!
SK ParameterEnter measur.
parameters
SK Cancel
(discard
changes)
SK OK
(accept
values)
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.9805.98
10
03.96 10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher)
10-237
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
1
2
Start mech.
measurement
part 2?
SK OK
Confirm NC Start prompt
Caution:
When you activate NC Start, the
axis starts to move!
SK ParameterEnter measur.
parameters
SK Cancel
(discard
changes)
SK OK
(accept
values)
Start mea-
surement
of current
control
loop?
SK OK
Confirm NC Start prompt
Caution:
When you activate NC Start, the
axis is operated in current control
mode!
SK ParameterEnter measur.
parameters
SK Cancel
(discard
changes)
SK OK
(accept
values)
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.9805.98
10
03.96
10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher)
10-238 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2
Start calcula-
tion
of controller
data?
SK OK
SK Parameter
gain adjustment
Enter
parameters for
determination
of optimum
gain SK OK
(accept
values)
3
SK Parameter
T; adjustment
SK Cancel
(discard
changes)
SK OK
(accept
values)
Please wait....
controller data
being calcu-
lated.
Enter
parameters for
determination
of optimum
reset time
SK Cancel
(discard
changes)
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.9805.98
10
03.96 10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher)
10-239
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
End
3
Do you want to save
boot file for drive X and
display modified
controller data?
SK Yes
SK NoBoot file is
not saved
Start mea-
surement
of speed con-
troller?
SK OK
Confirm NC Start prompt
Caution:
When you activate NC Start, the
axis starts to move!
SK ParameterEnter measur.
parameters
SK Cancel
(discard
changes)
SK OK
(accept
values)
Boot file is
saved
3
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.9805.98
10
03.96
10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher)
10-240 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10.10.2 Input options for self-optimization
Fig. 10-17 Mechanical system measurement
Amplitude:
Entered in % of maximum current of power section.
Bandwidth:
The bandwidth should only be changed if the previous optimization runs do not
produce satisfactory results (can only be changed in mechanical system part 1).
Averaging:
Should only be reduced if the traversing range of the machine is inadequate.
Offset:
Constant velocity during measurement (changing positive/negative sign for
optimum utilization of traversing range).
Fig. 10-18 Current control loop measurement
Mechanical system
measurement
Current control
loop measurement
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.9805.98
10
03.96 10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher)
10-241
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Amplitude:
Entered in % of maximum current of power section.
Bandwidth:
The bandwidth can only be changed during measurement of mechanical
system part 1.
Averaging:
Does not normally need to be changed. Influences the quality of the
measurement.
Fig. 10-19 Determination of the proportional gain
Frequency from which filtering can be performed:
A current setpoint filter is not used below this frequency.
Min. amplitude:
This quantity may not be exceeded between the minimum frequency and the
average frequency (lower adaptation limit).
Max amplitude:
This quantity may not be exceeded after the upper frequency limit has been
reached.
The three frequency entries can be used to influence the start point and the
adaptation range.
Determination of
the proportional
gain
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.9805.98
10
03.96
10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher)
10-242 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Fig. 10-20 Determination of the reset time
Frequency at which filtering can be performed:
A current setpoint filter is not used below this frequency.
Min. amplitude:
This quantity may not be exceeded between the minimum frequency and the
lower frequency limit (lower adaptation limit).
Max amplitude:
This quantity may not be exceeded at the upper frequency limit.
The two frequency entries can be used to influence the adaptation range.
Fig. 10-21 Measurement of speed control loop
Amplitude:
Entered in mm/min of the load speed (should not be more than 50% of the
offset).
Determination of
the reset time
Measurement of
speed control loop
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool 05.9805.98
10
03.96 10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher)
10-243
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Bandwidth:
Any of the available bandwidths can be selected in order to test the automatic
controller setting.
Averaging:
Influences the quality of the measurement.
Offset:
Input of load velocity in mm/min (should be greater than the amplitude by a
factor of at least 2).
J
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
05.9805.98
10
03.96
10.10 Automatic controller setting (only MMC 103, SW 4.3 and higher)
10-244 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
10 Drive Optimization with Start-Up Tool
Notes
04.00
11
11-245
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Data Backup
11.1 General information
You should save your data
Safter start-up,
Safter changing machine-specific settings,
Sduring servicing (e.g. after replacing hardware, upgrading software) so that
you can put the system back into operation as soon as possible and
Sduring start-up before altering the memory configuration to make sure that
no data are lost during start-up.
There are three types of data to be saved with the SINUMERIK 840D, i.e.
1. Saving data for NCK, drive and operator panel settings
2. Saving data for PLC
3. Saving data for MMC when MMC 101/102/103 is installed
When to save data
NCK/PLC/MMC
11
11
03.96
11.1 General information
11-246 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The following methods can be used to back up data, each serving a different
purpose.
1. Series start-up
Provision is made for the generation of series start-up files. These allow a
specific configuration to be transferred complete to other controls with the
same software version, for example, [operating on the same machine type].
This type of file cannot be modified externally using an ASCII editor. Series
start-up files contain all relevant settings (except for compensation data).
They must be created for NCK, PLC and for the MMC if an
MMC 101/102/103 is installed.
2. Series start-up with compensation data (SW 4 and higher)
3. Software upgrade (SW 4 and higher, without drive data)
4. Area-specific archiving
Up to SW 3.x
To ensure that archived data can be transferred to controls on which
future software versions are installed or to other controls in the
810D/840D series, it is advisable to archive data on an area-specific
basis, i.e. each data area is stored in a separate file which can be edited
later with an ASCII editor. Drive data should be read out as an ASCII file
using the start-up tool.
SW 4 and higher
Area-specific archiving is an exception with software versions SW 4 and
higher, because MD 11210 can be used to specify whether modified
MDs are to be saved, even for a series start-up.
Data are read out or read back in again in several steps. Compensation
data can only be saved in this way (up to SW 3.x).
PLC data and with MMC101/102/103 installed MMC data are not divided
up further.
You will require the following accessories in order to save data:
SPCIN data transmission program for PG/PC
SV24 cable 6FX20021AA010BF0
References: /Z/, Catalog NC Z (Accessories)
SPG 740 (or higher) or PC (DOS)
_N_ Area Unit _ Type
SThe data to be saved or imported (general, channel-specific or axis-specific)
are specified in the Area column.
SThe channel, axis or TOA area is specified in the Unit column. The Unit is
omitted if the whole area has been selected.
SThe data type is specified in the Type column. When data are saved, the file
names are automatically generated and output at the same time.
Series start-up/
area-specific
archiving
Required
accessories
Format of the
file name
11 Data Backup 12.97
11
03.96 11.1 General information
11-247
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Areas
NC General NC-specific data
CH Channel-specific data (unit corresponds to channel number)
AX Axis-specific data (The unit is the number of the
machine axis)
TO Tool data
COMPLETE All data of an area
INITIAL Data for all areas (_N_INITIAL_INI)
Types
TEA Machine data
SEA Setting data
OPT Option data
TOA Tool data
UFR User input frames: settable ZO, rotations, etc.
EEC Measuring system error compensation
CEC Sag/angularity compensation
QEC Quadrant error compensation
PRO Protection zone
RPA R parameters
GUD Global user data
INI General initialization program (all data of active file system)
_N_COMPLETE_TEA Archiving of all machine data
_N_AX_TEA Archiving of all axis machine data
_N_CH1_TEA Archiving of machine data for channel 1
_N_CH1_GUD Archiving of global user data for channel 1
_N_INITIAL_INI Archiving of all data of active file system
Examples
11 Data Backup
12.97
11
03.96
11.2 Data backup via MMC 100
11-248 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.2 Data backup via MMC 100
You can back up data via the V.24 interface as follows:
SSeries start-up: with an option to select the areas
NCK (complete)
PLC (complete)
MMC (with option of saving only partial areas of the MMC data)
SArea-specific archiving: Backing up and restoring individual data areas
(softkey Data In, Data Out and Data Selection)
These texts are part of the operator panel system software. They must be re-
loaded after hardware component replacement or software upgrading. The
messages must be available in the correct format for this purpose (see Sec-
tion 12.2 Upgrading MMC 100 software). The texts cannot be read back.
1. Connect the PG/PC to interface X6 on the MMC.
2. in Services operating area on the MMC.
3. Select V24 PG/PC interface (vertical softkey).
4. Select Settings and check or enter the parameter settings of the V.24 inter-
face (default setting).
Device type: RTS/CTS
Baud rate: 9600 baud
Parity: None
Data bits: 8
Stop bits: 1
Character for XON: 11H(ex)
Character for XOFF: 13H(3x)
Text end character: 1AH(ex)
Format: Tape format, deselected for series
start-up or for saving areas
of drive data.
Select tape format for saving areas of all
other data except for drive data.
Via V.24
Error, operational
message texts and
cycle alarm texts
Sequence of
operations
(data backup)
11 Data Backup
11
03.96 11.2 Data backup via MMC 100
11-249
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
MD 11210: UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY can be set to define whether all
data or only those data which deviate from the defaults are to be output via the
V.24 interface.
11210 UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY
MD number Save only modified MDs
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes effective: immediately Protection level: 2/4 Unit:
Data type: BYTE Applies from SW version: 1 or 4
Meaning:
Up to SW 3.x
Bit 0 Scope of the differential upload with TEA files
(area-specific archiving)
0: All data are output
1: Only data which deviate from the standard are output
(does not apply to INITIAL_INI)
If a value has been changed in a data which is stored as an array, then the com-
plete MD array is always output
(e.g. MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB).
SW 4 and higher
Bit 1 Scope of the differential upload with INI files
0: All data are output
1: Only data which deviate from the standard are output
(e.g. INITIAL_INI)
Bit 2 If an array element is changed
0: Complete array is output
1: Only modified elements of an array are output
Bit 3 R parameters (for INITIAL_INI only)
0: All R parameters are output
1: Only R parameters not equal to zero are output
Bit 4 Frames (for INITIAL_INI only)
0: All frames are output
1: Only frames not equal to zero are output
Bit 5 Tool data, cutting edge parameters (for INITIAL_INI only)
0: All tool data are output
1: Only tool data not equal to zero are output
Related to ....
Note
SIt may be useful to perform a data backup operation in which only altered
machine data are saved prior to upgrading software in cases where the
defaults in the new software are not the same as those in the earlier ver-
sion. This applies particularly to machine data which are assigned SIE-
MENS protection level 0.
Backing up
changed values
MD 11210
11 Data Backup
12.9712.97
11
03.96
11.2 Data backup via MMC 100
11-250 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Recommendation
MD 11210 UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY or the appropriate bits should be
set to 1. With this setting, the transferred files contain only those data which
deviate from the default. This is of advantage with respect to future software
upgrades.
Continue with Series start-up or Area-specific archiving.
5. MMC interface configuration (see above, tape format deselected)
6. Start PCIN data transmission program (Data In) on PC/PG.
7. When you select Start-up data on the MMC (MMC operating area Ser-
vices, data output Data out) after pressing the key Input areas NCK and
PLC are offered to you for selection.
8. First select NCK (NCK is offered as the name of the archive file) and then
start reading out (softkey Start). Follow exactly the same procedure for the
PLC data set.
5. MMC interface configuration (see above, select tape format for all data ex-
cept for drive data).
6. Start PCIN data transmission program (Data In) on PC/PG, specify file
name.
7. Select data area to be output on MMC (MMC Services operating area, data
output Data Out).
Series start-up
(data backup)
Area-specific
archiving
11 Data Backup 12.97
11
03.96 11.2 Data backup via MMC 100
11-251
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
8. Select softkey Data selection and the areas to be read out. The area NC
active data, for example, contains the following data:
Machine data
Setting data
Option data
Global and local user data
Tool and magazine data
Protection zones
R parameters
Zero offsets
Drive data
Compensation data
Display machine data
Workpieces, global part programs/subroutines
Standard and user cycles
Definitions and macros
When the areas are output, the internal area identifier used in each case
appears on the top line of the display.
9. Start reading out (softkey Start) and acknowledge any prompts on the oper-
ator panel.
Note
The SIMATIC HiGraph tools can be used to save PLC area data.
Note filter setting for SDBs!
References: /S7HT/ Manual, Application of Tools
These tools are useful in ensuring portability of the PLC programs.
To read in an entire configuration first perform a general reset of the control.
1. Set the protection level:
up to SW 3.x to Manufacturer (password SUNRISE)
in SW 4 and higher to User (password CUSTOMER)
2. Connect the PG/PC to interface X6 on the MMC.
3. Select the Services operating area on the MMC. Continue with steps listed
under Reading in series start-up or Reading in area-specific archive data.
Loading archiving
data
11 Data Backup
08.97
11
03.96
11.2 Data backup via MMC 100
11-252 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
4. Select the MMC interface configuration V24 PG/PC as above (tape format
deselected).
5. Start the PCIN data transmission program on the PG/PC. Select the NCK
series start-up file to be read into the control under Data Out for transmis-
sion. Select the Services area on the MMC, Data In. Start data import by
selecting the Start softkey. Acknowledge any input request displayed on the
MMC.
6. Follow the same procedure for the PLC series start-up file after executing an
NCK reset and a PLC general reset.
7. After another NCK reset, the control powers up with the imported data re-
cords.
Note
The NCK series start-up file must always be imported before the PLC series
start-up file.
4. Select the MMC interface configuration V24 PG/PC as above and set tape
format (except for drive data).
Start the PCIN data transmission program on the PG/PC. Select the ar-
chive file to be read into control under Data Out for transmission.
Select the Services area on the MMC, Data In. Start data import by
selecting the Start softkey. The file is automatically detected and loaded
accordingly.
5. Read in option data, initiate NCK reset.
6. Load the machine data file and actuate NCK reset. If you then receive
messages about a reconfiguration of the memory or restandardization of
machine data, then you must read in the machine data file again and reset
the control. Generally speaking, this process must be carried out two to
three times.
7. If global user data must be activated, then the N_INITIAL_INI file
(Table 11-1) must be read out. It is read out through selection of the setting
All data as for area-specific archiving.
8. Read in archive file for global user data.
9. Read the save N_INITIAL_INI file back in to activate the global user data.
10. Then load the other areas.
11. The PLC area must be loaded last after a PLC general reset.
Series start-up
Area-specific
archiving
11 Data Backup
11
03.96 11.2 Data backup via MMC 100
11-253
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
SWhen you are loading drive data, deselect the tape format as well as all
special functions on the right-hand side of the screen for interface settings.
Do not actuate the Back up boot file softkey in the drive data menu until
you have reset the control once after loading the drive archive data.
SCheck/correct the interface settings after display of a message regarding
memory reconfiguration.
If data transmission is aborted with an error message, check the following:
SIs the password at the correct protection level?
SAre the interface parameters (V24 PG/PC) correct?
SHas MD 32700, ENC_COMP_ENABLE been set to 0 before importing LEC
data?
SIs MD11220 INI_FILE_MODE set to 1 or 2 (see Section 11.4.3)?
Table 11-1 Data in _N_INITIAL_INI file
File _N_INITIAL_INI Data not contained in file _N_INITIAL_INI
SOption data
SMachine data
SSetting data
STool offsets
SZero offsets
SGlobal user data
SLocal user data
SR parameters
SDrive machine data
SDisplay machine data
SWorkpieces
SGlobal part programs
SGlobal subroutines
SUser cycles
SStandard cycles
SDefinitions and macros
SCompensation data
Leadscrew error
compensation
Quadrant error compensation
Sag compensation
Transmission error
11 Data Backup
11
03.96
11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
11-254 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
To archive or read in data via the V.24 interface proceed in exactly the same
way as described in section 11.2:
SSeries start-up: with an option to select the areas
NCK (complete)
PLC (complete)
MMC (with option of saving only partial areas of the MMC data)
SArea-specific archiving: Backing up and restoring individual data areas
(softkey Data In, Data Out and Data Selection)
Note
In SW 4.3 and higher, the maximum baud rate is 115200 baud.
You can redirect backup data to archive files on the MMC101/102/103 hard
disk.
If a diskette drive is connected to the MMC, it is possible to save or reimport
data using diskettes.
You can also back up data on the NC card, see Operators Guide, Services op-
erating area.
Data are saved via the Services operating area.
References: /BA/, Operators Guide
Via V.24
Via MMC hard disk
Via diskette
Via NC card (SW
5.2 and higher)
11 Data Backup 04.00
11
03.96 11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
11-255
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.3.1 Data backup via V.24 on the MMC 102/103
SPG740, PC
SV.24 cable
SPCIN (V4.2)
MMC102/103
Hard disk
MPI
PG740
FDD MSD
Battery-
backed
RAM
V24
CCU1/CCU2
Diskette
Fig. 11-1 System overview
Drive data NC data PLC data MMC data
The data are normally stored in the battery-backed RAM of the NC or PLC or on
the MMC 102/103. You can store all data in specific directories on the hard disk
of the MMC 102/103.
Only the archive format is permitted for certain data during data output via the
V.24 interface. This applies to: data with the ARC extension and data for the
boot files of the FDD and MSD.
If remote diagnostics is to be activated, a different V.24 interface must be se-
lected for the data output.
Hardware and
software
requirements
System overview
Data in the system
Where are the data
stored?
Settings of the
V.24 interface
11 Data Backup
12.97
11
03.96
11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
11-256 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The Services area provides you with an overview of all programs and data
stored on the NC, PLC, drive and hard disk. In order to view all of the directo-
ries, you must first call up the Select file display and then set the display as
required. Only then are the required data displayed.
Fig. 11-2 Basic display of the Services user area
The operating sequence for data output via the V.24 interface applies to all data.
Proceed as follows:
1. Position the cursor on the desired data
2. Press SK Data out
3. Press SK V24 or PG
4. Press SK OK
5. Read the log (only if errors occur)
It is not practical to back up all directories for a data backup via V.24. You
should only output data required for a new start-up. The streamer should be
used to create a complete copy of all data.
Select the Services
area
Example for
Services basic
display
Output data
What do I back
up?
11 Data Backup
11
03.96 11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
11-257
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.3.2 Output of drive data via V.24 on MMC102/103
The following types of drive data are used:
SBoot files (HSA.BOT)
SBoot files (VSA.BOT)
SDrive machine data (*.TEA)
data Directory Name Meaning
Boot file Diagnosis\FDD data VS1.BOT Boot file for 1st axis
Boot file Diagnosis\MSD data HS1.BOT Boot file for 1st spindle
Drive MD FDD DIAGNOSIS\MachDat/FDD *.TEA Drive machine data file for FDD saved
under IBN/MD/Filefunction. A name
must be allocated.
Drive MD MSD DIAGNOSIS\MachDat/MSD *.TEA Drive machine data file for MSD
saved under IBN/MD/Filefunction.
A name must be allocated.
The boot files are stored in the FDD data and MSD data directories.
VS2.BOT
VS1.BOT
FDD data
MSD data (HS1.BOT)
Note
The boot files can only be output as binary files with V.24 setting archive for-
mat. The boot files must have been saved before output (save boot files soft-
key). The boot file data backup (in binary format) can only be loaded back onto
the same software version.
The drive machine data must be saved initially in the Start-up\Machine data\File
function area before they can be output via V.24.
DIAGNOSIS
MachDat/FDD
MachDat/MSD
Drive data
Where are the boot
files stored?
Drive MD
11 Data Backup
11
03.96
11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
11-258 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.3.3 Output of drive data via V.24 on the MMC102/103
NC data are all data stored in the SRAM of the NC (excluding the part program
and cycles).
The following data are stored in the NC active data area:
SNC machine data (MD11210 UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY =1)
SOption data
SSetting data
STool/machine data
SZO
SR parameters
SGlobal user data
SProtection zones
SCompensation data
Measuring system error compensation (LEC=EEC)
Sag/angularity compensation (CEC)
Quadrant error compensation (QEC)
Fig. 11-3 NC active data
NC data
11 Data Backup
11
03.96 11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
11-259
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The file header starts with %_N and ends with _INI. If you output the com-
plete global user data, the file header is as follows:
%_N_COMPLETE_GUD_INI.
In the NC active data display, the middle part of the file header is displayed
according to the current cursor position. See on the right, next to program/
data.
Output of measuring system error compensation data. There are two ways to
output the EEC compensation data to V.24:
1. Output complete EEC data (all axes).
2. Axis-specific output of EEC data.
Measuring system error compensation
Measuring system error compensation, axis 1
Measuring system error compensation, axis 2
Measuring system error compensation, axis 3
Measuring system error compensation, axis 4
:
:
Measuring system error compensation, complete
To output all the data, position the cursor on Measuring system error com-
pensation, complete, otherwise position the cursor on the desired axis.
The file header is then as follows:
Measuring system error compensation, complete: %_N_AX_EEC_INI
Measuring system error compensation, axis 1: %_N_AX1_EEC_INI
Output of global user data (GUD). The file header transmitted with the data out-
put is listed here once.
Format of the
file header
Example 1
Example 2
11 Data Backup
11
03.96
11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
11-260 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
NC active data
Global user data (%_N_COMPLETE_GUD_INI)
Channel user data (%_N_CH_GUD_INI)
User data, channel 1 (%_N_CH1_GUD_INI)
User data 1, channel 1 (%_N_CH1_GD1_GUD_INI)
:
:
Channel user data, complete (%_N_CH_GUD_INI)
User data 2, channel 1 (%_N_CH1_GD2_GUD_INI)
User data, complete, channel 1 (%_N_CH1_GUD_INI)
User data, complete (%_N_COMPLETE_GUD_INI)
NC user data (%_N_NC_GUD_INI)
NC user data 1, channel 1 (%_N_NC_GD1_GUD_INI)
:
:
NC user data, complete (%_N_NC_GUD_INI)
NC user data 2, channel 1 (%_N_NC_GD2_GUD_INI)
NC user data 9, channel 1 (%_N_NC_GD9_GUD_INI)
User data 9, channel 1 (%_N_CH1_GD9_GUD_INI)
The middle part of the file header, which is transmitted with the file output, ap-
pears at the top of the display in the program/data area: \__NC_ACT\GUD.DIR
Fig. 11-4 Example for global user data
11 Data Backup
11
03.96 11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
11-261
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Position the cursor on the initialization program (INI) directory. Press the V24
softkey. The initialization program %_N_INITIAL_INI is output with the follow-
ing data:
SGlobal user data
SOption data
SProtection zones
SR parameters
SSetting data
SMachine data
STool/magazine data
SZero offsets
None
Compensation data (EEC, QEC, CEC)
Part programs
Definition data and macros
Part programs, workpieces, cycles
PLC programs and data
Display machine data, drive machine data
If you position the cursor on NC active data and initiate the data output via
V.24, an initialization program %_N_INITIAL_INI is also output, but with all data
stored in the NC active data directory. That is including compensation data.
Output of
initialization
program (INI)
11 Data Backup
11
03.96
11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
11-262 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.3.4 PLC data output via V.24 on MMC102/103
The PLC data must be saved in an archive file before this file can be output via
V.24.
1. Press the Series start-up softkey
2. Select only PLC
3. Press the Archive softkey
4. The display changes and the task log appears. The file PLC.ARC is
created.
5. When the task finished message appears, press Data out.
6. In the directory, select Archive\PLC.ARC and press Interface.
7. V.24 setting with archive format: Set binary format (PC format), close with
ok.
8. Press V24 softkey and confirm with OK softkey; the PLC data are output.
11.3.5 Output of MMC data via V.24 on MMC102/103
On the MMC, the display machine data (MD 9000, ...) must be saved via the file
functions (start-up). These machine data are stored in RAM with the
MMC102/103. The data are stored in the directory Diagnosis\MachDat/Opera-
torPanel. The file name specified when the data were saved appears in the
directory.
To output the display machine data, position the cursor on the desired file and
press the V24 softkey, followed by OK. The display machine data can be output
in punched-tape format.
The definitions directory contains the definitions for the macros and global user
data. These include:
SSMAC.DEF (%_N_SMAC_DEF)
SMMAC.DEF (%_N_MMAC_DEF)
SUMAC.DEF (%_N_UMAC_DEF)
SSDUD.DEF (%_N_SGUD_DEF)
SMGUD.DEF (%_N_MGUD_DEF)
SUGUD.DEF (%_N_UGUD_DEF)
The definitions can be output via V.24.
PLC data
Procedure
Display MD
Definitions
11 Data Backup
11
03.96 11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
11-263
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Example for GUD data:
Define OTTO as String
Define HANS as bool
Define NAME as char
During start-up, the definitions must be read in before the INITIAL_IN file. Only
when the definitions are known in the NC can the actual user data be read in.
The data for tool management on the MMC 102/103 are stored in the tool man-
agement directory. There are three subdirectories:
SMagazine configuration (BEISPIEL_DOKU.INI)
STool management configuration (TT110.WMF,....)
STool data (WZACCESS.MDB,....)
The PARAMTM.INI file for the layout of displays and for access levels is stored
in the Diagnosis\MMCInitialization\... directory.
11.3.6 Output of the series start-up file via V.24 on MMC102/103
The data selection for series start-up must be defined before the series start-up
file can be created. Press the Series start-up softkey and define the data
(MMC, NC, PLC) you want to save.
Tool management
data
Preparations for
series start-up
11 Data Backup
11
03.96
11.3 Data backup via MMC 102/103
11-264 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Press the vertical softkey MMC data selection. In this display, you define which
directories are to be included in the series start-up file.
. When you have selected the data, press the OK softkey. The display changes
and you can now press the Archive softkey to create the archive file
MMCNCPLC.ARC. When the task finished message appears, the file
MMCNCPLC.ARC in the archive directory can be output via V.24. The V.24
output should be set to PC format.
You can also create separate series start-up files for the MMC, PLC and NC
areas and output them separately. In this case, the file name is:
MMC: MMC.ARC
NC: NC.ARC
PLC: PLC.ARC
Note
The EEC, QEC and CEC compensation data are not included in the series
start-up file. Reason: Each machine has its own compensation data.
Set the data
selection
Create the
archive file
11 Data Backup
11
03.96 11.4 Back up hard disk via Norton GhostR (SW 4.4 and higher)
11-265
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.4 Back up hard disk via Norton GhostR (SW 4.4 and
higher)
11.4.1 Back up hard disk / Import data backup
SSimple backup and restoration of MMC102/103 hard disks on site.
System software, add-on software and user-specific data blocks are backed
up completely.
SA hard disk image (saved in a file) can be backed up on a data medium
(e.g. CD) for long-term storage and safekeeping.
SMaster images (images for series start-up) can be loaded by the machine
manufacturer.
SMachine manufacturers can perform upgrades/downgrades (master images)
themselves, irrespective of software supplied by Siemens.
SThe Norton GhostR backup program is installed on every MMC102/103 with
SW 4.4 and higher.
The Norton GhostR software allows the complete contents of an MMC102/103
hard disk to be saved as a disk image. This image can be safely stored on
various types of data medium for the purpose of restoring the hard disk at a
later time. The Norton GhostR program is supplied as standard with every
MMC102/103 module.
For further information, visit the Internet site at www.ghost.com.
The procedure for saving a complete MMC 102/103 hard disk for the purpose of
having all user and system data continually available during servicing is de-
scribed below:
a) Backing up the hard disk
b) Backing up the user data
c) Restoring a backup of the hard disk
for running the Norton GhostR program
You need a keyboard with a PS/2 connector
in order to access and modify the BIOS (a PG keyboard is also suitable).
MMC BIOS versions up to 2.14 are accessed by
pressing CTRLALTESC; BIOS versions 3.04 and higher
by pressing DEL during MMC power-up.
You can undo BIOS settings by loading the
BIOS Setup Defaults.
With the MMC 102 you must change the BIOS setting to
Virus Warning: Disabled
for a hard disk restore; the setting does not need to be changed for a backup.
Functions
Norton GhostR
MMC 102/103
Operating tips
MMC BIOS
MMC 102
11 Data Backup
04.00
11
03.96
11.4 Back up hard disk via Norton GhostR (SW 4.4 and higher)
11-266 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The MMC 103 with BIOS Version 2.12 should be operated with the
parallel port setting 378H IRQ7 Bidirectional (BIOS setup).
Sufficient storage capacity must be available on the PC/PG hard disk for the
backup image file.
Rule of thumb: approx. 70% of the used MMC hard disk capacity.
When the programming device is supplied, the parallel port is set
in the bios to output only. Please change to EPP.
Plug the parallel cable into the lower connector (LPT1) on the left side
of the PG 740. This can be confused with the COM/V.24/PLC
port.
If the backup/restore is to be performed from a boot diskette,
the boot sequence of the MMC 102/103 must be changed in the BIOS from C,A
to A,C.
On PG/PC
SPC/PG with bidirectional interface, EPP setting
for PG 740 internal LPT1: <address>
SSiemens LapLink parallel cable (order no. 6FX20021AA021AD0)
or standard LapLink cable.
SDiskette drive if backup/restore with Ghost is to be performed by an
MMC102/103 with a software version lower than V4.4.
SFor MMC102/103, set parallel interface to EPP (BIOS),
this increases the transmission rate of the parallel interface
by approx. 10%.
Directly connected to the MMC102/103
parallel interface, e.g. ZIP, JAZ, CDROM
or network path: The user must enter the necessary device driver in autoex-
ec.bat and/or config.sys on the boot diskette.
!Important
1. Drivers for the above I/O devices are not supported by Siemens.
2. When entering paths or file names in connection with the NortonGhost soft-
ware, please comply with the DOS 8 character convention (length of file
names: Max. 8 characters).
MMC 103
Storage capacity
requirements on
PC/PG
PG 740 etc.
Booting from diskette
Backup/restore via
parallel cable
Backup/restore with
external drive
11 Data Backup 12.98
11
03.96 11.4 Back up hard disk via Norton GhostR (SW 4.4 and higher)
11-267
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
1. A backup/restore at file level is performed on the MMC in the Services area,
e.g. by selective backup of start-up or machine data, etc. (via diskette, V.24,
PC card).
2. Individual software components are installed/re-installed either via diskette
or parallel interface (Interlnk/ InterSrv).
Problems associated with the BIOS update must be considered.
3. With MMC102/3 running BIOS Version 2.12 the error Expection error (13)
can occur after a successful restore.
Remedy: Switch the MMC102/103 off and on again.
4. For a backup/restore via parallel port or network the power saving feature of
the PC/PG must be deactivated.
5. After completing the backup/restore with Ghost, the parallel cable should be
removed again, in order to prevent unexpected MMC operating states.
6. If the external PC is equipped with an AMD K6 processor, problems can
arise with the parallel connection at processor clock speeds > 233 MHz. In
this case, operate both computers (MMC and PC) with LPT BIOS setting
ECP.
7. CDROM drive access problems can occur occasionally with certain pro-
gramming devices. This can lead to a shut-down of the Ghost connection
during the direct restore of an image file from CDROM.
Remedy: Copy the image file from the CD onto the hard disk of the program-
ming device.
SStorage of complete hard disks in an image file
SRestoration of hard disks from an image file
SCompression of image files
SIntegrated link via LPT master/slave interface, e.g. from
MMC 103 with PG (without Interlnk/ Intersrv)
SSupport for different operating systems of the MMC102/103 with SW 3.x and
SW 4.x:
Windows 3. x
Windows 95
SSupport of long file names
SDisk integrity and image file integrity check
SReloading of image files to unformatted hard disk (formats on the fly)
SNew destination hard disk can be larger or smaller (provided it is sufficient
for data quantity) than the original
Supplementary
conditions
Functions of
Norton GhostR
11 Data Backup
12.98
11
03.96
11.4 Back up hard disk via Norton GhostR (SW 4.4 and higher)
11-268 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SWhen hard disks with several partitions are copied, the partition sizes can
be altered
SCommand interface for integration in batch files
SMenu interface for interactive operator inputs.
11.4.2 Saving user data
In the Services operating area of the MMC you can use the series start-up
function to save PLC, NC and MMC data.
References:
/BA/ Operators Guide, Chapter 7, section on start-up functions.
Requirement: Set the password
1. Select the Services operating area
2. Press the Series start-up softkey
3. Press the Select MMC data softkey
4. Select the data to be archived
5. Select Archive (hard disk) as the destination device; the series start-up
archive is created.
11.4.3 Back up hard disk
Requirement:
SThe directory exists on the PG/PC on which the image file is to be stored.
SSufficient storage capacity is available on the PG/PC (see the paragraph
entitled Operating conditions) below.
SOne of the operating systems MSDOS 6.X, Windows 3.x or Windows 95 is
installed on the programming device/PC.
SThe Ghost program is installed on the MMC 103 and on the programming
device/PC.
SThe MMC102/103 and programming device/PC are linked via the parallel
cable (6FX2002 1AA02 1AD0).
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
MMC 102/103
LPT1:
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
PG/PC
LPT:
CD
(X8)
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
CD writer
1. Switch the control off and on and select start-up mode (press key 6 when
DOS window appears)
11 Data Backup 12.98
11
03.96 11.4 Back up hard disk via Norton GhostR (SW 4.4 and higher)
11-269
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2. Select menu 7: Backup/Restore
3. Enter password
4. Select menu 1 Hard disk Backup/restore with ghost
5. < only if default not suitable >
set parameters for Norton Ghost program:
< 1 > configure ghost parameters:
If you want to change the default directory path or the type of interface,
select menu 1:
* Set Connection Mode :
<1> PARALLEL (default)
<2> LOCAL
choose the desired setting and confirm.
* Change path:
<3> Change backup image filename (set up directory
for backup file on programming device
e.g. C:\SINUBACK\MMC103\)
<4> Change restore image filename (set up complete path name
for restore file MMC.GHO on MMC,
e.g. D:\SINUBACK\MMC103\MMC.GHO)
choose the appropriate setting, enter the path and confirm.
Enter Yes in response to Save GHOST parameters? query save
GHOST parameters? answer Yes.
<5> Back to previous menu
Return to main menu
6. Saving a hard disk
< 2 > Harddisk backup to <pathname>, mode PARALLEL
* When you select this menu, a message window appears:
You are prompted to check whether the connection
between MMC and PG/PC has been established.
The destination path for the MMC image directory is displayed.
This is the image directory to be backed up.
* PG/PC:
In a DOS window or at DOS level, start
the Ghost program with
the command ghost -lps.
11 Data Backup
12.98
11
03.96
11.4 Back up hard disk via Norton GhostR (SW 4.4 and higher)
11-270 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
* MMC:
Start the backup by acknowledging with Y in the message
window.
* MMC:
The message window of Norton Ghost appears:
The progress of the data transfer is displayed
The paths are displayed
The volume of data to be transferred is displayed
* Cancel the data transfer
PG/PC: Press Control + C keys
After acknowledging the prompt
you are returned to the main menu of Norton Ghost
and Ghost is terminated.
7. MMC
After cancelation of a backup/restore, the following prompt appears:
Do you want to try to backup again [Y,N] ?
Enter N, the main menu then appears.
If Y, continue with 6.
< 4 > Back to previous menu
Return to main menu
8. PG/PC: Write disk image file to CD
9. PG/PC: Store CD in the vicinity of the machine
Time required: approx. 1520 minutes
for the generation of a compressed disk image =130 MB of a
540 MB hard disk via LPT.
11.4.4 Restore data to hard disk
SThe Ghost program is installed on the MMC 103 and the programming de-
vice.
SThe MMC103 is connected to the PC/PG via a parallel cable
SOne of the operating systems Windows 3.x or Windows 95 and a CDROM
drive are installed on the programming device.
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
MMC 102/103
LPT1:
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
PG/PC
LPT:
CD
(X8)
1. Switch on the PG, insert CD in drive.
2. Switch the control off and on and select start-up mode (press key 6 when
DOS window appears)
3. Select menu 7: Backup/Restore
4. Enter password
5. Select menu 1 Hard disk Backup/restore with ghost
11 Data Backup 12.98
11
03.96 11.4 Back up hard disk via Norton GhostR (SW 4.4 and higher)
11-271
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
6. Set parameters for the Norton Ghost program:
<1> configure ghost parameters:
see above
7. Restore the contents of the hard disk
<3> Harddisk Restore from <pathname>, mode PARALLEL
* When you select this menu, a message window appears:
You are prompted to check whether the connection
between MMC and PG/PC has been established.
The name of the image file from which data
are to be restored is displayed.
The image file must exist on the programming device/PC.
* PG/PC:
In a DOS window or at DOS level, enter
the command ghost -lps to start the
Norton Ghost program.
* MMC: Y
Start the restore by acknowledging the message window.
* MMC:
The message window of Norton Ghost appears:
The progress of the data transfer is displayed
The paths are displayed
The volume of data to be transferred is displayed
* Cancel the data transfer
PC: Press Control + C keys
The MMC boots. A boot diskette is required
for the MMC power-up.
<4>Back to previous menu
Return to main menu
8. After a successful restore, a reboot is performed automatically.
Time required: approx. 1520 minutes
for the generation of a compressed disk image =130 MB of a
540 MB hard disk via LPT.
Note
The backup of user data, machine data and start-up files is an integral function
of the MMC in the Services area.
The File Manager indicates where data to be backed up are located and in
what format, as well as what media can be used to save and re-import them.
11 Data Backup
12.98
11
03.96
11.5 Several SW versions on one MMC 103 (SW 5.2 and higher)
11-272 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.5 Several SW versions on one MMC 103 (SW 5.2 and
higher)
With software version 5.2 and higher, several images of software versions are
supplied on the hard disk with the current software version.
In addition to the current version, the following versions are also supplied:
SSINUMERIK 840D, SW 3.7
SSINUMERIK 840D, SW 4.4
SSINUMERIK FMNC, SW 4.4
SSINUMERIK 840D, SW 5.2
If you wish to load a software version, proceed as described under subheading
Re-import SW version.
If you wish to create an image of a software version, proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the control and select start-up mode (press key 6 when DOS win-
dow appears),
2. Select menu 7: Backup/Restore
3. Enter password
4. Select menu 4 Partitions Backup/Restore
5. Alter the maximum number of available images if necessary:
Menu 1: Configure Ghost Parameter
By selecting menu option 1: Change Maximum Backup Images, you can
define your own maximum number of images, a total of 7 can be set. Default
setting: 1.
6. To back up the current software version, select menu
option 2: Partitions Backup and enter a descriptive text with which the
image will be offered in future for Restore operations.
7. The backup software version will be stored in directory D:\Images and in-
cluded in the list when you select menu option 3: Partitions Restore.
If you wish to use the image of a software version, proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the control and select start-up mode (press key 6 when DOS/Win-
dows screen appears),
2. Select menu 7: Backup/Restore
3. Enter password
4. Select menu 4 Partitions Backup/Restore
5. To re-import the image, select menu
option 3: Partitions Restore
6. Select the software version of your choice from the displayed list.
7. After a successful restore, a reboot is performed automatically.
Back up SW
version
Re-import SW
version
11 Data Backup 04.00
11
03.96 11.5 Several SW versions on one MMC 103 (SW 5.2 and higher)
11-273
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
If you wish to delete the image of a software version from the Images directory,
proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the control and select start-up mode (press key 6 when DOS/Win-
dows screen appears),
2. Select menu 7: Backup/Restore
3. Enter password
4. Select menu 4 Partitions Backup/Restore
5. In order to delete the image of a software version, select menu
option 4: Delete Image
6. Select the software version of your choice from the displayed list.
7. The deleted software version is removed from the Images directory and
therefore no longer listed when you select menu option 3: Partitions Re-
store.
Two versions of the Norton Ghost software are available on the control in V 5.2
and higher:
SNorton Ghost Version 5.1b (standard)
SNorton Ghost Version 6.01
The data format has been changed in Norton Ghost version 5.1c and later
which means that earlier Norton Ghost versions, i.e. < V 5.1c, cannot read the
new data format.
If the current version 6.01 is needed (because, for example, a later version is
installed on the PG/PC), it can be activated via the Service menu:
1. Switch on the control and select start-up mode (press key 6 when DOS/Win-
dows screen appears),
2. Select menu 7: Backup/Restore
3. Enter password
4. Select option Switch to other version of GHOST. The active version of Nor-
ton Ghost is displayed at the top of the screen.
When the software is transferred via the parallel interface LPT, it is not possible
to mix the Norton Ghost software with old (< V 5.1c) and new (>V 5.1 b) ver-
sions. It must be ensured that a compatible data format is transferred via this
interface:
SNorton Ghost V5 up to and including V5.1b or
SNorton Ghost V5.1c up to and including V6.x
Delete a SW
version from the
Images directory
SW Norton Ghost
Transfer via
parallel interface
LPT
11 Data Backup
04.00
11
03.96
11.6 Installing a replacement hard disk (SW 4.4 and higher)
11-274 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.6 Installing a replacement hard disk (SW 4.4 and higher)
The following section describes how to restore a data backup of a complete
MMC 103 hard disk for the purpose of having all user and system data continu-
ally available during servicing.
The Norton GhostR software allows the complete contents of an MMC102/103
hard disk to be saved as a disk image file. This disk image file can be stored
on various types of data medium for the purpose of restoring the hard disk at a
later time.
The Norton GhostR program is supplied as standard with every MMC103
module and the replacement hard disk.
For further information, please visit the Internet site at www.ghost.com or refer
to the previous section.
Note Recommendation:
We recommend you archive the hard disk image backup and the Norton
Ghost program on CD.
Requirements:
SThe Ghost program is installed on the programming device.
SA new replacement hard disk is installed.
SThe MMC103 is connected to the PC/PG via a parallel cable
SOne of the operating systems Windows 3.x or Windows 95 and a CDROM
drive are installed on the programming device.
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
MMC 102/103
LPT1:
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
PG/PC
LPT:
CD
(X8)
1. Install the new replacement hard disk in the MMC 103 or install a new MMC
(see enclosed instructions)
Slot the hard disk into the bracket
Connect the cable between the hard disk and the MMC
Fix the hard disk in place with the 4 knurled screws
Release the transport safeguard: turn towards operating until it clicks
into place.
MMC 103
Norton GhostR
Restoring a
backup
11 Data Backup 12.98
11
03.96 11.6 Installing a replacement hard disk (SW 4.4 and higher)
11-275
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Note
The replacement hard disk contains neither a Windows operating system nor
the MMC system software.
2. Switch on the PG, insert CD in drive.
3. Switch the control off and on and select start-up mode (press key 6 when
DOS window appears)
4. Select menu 4 Backup/Restore
5. Enter password
6. Select menu 1 Hard disk Backup/restore with ghost
7. Set parameters for the Norton Ghost program:
<1> configure ghost parameters:
see above
<3> Harddisk Restore from <pathname>, mode PARALLEL
* When you select this menu, a message window appears:
You are prompted to check whether the connection
between MMC and PG/PC has been established.
The name of the image file of the MMC
are to be restored is displayed.
* PG/PC:
In a DOS window or at DOS level, enter
the command ghost -lps to start the
Norton Ghost program.
* MMC: Y
Start the restore by acknowledging the message window (Yes).
* MMC:
The message window of Norton Ghost appears:
The progress of the data transfer is displayed
The paths are displayed
The volume of data to be transferred is displayed
Note
If the transfer is interrupted during the restore process, the system on the hard
disk is incomplete. An MMC boot diskette with the MSDOS 6.X boot and
Norton Ghost is therefore required.
<4>Back to previous menu
Return to main menu
8. After a successful restore, the MMC is booted automatically.
Time required: approx. 1520 minutes
for the generation of a compressed disk image =130 MB of a
540 MB hard disk via LPT.
11 Data Backup
12.98
11
03.96
11.7 Data backup with VALITEK streamer on the MMC101/102/103 (SW 5.3 and lower)
11-276 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.7 Data backup with VALITEK streamer on the
MMC101/102/103 (SW 5.3 and lower)
With the VALITEK streamer you can:
SBack up all the data on hard disk C (back up all)
SBack up the user data (archive format) in directory C:\DH\ARC.DIR (backup
user data)
SRestore the data backup (restore from tape)
The VALITEK streamer is connected to parallel interface X8 (25-pin) on MMC
101/102/103. Siemens cable 6FC9 3444xV must be used to make the link.
You cannot connect any other type of data backup device because the software
is adapted especially to the VALITEK streamer.
During MMC power-up (after control has been switched on)
while the message Starting MS DOS is displayed:
1. Press key 6 on the operator panel keyboard just once and briefly.
The following menu is displayed:
PLEASE SELECT:
1 Install/Update MMC System
2 MMC Configuration Tool
3 DOS Shell
4 Start Windows (Service Mode)
5 MMC System Check
6 Reboot System (Warmboot)
7 Backup / Restore
8 Start PC Link
9 End (Load MMC)
Your Choice [1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]?
2. Press key 7
The system requests you to enter a password with:
passwd:
3. Enter a password for levels 0 2.
System
Manufacturer
Service
The following menu is displayed:
What can you back
up?
Streamer
connection
Operator action
11 Data Backup 12.98
11
03.9611.7 Data backup with VALITEK streamer on the MMC101/102/103 (SW 5.3 and lower)
11-277
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
PLEASE SELECT:
1 Select VALITEK Streamer Type
2 Test Connection to Streamer
3 Backup System
4 Backup User Data
5 Restore from Tape
6 Uninstall MMC102/103 (Delete Files)
7 Return to Main Menu
Your Choice [1,2,3,4,5,6,7]?
4. Press key 1
The following menu is displayed:
*** No Streamer configured ***
Please select (new) Streamer type:
1 Valitek PST160
2 Valitek PST2M1200
3 Return to previous Menu
Your Choice [1,2,3]?
5. Select a streamer type, e.g. no. 2 Valitek PST2M1200. The streamer type is
selected and you are taken back to the selection menu.
PLEASE SELECT:
1 Select VALITEK Streamer Type
2 Test Connection to Streamer
3 Backup System
4 Backup User Data
5 Restore from Tape
6 Uninstall MMC102/103 (Delete Files)
7 Return to Main Menu
Your Choice [1,2,3,4,5,6,7]?
6. If the streamer is connected you can check the connection. To do this select
menu item 2
A message about the streamer type is displayed:
*** Current Configuration: Valitek PST2M1200 ***
Press any key to continue ...
The test run then starts.
11 Data Backup
11
03.96
11.7 Data backup with VALITEK streamer on the MMC101/102/103 (SW 5.3 and lower)
11-278 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Valitek PST2 System Verify Connection
Activity Repetitions Connection
Reading Status 500 0
Sending Test Data Blocks 500 0
Receiving Test Data Blocks 500 0
Selected Port : lpt1 Rom Version 85 Revision B <esc>Abort
Test complete. The connection is functional. Press a key ...
7. You can now, for example, perform a full data backup. To do this, select
menu item 3, Backup System means hard disk C.
PLEASE SELECT:
1 Select VALITEK Streamer Type
2 Test Connection to Streamer
3 Backup System
4 Backup Userdata
5 Restore from Tape
6 Uninstall MMC102/103 (Delete Files)
7 Return to Main Menu
Your Choice [1,2,3,4,5,6,7]?
The following message appears on the screen:
*** Current Configuration: Valitek PST2M1200 ***
Backing up Partition C: ....
Continue ?
Your Choice: [Y,N]?Y
Select Y to start data backup.
8. With key 4, Backup User Data, you can select data backup of user data, i.e.
the batch file C:\TOOLS\BACK_USR.BAT is executed. All the archive files
under C:\DH\ARC.DIR are backed up by default. If you want to back up any
other files, enter the relevant directories in the file
C:\TOOLS\ BACK_USR.BAT.
PLEASE SELECT:
1 Select VALITEK Streamer Type
2 Test Connection to Streamer
3 Backup System
4 Backup Userdata
5 Restore from Tape
6 Uninstall MMC102/103 (Delete Files)
7 Return to Main Menu
Your Choice [1,2,3,4,5,6,7]?4
11 Data Backup
11
03.9611.7 Data backup with VALITEK streamer on the MMC101/102/103 (SW 5.3 and lower)
11-279
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The file must only be changed at the marked points. File BACK_USR.BAT looks
like this:
~~C:\
REM Save Archives in DH:\ARC.DIR
>> c:\dh\arc.dir\
*.*
REM Save this file
>> c:\tools\
back_usr.bat
[ ...You can enter the directories to be backed up here...e.g. >> c:\dh\mb\
*. *]
REM The following line must be the last !
$$
The following message appears on the screen:
*** Current Configuration: Valitek PST2M1200 ***
Backing up User Data ....
Continue ?
Your Choice: [Y,N]?Y
Select Y to start data backup.
9. Choose key 5 to restore the data backup.
PLEASE SELECT:
1 Select VALITEK Streamer Type
2 Test Connection to Streamer
3 Backup System
4 Backup Userdata
5 Restore from Tape
6 Uninstall MMC102/103 (Delete Files)
7 Return to Main Menu
Your Choice [1,2,3,4,5,6,7]?5
The following message appears on the screen:
*** Current Configuration: Valitek PST2M1200 ***
Restoring from Tape ....
Continue ?
Your Choice: [Y,N]?Y
BACK_USR.BAT
11 Data Backup
11
03.96
11.7 Data backup with VALITEK streamer on the MMC101/102/103 (SW 5.3 and lower)
11-280 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Select Y to start the restore procedure of the inserted data backup.
10. With key 6 you can delete the MMC102/103 system including the data
backup.
PLEASE SELECT:
1 Select VALITEK Streamer Type
2 Test Connection to Streamer
3 Backup System
4 Backup Userdata
5 Restore from Tape
6 Uninstall MMC102/103 (Delete Files)
7 Return to Main Menu
Your Choice [1,2,3,4,5,6,7]?6
Do You REALLY want to delete Your MMC102/103 System ?
Your Choice: [Y,N]?Y
Selecting Y deletes all the data in directory C:\MMC2\*.* and C:\DH\*.*. Operat-
ing system MS DOS and WINDOWS are not deleted.
11 Data Backup
11
03.96 11.8 Line checksums and MD numbers in MD files (software version 3.2 and higher)
11-281
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.8 Line checksums and MD numbers in MD files (software
version 3.2 and higher)
A check facility has been created through the introduction of line checksums to
backup files for machine data (INI and TEA files).
The purpose of introducing machine data numbers (MD numbers) in the backup
files is to facilitate the communication of machine data values for servicing pur-
poses and automatic processing of MD backup files in some cases.
By saving the files themselves, it is possible to dispense with the Manufacturer
write authorization when these backed-up files are read in again.
The following two subsections describe line checksums and machine data num-
bers in detail.
11.8.1 Line checksums (MD 11230 MD_FILE_STYLE)
A line checksum
SA line checksum is only generated for lines with machine data assignments.
SThe line checksum is positioned immediately after the machine data assign-
ment preceded by a blank space and apostrophe.
SThe checksum consists of 4 HEX characters
SThe line checksum is only ever generated by the control on creation of an
MD backup file and not by external editors on PC or PG.
SIs activated via MD 11230 MD_FILE_STYLE.
SA line checksum can be output together with machine data numbers.
S; <Comment> can be added later to lines with checksums without affecting
the sum check.
If
MD11230
=
Output Example:
0MD name $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[0]=1
1MD name with line
checksum
$MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[0]=1 2F34
2MD name and MD
number
N20070$MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[0]=1
3MD name, MD num-
ber and line check-
sum
N20070$MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[0]=1 2F34
Properties of the
line checksums
MD 11230
MD_FILE_STYLE
11 Data Backup08.99
11
03.96
11.8 Line checksums and MD numbers in MD files (software version 3.2 and higher)
11-282 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
No write authorization is required to read in machine data files with valid line
checksums.
To load
Smachine data without line checksum,
Smodified MD values with deleted line checksum and
SMD files from SW version 1 or 2,
it is necessary to have the Manufacturer write authorization.
When loading machine data files, the user can select how the system should
respond to errors in the machine data file. See Aborting of MD import 11.8.3.
If the file contains incorrect values, then the current values are never overwrit-
ten.
11.8.2 Machine data numbers
SMachine data numbers are positioned as block numbers (e.g. N20070) in
front of an MD assignment line.
SThere is a blank between the machine data number and MD assignment.
SThe MD number refers to the machine data in total. Any existing field values
are not represented in the MD number.
SIt is possible to select/deselect the generation of MD numbers in front of MD
assignment lines in INI and TEA files.
MD 11230 MD_FILE_STYLE Bit 1 = 1 generate MD number
MD 11230 MD_FILE_STYLE Bit 1 = 0 do not generate MD number.
When machine data files are read back in, the control evaluates the MD num-
bers as follows:
SIf errors are detected in the MD files when they are read in, the MD number
is displayed as the block number with the corresponding alarm.
11.8.3 Aborting MD import
If, during the import of machine data files (INI files) to controls with machine data
are read in
Swhich contain errors
Swhich do not match the checksum,
then alarms are generated and the import process aborted in some cases. You
can use MD 11220 INI_FILE_MODE to select the control behavior as follows:
Evaluation of line
checksums
Archive files
Evaluation of MD
numbers
Control reactions
11 Data Backup
11
03.96 11.8 Line checksums and MD numbers in MD files (software version 3.2 and higher)
11-283
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
MD 11220 value Reaction to errors
0Output of an alarm, abort on detection of 1st error (as for
SW version 1 and 2).
1Output of an alarm, continuation of file import, alarm out-
puts number of errors at file end.
2Import process continues to end of file even if errors are
detected. Alarm outputs number of errors at file end.
In all cases where at least one error is detected in the MD file, the name of the
affected file is output by means of alarm 15180.
Other reactions:
SMD containing errors do not overwrite current MD.
SThe current MD are not overwritten when an attempt is made to load MD
with no line checksums without adequate write authorization.
SCHANDATA instructions for nonexistent channels (MD for multiple channel
configuration are not set) cause import process to be aborted.
SInvalid file end causes import process to be aborted.
Das MD 11220 INI_FILE_MODE must be reset explicitly. An earlier setting is not
accepted in the course of series start-up.
SImport machine data and output alarms generated on import.
S% character stands for file name and number of errors.
SMD 11220 = 1, i.e. output of an alarm for every error, continuation of proc-
essing, alarm outputs of errors at end of file.
MD file Alarms
CHANDATA(1)
$MC_AXCONF_GEOX_NAME_TAB[0]=X
$MC_AXCONF_GEOX_NAME_TAB[1]=Y
15180 Program % cannot be processed as INI file
$MC_AXCONF_GEOX_NAME_TAB[99]=A17020 Illegal array index 1
$MC_MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM=1000 17090 Value greater than upper limit
$MC_AXCONF_GEOX_NAME_TAB=X12400 Element does not exist
$MC_MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM[1]=100 12400 Element does not exist
$MN_UNKNOWN_MD=1 12550 Name % not defined
M17
15185 % Error detected in INI file
MD 11220
INI_FILE_MODE
Example:
11 Data Backup
11
03.96
11.10 Saving PLC data
11-284 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
11.9 Machine/Setting data
The machine/setting data are listed in
References: /LIS/ Lists
11.10 Saving PLC data
The consistency of the PLC data backup can only be guaranteed if the proce-
dure below is followed:
1. Switch PLC to PLCSTOP (PLC switch S4 to position 2)
2. Transfer the PLC data from the programmer to the control
3. Archive the PLC data
4. Switch the PLC to PLCRUN (PLC switch S4 to position 0)
This sequence of operations produces an original image of the project in the
data backup.
As an alternative to the above, the PLC can be switched from PLCRUN to
PLCSTOP:
1. Switch PLC to PLCSTOP (PLC switch S4 to position 2)
2. Archive the PLC data
3. Switch the PLC to PLCRUN (PLC switch S4 to position 0)
This sequence of operations produces an instantaneous image of the PLC
CPU contents in the data backup.
Note
If the PLC data backup is performed during cyclic operation of the PLC (PLC
RUN), the data modules are not backed up at the same time. This may result in
a data inconsistency which causes the user program to stop the PLC.
J
Original image of
project
Instantaneous
image of PLCCPU
11 Data Backup 08.99
12
12-285
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Software and Hardware Replacement
12.1 Software update
Note
Sequence for updating software during start-up or software replacement:
1. Upgrade MMC software
2. Upgrade NCK software
Please note instructions and advice given in readme file supplied with tool box.
12
12
03.96
12.2 Upgrading the MMC 100/100.2/101 software
12-286 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
12.2 Upgrading the MMC 100/100.2/101 software
The MMC100/101 software is supplied on 2 (3.5) floppy disks. They consist of:
1. System disk(s) (also called installation disk).
Boot software
System software
User software
2. Application disk(s)
Alarm text files
Configuration files for MMC 100/100.2/101 MDs
Configuration file for several operator panels
User software
When you have loaded floppy disk set 1, you have a functionally standard
MMC 100/100.2/101 system with the first language English and the second lan-
guage German. The alarm text and message files contain only Siemens texts.
The contents of floppy disk set 2 enable you to do the following:
Adapt and expand alarm text files
Select one or two languages other than those already loaded from floppy
disk set 1 (a maximum of 2 languages are loaded on the MMC100 at any
given time).
Make special MMC 100/100.2/101 MD settings
Adapt configuration parameters for several operator panels/NCUs.
Transfer user-defined screen forms for PLC status to
MMC100/100.2/101
Instructions on how to handle the two diskettes are given below. You will find
rules for adapting files before transfer to MMC 100 in Chapter 11 Data Backup.
For further information see
/IAM/ IM1, Start-Up Functions for MMC 100.2
Medium supplied
Floppy disk set 1
Floppy disk set 2
12 Software and Hardware Replacement 04.00
12
03.96 12.3 Upgrade of MMC 102/103 software version 4.x or earlier
12-287
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
12.3 Upgrade of MMC 102/103 software version 4.x or earlier
This Section describes how to upgrade the software
Son an MMC 102/103 with Windows 3.11 to SW 2.4 or 3.x or
Son an MMC 103 with Windows 95 to SW 4.x.
A software upgrade on an MMC 103 with <SW 4.x to Windows 95 must be per-
formed by a service engineer (see READ ME for upgrade instructions).
An MMC 102 cannot be upgraded to SW 4.
Two areas are set up in the control:
SMMC 102/103
standard mode which powers up without operator input.
SWindows
The Windows area (with activation of earlier versions of INI files) is intended
for the service engineer who can also use the full Windows functionality to
start up the control.
In both areas, you can
SInstall add-on software (e.g. additional languages)
Schange INI files/hardware configuration (e.g. install drivers)
Supgrade with a network card and/or a mouse
Each of these must be installed in the MMC2 and/or Windows area if you wish
to have the functionality in one or both areas.
As from SW Version 3.1 there are different menus that you can activate on sys-
tem start-up for installing software and backing up on streamer.
While the MMC 101/102/103 is powering up and the message Starting MS
DOS (SW 3.x and earlier) or Starting Windows 95 is displayed, press key 6.
For further information see
/IAM/ IM3, Start-Up Functions for MMC 103
Principle of
operation
Menu overview
12 Software and Hardware Replacement
04.00
12
03.96
12.4 Upgrading the NC
12-288 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
12.4 Upgrading the NC
12.4.1 Standard upgrade
The PCMCIA cards used for the NCU and MMC have the same external ap-
pearance and are therefore occasionally difficult to distinguish. We will distin-
guish between them below by referring to the PCMCIA card
Sfor the NCU as NC card and
Sfor the MMC as PC card.
Every SW package is supplied with a read me file in the tool box. This file de-
scribes how to upgrade the control software with the new version.
SSave all control and user data before you commence with updating (see
Section 11 Data backup).
SSwitch off the control.
SInsert the NC card with the new firmware into the PCMCIA slot.
Proceed as follows:
1. Set switch S3 to 1.
2. Switch on power.
3. During power-up, the firmware is transferred from the NC card to the device.
4. Wait until the digit 6 appears on the display (this can take up to 2 minutes).
5. Set switch S3 to 0.
6. Perform a PLC general reset: Switch S4 to 2, then to position 3. Within
3 seconds, turn the switch to positions (2”–“3”–“2). When the PS and PF
LEDs light up, switch S4 to 0 (see Section 5.2).
7. Then proceed as described in Section 11.2 (series start-up), to restore the
back-up data. Please note any manufacturer instructions regarding the new
software version.
Note
If the display does not get as far as 6 the possible causes of the error are:
Software and hardware mismatch (e.g. PC card NC with software for
NCU 572.2 is plugged into an NCU 573.2)
Defective NC card or hardware
PCMCIA card
name convention
12 Software and Hardware Replacement 12.98
12
03.96 12.4 Upgrading the NC
12-289
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
12.4.2 Series start-up via NC card (SW 4.4 and higher)
The free memory on the NC card (PCMCIA card) can be used to store a
start-up archive. The archive can be loaded onto the NC card with SINUCOPY
FFS (on an external PG/PC).
Possible applications:
1. After replacing an NC module (or after the loss of data), the user can restore
the original state of the machine with the archive stored on the NC card, or
2. The machine manufacturer can supply cycles and data in an archive on the
NC card with the machine or a software upgrade.
A) Create a start-up file on the NC card
Requirement:
The SINUCOPY_FFS software is loaded
1. Copy the series start-up data of the NC/PLC via V.24 onto a PG/PC
2. Store the series start-up data as file ORIGINAL.ARC on the PG/PC
(e.g. in \tmp)
3. Call up SINUCOPYFFS on the PG/PC
4. Insert the NC card in the PCMCIA slot
5. Copy the NC software to the PC card
6. Select Area setting in NC card menu.
Enter 0 under FFS Startadr and FFS Endadr.
7. Select field Create new FFS, and then the Calculate automatically field.
8. Format FFS on NC card.
9. Select field Create DIR in the FFS menu and set up and open directory
_N_ARC_DIR
10. Call command Save FFS from hard disk to card [Archives/Part Programs]
in the FFS menu. The data are loaded onto the NC card.
Note
The start-up file created can be stored directly on the NC card in SW version
5.2 and later.
Operating
sequence
12 Software and Hardware Replacement
04.00
12
03.96
12.4 Upgrading the NC
12-290 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
B) Load the start-up file from the NC card
Requirement:
The start-up archive with the name _N_ORIGINAL_ARC is stored on the
NC card (in the directory _N_NC_CARD_DIR\_N_ARC_DIR).
1. Insert the NC card in the NCU module
Start-up switch = 1 (NCK general reset)
Press NCK Reset and wait until a 6 appears on the 7-segment display
Start-up switch = 0 (NCK general reset executed)
When the 6 appears, the start-up switch can be set to basic setting 0.
2. Set the password
3. In the Services basic display, press the Etc key and then press the original
status softkey.
This softkey is available only if the NC card contains the above-mentioned
start-up archive and access level 3 (user) is set on the control system.
4. When you press this softkey, the log window appears with the prompt:
Series start-up archive: Perform series start-up?; when you confirm, the
data are loaded.
Note
If no PLC program is active, the loading of the data takes longer (since the sys-
tem has to wait for the PLC timeout).
!Caution
All user-specific NC data (and PLC data if these are contained in the start-up
archive) are deleted and replaced by corresponding data from the start-up ar-
chive.
12 Software and Hardware Replacement 12.98
12
03.96 12.4 Upgrading the NC
12-291
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
12.4.3 SINUCOPYFFS (SW 4.4 and higher)
The SINUCOPYFFS program can be used to read or write either the SINUM-
ERIK system software (NC) or a flash file system (FFS) from or to NC cards of
the NCU installed on a PC with an active PCMCIA slot.
A flash file system is similar to a DOS data storage medium, such as a floppy
disk. The system must be formatted before data can be stored. Directory struc-
tures can then be created and files stored in any format.
The data storage medium is an electrically erasable EPROM. That means that
the corresponding area always has to be deleted before data are written. Algo-
rithms adapted in accordance with the block identification are required in order
to delete and write data. You can determine the speed of data write transfers to
a large extent.
An FFS system can usually be read directly by DOS/WINDOWS. Since the
NC system software, which is not saved in FFS format, is also stored on the
card, this is only possible with SINUCOPYFFS.
SThe following PCMCIA card drivers/hardware are supported:
CSM OMNI97 (external PCMCIA device operated on the parallel inter-
face of the PC)
PG740 /PG720C (with CSM driver CISIOS)
Laptops with PCMCIA slots (with Intel driver ICARDRV3 only for cards
up to 4 MB)
CSM PCJB slots (only for cards up to 4 MB)
SThe program will run under Windows 95. If CSM OMNI97 is used, it will also
run under Windows NT.
SINUCOPYFFS can manipulate the FFS area of the NC card using the follow-
ing functions, independent of the SINUMERIK system software (NC):
SRead
SModify
SWrite new data
SReformat
SCreate new directories
SCopy a file into the directories and subdirectories
SRead and write system software
FFS:
flash file system
Software/hardware
requirements
Functions
12 Software and Hardware Replacement
12.98
12
03.96
12.4 Upgrading the NC
12-292 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Expert mode
An FFS image is generated in the PC memory in expert mode. It can be written
onto the inserted NC card or saved as a file.
Normal mode
In normal mode, every action (read/write/delete) is performed directly on the
NC card.
Independent of the FFS, the NC system can be:
SRewritten (condition: the storage capacity above the FFS start address is
not used by the NC system).
SDuplicated
SRead out and saved as a file
SNC cards can be duplicated completely (NC + FFS).
The NC system version of the inserted card can be displayed.
The memory capacity of the inserted NC card is automatically detected and
displayed. The same applies to the limit memory addresses for the FFS.
The functions of the program can be called up from the menu bar or by activat-
ing buttons in the user interface. Help is available for all actions by activating the
Help menu.
Fig. 12-1 User interface of SINUCOPY-FFS
Operation
12 Software and Hardware Replacement 12.98
12
03.96 12.4 Upgrading the NC
12-293
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SDisplay card contents:
Click the NC card display with the left mouse button (menu: NC card /ver-
sion display of the NC system)
SView card info with card and FFS data
Click a free location (not a button, not a display, e.g. top right) with the right
mouse button (same effect as menu NC Card/ID Info menu).
SThe arrows are used in the same way as menu commands:
Read/write NC system. Below that, read/write FFS system.
Copy files from the hard disk to the FFS system.
Copy files from the FFS system to the hard disk.
Load or save finished FFS systems in RAM image.
SList boxes (Explorer)
The list boxes show the available FFS directories on the left, and the con-
tents of the selected directory on the right. Double-click the directory names
to select the directories. Use the Back arrow to move back one level. A file
must be selected in the right list field before activating the Modify file or
Delete file key.
SInfo field bottom left
After you format the FFS system, the bottom left info field indicates the
formatted memory, and the free capacity as a % number and a byte count.
Note
Please note that the details in the info field are gross figures. Approximately 8%
should be subtracted for management overhead.
SFFS system detection
If the program is started when a card is inserted, the program detects
whether an FFS system is supported. If no reference data are available for
the FFS start and end address on the card, the system suggests these be
entered automatically as far as possible.
Note
A card change is detected automatically. The contents of the card (FFS) are
displayed.
12 Software and Hardware Replacement
12.98
12
03.96
12.4 Upgrading the NC
12-294 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
1. Start sinucopy-ffs.exe file
2. Enter password
3. Dialog: Specify a temporary directory for extracting the files
4. Dialog: Specify the hardware configuration
5. Dialog: Select the components to be installed
6. Dialog: Specify the directory for the installation
7. The software is installed
8. Message: driver installed
9. Dialog: Select program folder name
10. Dialog: Please read the READ ME file
11. Dialog: Restart now or later
12. After a restart, the SINUCOPYFFS function can be used
This tool is intended for experts.
SRead archive files
SDelete/insert files
SModify files (if editable)
This tool is intended for experts.
SRead and write data to NC cards
SDuplicate NC cards
Note
1. Programming device with SINUCOPY (previous version)
The installation may be unsuccessful if the driver cisio-s is entered in the
config.sys file and it is detected during power-up: Error message. Rem-
edy:
Delete the line Device ...cisio.exe, cisio.ini.
In the cisio.ini file, enter a free interrupt number as a hex number in the
line IRQ=....
You can determine a free interrupt number from the menu Properties
for system”– Device manager.
2. If an NC card with FFS is duplicated with the previous version SINUCOPY,
only the NC system (not the FFS part) is duplicated.
3. The drive name for the OMNI97 device can be entered: Enter the drive let-
ter in the menu System control/Device manager/Drives/OMNI97.
Windows NT: Enter the drive letter in the menu OmniControl/DriveLetter.
Installation
Tool: ARCEDIT
Tool: SICARD
12 Software and Hardware Replacement 12.98
12
03.96 12.4 Upgrading the NC
12-295
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
The SINUCOPY program can be used to:
SRead, write or duplicate the SINUMERIK system software (NC) on NC cards
of the NCU installed on a PC with an active PCMCIA slot. The version identi-
fiers of the programs can be displayed (corresponding to the version display
of the SINUMERIK control).
SRead and write the SINUMERIK system software (MMC) on PC cards of the
MMC 100.2.
The functions of the program can be called up from the menu bar or by activat-
ing buttons in the user interface. Help is available for all actions by activating the
Help menu.
Note
NC data can be written to the NC card (SW 5.1 and later); Operator inputs see:
/BA/ 840D Operators Guide, Services operating area.
Tool: SINUCOPY
Operation
12 Software and Hardware Replacement
12.98
12
03.96
12.6 Battery/fan replacement
12-296 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
12.5 Hardware replacement
You can replace all components that are ordered via an MLFB (machine-read-
able product designation) order number.
Save the data before removing any hardware components.
Note
The CCU module can be withdrawn from the NCU box without data being lost
since the data are stored for approx. 15 min. via a backup battery.
References: /HPU/ Manual Configuring 840D
/PJ1/ Configuring 611A/611D
/BH/ Operator Components Manual 840D
12.6 Battery/fan replacement
!Caution
You should never attempt to revitalize dead batteries through heat or any other
treatment. The batteries must not be charged because this could cause them to
leak or explode.
Failure to observe this warning could lead to physical injury or property dam-
age.
There are battery-backed SRAMs and timers on the NCU box and MMC102/103.
The NCU buffer voltage is monitored by the control system. Once the monitoring
function has responded, the battery must be replaced within 6 weeks. The battery
in the NCU box can be changed after the control has been switched off since the
data are backed up for a period of 15 minutes.
The battery has a minimum lifetime of 3 years.
The battery/fan drawer is located under the DC link bars (see Fig. 12-2).
1. There is a latch (3) on the bottom of the drawer (see Fig. 12-2). Press the
latch (3) up and pull the drawer out towards you at the same time.
2. Remove the battery connector by pressing the retaining jacks slightly out-
wards.
3. Pull the battery out upwards.
The new battery is inserted in the reverse order.
Make sure that you connect the battery terminals correctly (2).
Lifetime
Replacement of
battery/fan on
NCCPU
12 Software and Hardware Replacement
12
03.96 12.6 Battery/fan replacement
12-297
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
2
3
4 1
1) Battery
2) Red cable (+)
3) Latch
4) Fan
+
Fig. 12-2 Battery/fan drawer
6FC5 2470AA180AA0
J
Battery
12 Software and Hardware Replacement
12
03.96
12.6 Battery/fan replacement
12-298 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
12 Software and Hardware Replacement
Notes
04.00
13
13-299
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
MMC
The contents of this section are provided in
/IAM/ Start-Up Guide MMC, IM1 or IM3
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AE200BP1.
The Start-Up Guide is divided into 5 volumes:
IM1 Start-up functions for the MMC 100.2
IM3 Start-up functions for the MMC 103
HE1 Help in the editor
BE1 User interface add-ons
IM4 Start-up of HMI advanced
J
SW 5.2 (08.99) and
higher
13
13
03.96
13-300 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
13 MMC
Notes
04.00
14
14-301
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Miscellaneous
14.1 Tool box software package
14.1.1 Content of tool box
Supplied on 3.5 diskettes with
SBasic PLC program
SNC variable selector
SStandard machine data blocks
SRead me file about the current 840D software version
You will need the following software for the data transfer:
SPCIN software program
SSIMATIC STEP7 HiGraph for PLC programs
Programming device and cable
SProgramming device, e.g. PG740 or a PC
SCable for V.24 PG/PC NC: 6FX2 0021AA010BF0
SCable for MPI bus: 6ES7 9010BF000AA0
14.1.2 Application of the tool box
Various sets of standard machine data are provided as examples.
STurning technology (2 axes, 1 spindle)
SMilling technology (3 linear axes, 1 spindle, 1 rotary axis)
Content
Software
requirements
Hardware
requirements
Standard MD sets
14
14
03.96
14.2 Machine data access via part program
14-302 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Use the data records as a configuration example. You can alter the data records
to match your application using the DOS editor.
See Section 6.6.
You require the NC variable selector in order to read and write the NCK vari-
ables.
References: /FB/, P3, Basic PLC Program
/LIS/ Lists, Variables section
14.2 Machine data access via part program
The machine data identifiers are displayed on the MMC. The internal designa-
tion of the data requires further identifiers which must be specified when a ma-
chine data is altered via programming measures or imported via the serial inter-
face.
$MM_ Operator panel data
$MN_/$SN_ General machine data/setting data
$MC_/$SC_ Channel-specific machine data/setting data
$MA_/$SA_ Axis-specific machine data/setting data
$MD_ Drive machine data
Identifier meanings: $ System variable
M Machine data
S Setting data
M, N, C, A, D Subarea (second letter)
Axis data are addressed via the axis name. The internal axis designation (AX1,
AX2 ... AX5) or the designation specified via MD 10000:
AX_CONF_NAME_TAB can be used as the axis name,
E.g.: $MA_JOG_VELO[Y1]=2000
The JOG speed of axis Y1 is 2000 mm/min.
If a machine data contains a STRING (e.g. X1) or a hexadecimal value
(e.g. H41), then the string or hex value must be inserted in inverted commas
(e.g. X1 or H41).
E.g.: $MN_DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE[0]=H14
FDD module 9/18 A to drive slot 1 on the drive bus.
To address the various contents of a machine data, identifying data must be
specified in square brackets.
E.g.: $MA_FIX_POINT_POS[0,X1]=500.000
axis X1 is 500
The 1st fixed point position of the
(0=1st, 1=2nd, 2=3rd, etc).
$MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC[2]=H41
Output time for auxiliary functions in 3rd auxiliary function group.
$MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[0]=X1
The name of the 1st machine axis is X1.
$MA_REF_SET_POS[0,X1]=100.00000
The 1st reference point value of axis X1 is 100 mm.
Application
PLC basic
program
NC variable
selector
Data identifiers
Data areas
Examples
14 Miscellaneous
14
03.96 14.2 Machine data access via part program
14-303
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Assignment of channel-specific machine data:
CHANDATA(1) Assignment channel 1
$MC_CHAN_NAME=CHAN1Channel name for channel 1
$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[1]=YName of the 2nd geometry
axis in channel 1 is Y
...
R10 = 33.75 R10 from channel 1
...
CHANDATA(2) Assignment channel 2
$MC_CHAN_NAME=CHAN2Channel name for channel 2
...
R10 = 96.88 R10 from channel 2
...
J
14 Miscellaneous
14
03.96
14.2 Machine data access via part program
14-304 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
14 Miscellaneous
Notes
04.00
A
A-305
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Abbreviations
American standard code for information interchange
Asynchronous subprogram (or subroutine)
Operating mode
Mode group
Binary coded decimals
Boot files for SIMODRIVE 611D
Basic program
Compiler cycles
Compact control unit
Communication
Central processing unit
Cutter radius compensation
Clear to send for serial interfaces
Digital analog converter
Data module
Data block byte
Data block bit
Data communication equipment
Dual port RAM
ASCII
ASUB
BA
BAG
BCD
BOOTFILE
BP
CC
CCU
COM
CPU
CRC
CTS
DAC
DB
DBB
DBX
DCE
DPR
A
A
03.96
A-306 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Dynamic random access memory
Differential resolver function (handwheel)
Dry run feedrate
Data send ready: message from serial data interfaces
Data terminal equipment
Data word
Single I/O module (PLC I/O module)
Fixed-program program memory
ETC key > extension of softkey bar in the same menu
Function call on the PLC
Feed drive
Flash EPROM: Readable and writable memory
First in first out: Memory that operates without addresses where the data
are always read out in the same order in which they were stored.
Fine interpolator
Feed Stop (= feed hold)
Geometry
Signal ground
Software procedure for mapping a large quantity of identifiers onto a finite
memory area
Hexadecimal number
Hand-held unit
Hardware limit switch
Increment
Initializing data
Internal multiplication
DRAM
DRF
DRY
DSR
DTE
DW
EFP
EPROM
ETC
FC
FDD
FEPROM
FIFO
FIPO
FST
GEO
GND
HASH
HEX
HHU
HW limit switch
INC
INI
INTM
08.97
A Abbreviations
A
03.96
A-307
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Interface signal
Special punchtape code, number of punched holes per character always even
Jogging: Setting-up mode
Channel 1
Communications bus
Transmission ratio
Servo gain factor
Leadscrew error compensation
Light emitting diode
Low priority frequency channel
Least significant bit
Machine control panel
Machine data
Manual data automatic
Human Machine Communication: User interface on SINUMERIK for operator
control, programming and simulation.
Main program file: NC part program (main program)
Multipoint interface
Main spindle drive
Numerical control
Numerical control kernel with block preparation, travel range etc.
Numerical control unit: NC module
Low-priority frequency channel
Organization block on PLC
Operator panel interface
IS
ISO code
JOG
K1
K-BUS
Kü
KV
LEC
LED
LPFC
LSB
MCP
MD
MDA
MMC
MPF
MPI
MSD
NC
NCK
NCU
NPFK
OB
OPI
08.97 A Abbreviations
04.00
A
03.96
A-308 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Peripheral bus
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
Programming device
Programmable logic controller
Position measuring system 1
Position measuring system 2
Program test
Random access memory in which data can be read and written
Rapid override
R parameter active: Identifier for R parameters
Request to send (control signal on serial data interfaces)
Single block
Setting data
Setting data active: Identifier for setting data
Softkey
Skip block
Synchronous linear motor
Subprogram file: Subroutine
Static RAM (non-volatile)
Software limit switch
Tool
Tool change
Testing data active: Identifier for machine data
Tool offset
P BUS
PCMCIA
PG
PLC
PMS1
PMS2
PRT
RAM
ROV
RPA
RTS
SBL
SD
SEA
SK
SKP
SLM
SPF
SRAM
SW limit switch
T
TC
TEA
TO
08.97
A Abbreviations
A
03.96
A-309
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Tool offset active
Tool radius compensation
RS-232-C, defines transmission of serial data between DTE and DCE devices
Interface between PLC and NC
Zero offset
Zero offset active: Identifier (file type) for zero offset data
Microcontroller
J
TOA
TRC
V24
VDI
ZO
ZOA
µC
08.97 A Abbreviations
A
03.96
A-310 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
08.97
A Abbreviations
Notes
04.00
B
B-311
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
References
General Documentation
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
Ordering Information
Catalog NC 60.1
Order No.: E86060K4460A101A67600
SIMATIC
SIMATIC S7 Programmable Logic Controllers
Catalog ST 70
Order No.: E86 060K4670A111A3
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
Technical Information
Catalog NC 60.2
Order No.: E86060D4460A201A47600
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
Brochure
SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE
Accessories and Equipment for Special-Purpose Machines
Catalog NC Z
Order No.: E86060K4490A001A67600
Electronic Documentation
The SINUMERIK System (04.00 Edition)
DOC ON CD
(includes all SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC and SIMODRIVE 611D
publications)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985CA000BG2
/BU/
/ST7/
/VS/
/W/
/Z/
/CD6/
B
B
03.96
B-312 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
User Documentation
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
AutoTurn Graphic Programming System (07.99 Edition)
Operators Guide
Part 2: Setup
Order No.: 6FC5 2984AA500BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
Short Guide AutoTurn Operation (07.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2984AA300BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
AutoTurn Graphic Programming System (07.99 Edition)
Operators Guide
Part 1: Programming
Order No.: 6FC5 2984AA400BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
Operators Guide (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AA000BP2
Operators Guide
Operators Guide Interactive Programming (MMC 102/103)
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/ FM-NC
Operators Guide Unit Operator Panel (04.96 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2983AA600BP1
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Operators Guide HT6 (HPU new) (06.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2980AD600BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
Short Operation Guide (12.98 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AA100BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Operators Guide ManualTurn (12.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AD000BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Short Guide ManualTurn (11.98 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2982AD400BP0
/AUE/
/AUK/
/AUP/
/BA/
/BAE/
/BAH/
/BAK/
/BAM/
/KAM/
B References 04.00
B
03.96
B-313
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Operators Guide ShopMill (11.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AD100BP1
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Short Guide ShopMill (01.98 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2982AD300BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Operators Guide Handheld Programming Unit (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AD200BP1
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC
Users Guide Measuring Cycles (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AA700BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC
Diagnostics Guide (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AA200BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC
Programming Guide Fundamentals (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AB000BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC
Programming Guide Advanced (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AB100BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
Short Guide Programming (12.98 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AB300BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC
Programming Guide Cycles (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AB400BP2
PCIN 4.4
Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC Module
Order No.: 6FX2 060 4AA004XB0 (German, English, French)
Order from: WK Fürth
SINUMERIK 840Di
System Overview (06.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2985AE400BP0
/BAS/
/KAS/
/BAP/
/BNM/
/DA/
/PG/
/PGA/
/PGK/
/PGZ/
/PI/
/SYI/
B References
04.00
B
03.96
B-314 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC
SIMODRIVE 611D
Lists (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AB700BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC
Operator Components Manual (HW) (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AA500BP2
SIMODRIVE Sensor
Absolute Encoder with PROFIBUS-DP
User Guide (HW) (02.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN11970AB100BP1
SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE
EMC Installation Guide
Planning Guide (HW) (06.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2970AD300BP1
SINUMERIK 810D
Manual Configuring (HW) (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2973AD100BP2
SINUMERIK 840D
NCU 561.2573.2 Configuring Manual (HW) (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AC100BP2
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 570 Configuring Manual (HW) (04.96 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2973AC000BP0
SIMODRIVE Sensor (05.99 Edition)
Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives
Configuring/Installation Guide, SIMAG-H (HW)
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP0
a) Lists
/LIS/
b) Hardware
/BH/
/BHA/
/EMV/
/PHC/
/PHD/
/PHF/
/PMH/
B References 04.00
B
03.96
B-315
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC
Description of Functions, Basic Machine (Part 1) (04.00 Edition)
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AC200BP2
A2 Various Interface Signals
A3 Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones
B1 Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look Ahead
B2 Acceleration
D1 Diagnostic Tools
D2 Interactive Programming
F1 Travel to Fixed Stop
G2 Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control
H2 Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC
K1 Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation Mode
K2 Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames,
Actual-Value System for Workpiece, External Zero Offset
K4 Communication
N2 EMERGENCY STOP
P1 Transverse Axes
P3 Basic PLC Program
R1 Reference Point Approach
S1 Spindles
V1 Feeds
W1 Tool Compensation
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2)/FM-NC
Description of Functions, Extended Functions (Part 2) (04.00 Edition)
including FM-NC: Turning, Stepper Motor
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AC300BP2
A4 Digital and Analog NCK I/Os
B3 Several Operator Panels and NCUs
B4 Operation via PG/PC
F3 Remote Diagnostics
H1 Jog with/without Handwheel
K3 Compensations
K5 Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement
L1 FM-NC Local Bus
M1 Kinematic Transformation
M5 Measurement
N3 Software Cams, Position Switching Signals
N4 Punching and Nibbling
P2 Positioning Axes
P5 Oscillation
R2 Rotary Axes
S3 Synchronous Spindles
S5 Synchronized Actions (up to and including SW 3)
S6 Stepper Motor Control
S7 Memory Configuration
T1 Indexing Axes
W3 Tool Change
W4 Grinding
c) Software
/FB1/
/FB2/
B References
04.00
B
03.96
B-316 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2)/FM-NC
Description of Functions, Special Functions (Part 3) (04.00 Edition)
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AC800BP2
F2 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation
G1 Gantry Axes
G3 Cycle Times
K6 Contour Tunnel Monitoring
M3 Coupled Motion and Leading Value Coupling
S8 Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless Grinding
T3 Tangential Control
V2 Preprocessing
W5 3D Tool Radius Compensation
TE1 Clearance Control
TE2 Analog Axis
TE3 Master-Slave for Drives
TE4 Transformation Package Handling
TE5 Setpoint Exchange
TE6 MCS Coupling
SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of Functions, Drive Functions (04.00 Edition)
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6SN1 1970AA800BP6
DB1 Operational Messages/Alarm Reactions
DD1 Diagnostic Functions
DD2 Speed Control Loop
DE1 Extended Drive Functions
DF1 Enable Commands
DG1 Encoder Parameterization
DM1 Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and
Controller Data
DS1 Current Control Loop
DÜ1 Monitors/Limitations
SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Digital
Description of Functions
ANA-Module (02.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 1970AB800BP0
SINUMERIK 840D
Description of Functions Digitizing (07.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2974AC500BP0
DI1 Start-up
DI2 Scanning with Tactile Sensors (scancad scan)
DI3 Scanning with Lasers (scancad laser)
DI4 Milling Program Generation (scancad mill)
/FB3/
/FBA/
/FBAN/
/FBD/
B References 04.00
B
03.96
B-317
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
CAM Integration DNC NT-2000
Description of Functions
System for NC Data Management and Data Distribution (10.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AE500BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of Functions
ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AE100BP1
SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital
Description of Functions
HLA Module (08.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 1970AB600BP1
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of Functions ManualTurn (12.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AD500BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
Description of Functions (03.96 Edition)
Configuring of Operator Interface OP 030
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 2973AC400BP0
BA Operators Guide
EU Development Environment (Configuring Package)
PS Online only: Configuring Syntax (Configuring Package)
PSE Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface
IK Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration
SINUMERIK 840D
Description of Functions C-PLC Programming (03.96 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2973AB600BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of Functions
SINCOM Computer Link (02.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AD600BP0
NFL Host Computer Interface
NPL PLC/NCK Interface
SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE
Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (05.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AB800BP1
/FBDN/
/FBFA/
/FBHLA/
/FBMA/
/FBO/
/FBP/
/FBR/
/FBSI/
B References
04.00
B
03.96
B-318 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of Functions ShopMill (05.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AD800BP1
SIMATIC
FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP (01.97 Edition)
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6SN1 1970AA700BP3
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of Functions Synchronized Actions (04.00 Edition)
for Wood, Glass, Ceramics, Presses
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AD400BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of Functions
Tool Information SINTDI with Online Help (04.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AE000BP0
SIMODRIVE 611 universal
Description of Functions (10.99 Edition)
Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control and Positioning
Order No.: 6SN1 1970AB200BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Description of Functions Tool Management (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AC600BP2
SINUMERIK 840Di
Manual (06.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AE500BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
Screen Kit MMC 100/Unit Operator Panel (06.96 Edition)
Description of Functions: Software Update and Configuration
Order No.: 6FC5 2973EA100BP1
SIMODRIVE 611 universal
Short Description (10.99 Edition)
Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control
Order No.: 6SN1 1970AB400BP2
/FBSP/
/FBST/
/FBSY/
/FBTD/
/FBU/
/FBW/
/HBI/
/IK/
/KBU/
B References 04.00
B
03.96
B-319
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Linear Motors (02.00 Edition)
(on request)
ALL General Information about Linear Motors
1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
1FN3 1FN3 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
CON Connections
Order No.: 6SN1 1970AB700BP1
SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Motors (01.98 Edition)
Three-Phase AC Motors for Feed and
Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 1970AA200BP3
SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D
Planning Guide Inverters (08.98 Edition)
Transistor PWM Inverters for
AC Feed Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 1970AA000BP4
SIMODRIVE POSMO A
User Manual (02.00 Edition)
Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP
Order No.: 6SN2 1970AA000BP1
SIMODRIVE POSMO A
Installation Instructions (enclosed with POSMO A) (12.98 Edition)
Order No.: 462 008 0815 00
SIMATIC S7-300 (10.98 Edition)
Manual: Assembly, CPU Data (HW)
Reference Manual: Module Data
Order No.: 6ES7 3988AA038AA0
SIMATIC S7-300 (03.97 Edition)
Manual: STEP 7, Basic Information, V. 3.1
Order No.: 6ES7 8104CA028AA0
SIMATIC S7-300 (03.97 Edition)
Manual
STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1
Order No.: 6ES7 8104CA028AR0
SIMATIC S7-300 (04.97 Edition)
FM 353 Step Drive Positioning Module
Order in conjunction with Configuring Package
/PJLM/
/PJM/
/PJU/
/POS1/
/POS2/
/S7H/
/S7HT/
/S7HR/
/S7S/
B References
04.00
B
03.96
B-320 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
SIMATIC S7-300 (04.97 Edition)
FM 354 Servo Drive Positioning Module
Order in conjunction with Configuring Package
SIMATIC S7-300 (10.99 Edition)
FM 357 Multi-Axis Module for Servo and Stepper Drives
Order in conjunction with Configuring Package
SIMODRIVE 611 (01.98 Edition)
Manual Single-Axis Positioning for MCU 172A
Order No.: 6SN 11974MA000BP0
SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D, SimoPro 3.1
Program for Configuring Machine-Tool Drives
Order No.: 6SC6 1116PC000AAj
Order from: WK Fürth
SIMODRIVE 611A
Installation and Start-Up Guide (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN 11970AA600BP5
SINUMERIK 810D
Installation and Start-Up Guide (04.00 Edition)
(incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software)
Order No.: 6FC5 2973AD200BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D
Installation and Start-Up Guide (04.00 Edition)
(incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AB100BP2
SINUMERIK FM-NC
Installation and Start-Up Guide (04.96 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2973AB000BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
MMC Installation and Start-Up Guide (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 2975AE200BP2
IM1 Start-up functions for the MMC 100.2
IM3 Start-up functions for the MMC 103
IM4 Start-up functions for HMI Advanced (PCU 50)
HE1 Editor help
BE1 Supplement operator interface
J
/S7L/
/S7M/
/SHM/
/SP/
d) Installation and
start-up
/IAA/
/IAC/
/IAD/
/IAF/
/IAM/
B References 04.00
Index-321
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Index
Numbers
11210, 11-249
A
Abbreviations, A-305
Aborting MD import, 11-282
Aborting measuring functions, 10-210
Absolute encoder
Readjustment, 6-122
Setting up, 6-121
With wide traversing range, 6-123
Absolute measuring systems, parameterization,
6-121
Acceleration, 6-132
Accessories, 1-15
Activate status, 3-50, 3-64
Alarm list, 8-195
Alarm numbers, 8-192
Alarm text files for HPU, 8-190
Alarm text files for MMC 100, 8-186
Alarm text files for MMC 102/103, 8-188
Alarm text languages, 8-189
Alarm texts, 8-186
AM function (software 3.1 and higher), 6-176
Analog output (DAC), 10-233
Area-specific archiving, 11-250
Assignment of actual value channels, 6-114
Assignment of CPU programs, 3-47
Assignment of setpoint channels, 6-114
Assignments, 5-78
Automatic controller setting, 10-234
Axes, 6-108
Axis
Monitoring, 6-133
Position controller data, 6-130
Reference point approach, 6-138
Test run, 9-198
Velocity matching, 6-129
Axis configuration, 6-108
Axis data, 6-127
Axis mode, 6-140
Axis types, 6-127
B
Back up hard disk, 11-265, 11-268
Backing up changed values, 11-249
Battery replacement, 12-296
BIOS setup, MMC102/103, 5-84
Braking resistor, 2-21
Bus addresses, 3-38, 3-40
C
Calculation resolutions, 6-101
Call communication configuration, 3-48
Changing the SR parameters, 3-50, 3-63
Channel level, 6-109
Communication does not start, 3-39
Configuration, 2-19
Configuring the HHU, 3-53
Connection configuration, 2-24
Connection of HHU, 3-44
Connection of mains infeed module, 2-25
Connection terminals on SIMODRIVE 611 mains
supply module, 2-26
Connection to MPI bus, 3-45
Connection to OPI bus, 3-44
Contour monitoring, 6-136
Control loops, 6-130
Control power-up (NC), 5-82
Conversion and transmission, k, 8-187
Current control loop measurement, 10-240
Customer operator panel, interfaces, 3-68
Customer operator panel interface, 3-68
Switch, 3-68
Cyclic operation, 7-183
D
Data backup
Series start-up, 11-250
Transmission error, 11-253
Data backup on MMC 102/103, 11-254
Data backup via MMC100, 11-248
Data backup via V.24 on the MMC 102/103,
11-255
Design of FDD/MSD modules, 2-28
Digitizing, configuration of components, 2-32
Digitizing, hardware requirements, 2-33
DIP switch settings for MPI, 3-52
DIP switch settings for OPI, 3-53
Display resolution, 6-101
Documentation, 1-16
DRAM, 6-103
Drive configuration, 6-111
Setting, 6-111
03.96
Index-322 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Drive data output, 11-257
Drive optimization parameters, 6-124
Drive parameterization, 6-116
Non-Siemens motor, 6-117
Drive system, power-up, 5-84
Dynamic monitoring, 6-136
Velocity monitoring, 6-136
E
Electrical configuration, 2-23
EMC measures, 4-73
Enable
Axis, 9-197
Drive, 9-197
Encoder connection, 2-29
Encoder limit frequency, 6-148
Encoder monitoring, 6-136
Enter area for receiving, 3-49, 3-61
Enter area for transmitting, 3-49, 3-61
Error during control power-up (NC), 5-82
ESD measures, 4-74
Evaluation of line checksums, 11-282
Evaluation of MD numbers, 11-282
Example: Start-up of NCK I/O devices, 6-150
Export 840D version, 1-16
Export approval, 1-16
F
Fan replacement, 12-296
File name, format, 11-246
Frequency response measurement, 10-211
Function blocks, 7-184
G
Gantry axes, 10-221
GD parameters, meaning, 3-54
Gear stage speed, 6-148
General configuration, 2-23
Geometry axes, 6-108
Ghost, 11-265
Graphic display, 10-219
H
Handheld programming unit (HPU), 3-56
Handheld unit (HHU), 3-52
Hardware limit switch, 6-134
Hardware replacement, 12-296
Hardware requirements, 3-38, 3-40
HEX machine data, bit editor, 6-88
HHU configuration via MPI, 3-47
HHU configuration via OPI, 3-46
HPU
Alarm text files, 8-190
Functions, 3-56
Input signals, 3-57
Interface signals, 3-57
Software version, 3-56
Standard configuration, 3-58
HPU address, 3-64
I
Import data backup, 11-265
Inch system, 6-99
Incremental measuring systems, parameteriza-
tion, 6-118
Infeed/regenerative feedback module I/RF, 2-21
Initial start-up, 6-97
Initialization program output, 11-261
Input limits, 6-101
Install language packages, 3-71
Installing a replacement hard disk, 11-274
Interface signals for measuring system switch-
over, 6-129
Interface to customer operator panel, assigned
Inputs/outputs, 3-39
Interfaces, 2-31
K
KV factor, 6-130
L
Language, switchover, 3-70
Language default, 3-70
Languages, 8-187
Limit switches, 9-197
Line checksums, 11-281
Linear axis
With linear scale, 6-120
With machine-mounted rotary encoder, 6-119
With motor-mounted rotary encoder, 6-118
Linear motors , 1FN1, 1FN3, 6-152
Loading archiving data, 11-251
Loading of scaling machine data, 6-106
Loading PLC program, 7-182
Loading standard machine data, 6-107
Loop gain, 6-130
M
Machine axes, 6-108
Machine control panel, 3-66
Power-up, 5-84
04.00
Index
03.96
Index-323
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Machine data, 6-87, 11-284
Entering, 6-88
Handling, 6-89
Machine data access via part program, 14-302
Machine data masking filter, 6-92, 6-94
Activating the group filter, 6-93
Display criteria, 6-93
Expert mode, 6-94
Saving the settings, 6-95
Vertical softkeys, 6-94
Machine data masking filters
Selection, 6-92
Setting, 6-92
Machine data numbers in MD files, 11-282
Machine level, 6-108
Mains infeed module, 2-21
Master language, 8-187
Matching encoders with linear measuring sys-
tems, 6-120
mbdde.ini, 8-188
MCP
Display elements, 3-66
Interfaces, 3-66
LEDs, 3-66
Switches, 3-66
MCP configuration via OPI, 3-46
MCP, assigned inputs/outputs, 3-39
MD masking filter, access rights, 6-93
Measurement of speed control loop, 10-212,
10-242
Measures to suppress interference, 4-73
Mechanical configuration, 2-20
Mechanical system measurement, 10-240
Memory areas, 6-102
Memory configuration, 6-102
Hardware configuration, 6-102
Message texts, 8-186
Metric system, 6-99
MMC
Language, 3-69
OPI, 3-69
Protection levels, 3-70
Screen, 3-69
MMC 100, rear, 2-30
MMC 100/102/103 operator panel, 3-69
MMC data output, 11-262
MMC100/102/103
Connection, 2-30
Control elements, 2-31
Interfaces, 2-31
MMC100/102/103 power-up, 5-80
Monitoring of positioning, 6-133
More than one language, 8-187
Motion enable drive test, 10-209
Motor connection, 2-28
MPI bus nodes, 3-43
MPI, network rules, 3-36
MPI, settings, 3-35
N
NC data output, 11-258
NCK general reset, 5-78
NCU display elements, 5-77
NCU operator control elements, 5-77
NCU, control elements, 2-22
NCU, interfaces, 2-22
Networking, 3-48, 3-60
Norton Ghost, 11-265
O
Open-loop-controlled infeed OI, 2-21
Operation for PLC general reset, 5-80
Operational message texts, 11-248
Operator panel settings, V.24 interfaces, 3-70
OPI bus nodes, 3-43
OPI, network rules, 3-36
OPI, settings, 3-35
Option data, 6-87
P
Parameterization of basic PLC program, 3-46,
3-51, 3-65
Part program start, system settings, 6-179
Physical quantities, 6-100
PLC
Cyclic operation, 7-183
Start-up behavior, 7-183
Status displays, 5-83
PLC basic program, 7-181
Parameterization, 7-184
PLC basic program, Parameterizing, 3-58
PLC data output, 11-262
PLC general reset, 5-79
PLC memory, 7-182
PLC module, 7-181
PLC restart, 5-79
PLC start-up, 7-181
PLC status, 7-183
PLC user program, 7-181
Position control loop
Measurement, 10-216
Reference frequency response, 10-216
Setpoint step change, 10-217
Step height, 10-218
Power on, 5-78
Power on sequence, 5-78
Power-up, 5-78
System settings, 6-177
Preconditions for start-up, address/switch set-
tings, 5-78
Problems during power-up, 5-81
Program level, 6-109
04.00 Index
03.96
Index-324 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Proportional gain, 10-241
Protection level concept, 6-90
Protection levels, 6-90
R
RAM memory
Dynamic, 6-103
Static, 6-104
Redefinition of protection levels, 6-91
Reference point approach, 6-138
For incremental measuring system, 6-138
With distance-coded ref. markers, 6-139
References, B-311
Referencing with absolute encoders, 6-139
Regenerative feedback , 2-21
RESET, system settings, 6-178
Reset time, 10-242
Restart, 6-115, 7-183
Rotary axes, limitations, 6-123
Rotary axis
With machine-mounted rotary encoder, 6-119
With motor-mounted rotary encoder, 6-119
Rotary encoders, 6-118
Rotor position identification, 6-160
S
Saving user data, 11-268
Scaling machine data, 6-106
SDB, 3-60, 3-64
SDB210, 3-51
Self-optimization, 10-236
Series start-up file output, 11-263
Series start-up or area-specific archiving, 11-246
Set HHU, 3-51
Setting data, 6-87, 11-284
Handling, 6-89
Setting interface parameters, 3-53
Setting the axis-specific setpoint parameters,
6-114
Setting the axis-specific setpoint/actual value pa-
rameters, 6-114
Setting the MCP interface, 3-39
Setting the MCP/interface to customer operator
panel, 3-39
Setting the reduction ratio, 3-49, 3-63
Shielded signal leads, 4-73
Sign-of-life monitoring, 7-183
Simulation axes, 6-129
Software, 1-15
Software limit switch, 6-134
Software update, 12-285
Special axes, 6-108
Speed control loop, 6-126
Interference frequency response, 10-213
Reference frequency response, 10-213
Setpoint/disturbance step changes, 10-214
Spindle
Encoder matching, 6-142
Monitoring, 6-148
Parameter sets, 6-141
Positioning, 6-145
Setpoint adjustment, 6-144
Speeds, 6-144
Synchronization, 6-146
Test, 9-200
Spindle configuration, 6-142
Spindle data, 6-140
Spindle definition, 6-140
Spindle number, 6-140
Spindle operating modes, 6-140
Spindle speed, 6-148
Spindles, 6-108
SRAM, 6-104
Standard 840D version, 1-16
Standard application, 3-38, 3-40
Standard bus addresses, 3-43
Standard configuration, 3-38
Standard files, 8-188
Start-up, linear motor, 6-154
Start-up of NCK I/O devices, 6-150
Start-up tool
Aborting measuring functions, 10-210
Analog output, 10-204
Circularity test, 10-204
Fourier analysis, 10-204
Frequency response measurement, 10-211
Gantry axes, 10-221
Graphic display, 10-219
Hardware requirements, 10-205
Measuring functions, 10-204, 10-207
Software requirements, 10-205
Starting, 10-206
System requirements, 10-205
Trace function, 10-222
Start-up tool, instructions for use, 10-204
Start-up tool|installation, 10-205
Start-up design concept, Example, 6-96
Start-up sequence, 5-76
Start-up tool, 5-84
Status display during power-up, 5-82
STEP7 Tools, 3-38
Storage of text files, 8-188
Syntax for alarm text files, 8-192
System data, 6-99
Basic settings, 6-99
Control time cycles, 6-99
T
Terminating the start-up tool, 10-206
Testrun preconditions, 9-197
Text file for cycle alarm texts, 8-192
Text file for PLC alarm texts, 8-193
Three-conductor connection (standard circuit),
2-27
04.00
Index
03.96
Index-325
Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
Tool box, 14-301
Application, 14-301
Hardware, 14-301
Software, 14-301
Torque control loop
Measurement, 10-211
Measurement parameters, 10-211
Trace function, 10-222
Basic display, 10-223
Creating subdirectories, 10-230
Display function, 10-228
File function, 10-230
Graph parameterization, 10-229
Measurement parameters, 10-225
Operation, 10-223
Parameterization, 10-224
Performing measurement, 10-227
Print graph, 10-231
Printer setting, 10-231
Signal selection, 10-224
Softkeys, 10-225
Traverse request drive test, 10-209
Traversing direction, 6-130
Typical circuit, 2-27
U
Upgrade of MMC103 software with Windows NT
4.0, 12-287
Upgrading the MMC 100/100.2/101 software,
12-286
Upgrading the NC, 12-288
UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY, 11-249
User files, 8-188
V
V.24 interface, 11-255
VALITEK streamer, 11-276
Velocity monitoring, 6-136
Vf function, 6-176
Visual inspection, 5-78
W
Working area limitations, 6-135
J
04.00 Index
03.96
Index-326 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 04.00 Edition
04.00
Index
Notes
From
Name
Company/Dept.
Address
Telephone: /
Suggestions
Corrections
For Publication/Manual:
SINUMERIK 840D
SIMODRIVE 611D
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Installation and Start-Up Guide
Order No. 6FC5 297–5AB10–0BP2
Edition: 04.00
Should you come across any printing
errors when reading this publication, please
notify us on this sheet.
Suggestions for improvement are also wel-
come.
SIEMENS AG
A&D MC IS
P.O. Box 3180
D–91050 Erlangen
Tel. 0180 / 525 8008 / 5009 [Hotline]
Fax +49 9131 / 98 1145
email: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de
Telefax: /
Suggestions and/or corrections